Information

en
Operating Manual
Hydraulic excavator
R 984 C - Litronic
from serial number 13321
Document identification
ORIGINAL MANUAL
Order number: 10069859
Edition: 06 / 2011
Valid for: R 984 C - Litronic from serial number 13321
Author: LEC - Technical documentation department
Product identification
Manufacturer: Liebherr-Mining Equipment Colmar SAS
Type: R 984 C - Litronic
Type no.: 528 / 1012 / 1013 (conformity CE)
Type no.: 922 / 759 / 977 / 1085
LEC/en/Edition: 06 / 2011
Address
Liebherr-Mining Equipment Colmar SAS
49 rue Frédéric Hartmann
CS 50038, F-68025 Colmar Cedex
Operating Manual
Machine data
Please fill in the following data when you receive your machine.
This will also be of use to you when ordering replacement parts.
Vehicle ident. number:

WLHZ . . . . . ZK . . . . . .
Construction year:
. . . .
First start-up date:
. . / . . / . .
0-2 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
Preface
These operating instructions have been written for the machine operator and for the
maintenance personnel of the machine.
They contain:
– the technical data.
– the safety requirements.
– the operating instructions.
– the maintenance instructions.
The operating instructions are to be read and used carefully by all persons
who carry out work with or on the machine before putting the machine into
service for the first time and later, at regular intervals.
Work with or on the machine includes, for example:
– Operation including setting up and equipping, rectifying malfunctions during the
course of work, resolving production dropouts, care, disposal of operating and
process materials.
– Maintenance, including maintenance, inspection and repair work.
– Transportation or loading the machine.
The operating instructions allow the machine operator to familiarize himself with the
machine more easily and prevent malfunctions occurring due to improper operation.
The observance of the operating and maintenance instructions by maintenance per-
sonnel:
– increases reliability in use.
– extends the service life of your machine.
– reduces repair costs and downtime.
The operating instructions belong with the machine. Place a copy in an easily
reached position on the cab storage shelf.
The operating and maintenance instructions must be completed by information on
current national regulations for accident prevention and protection. In addition to the
operating instructions and legally binding regulations on accident prevention which
apply in the user country and at point of use, authorized specialist rules for safe and
correct working procedures are also to be observed.
These operating and maintenance instructions contain all the information required
for operating and maintaining your machine.
– Some illustrations in these operating instructions may depict details and working
devices which differ to your machine.
– In some illustrations, protective devices and covers have been removed in the in-
terests of better presentation.
– Improvements, which are always being incorporated into our machines, may re-
sult in changes to your machine which are not yet indicated in these operating in-
structions.
However, should you require any further explanations or information, LIEBHERR's
technical documentation, sales school and customer service departments are avail-
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
able for your convenience.

You will appreciate that LIEBHERR warranty claims made on the basis of improper
operation, unsatisfactory maintenance, use of unauthorized operating materials or
non-adherence to safety regulations cannot be recognized.
LIEBHERR will annul any and all obligations incurred by LIEBHERR and / or its deal-
erships, such as guarantee commitments, service contracts etc. without prior notice
in the event that replacement parts other than original LIEBHERR parts or parts pur-
chased from LIEBHERR are used for maintenance or repair work.
Modifications, conditions, copyright

We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice in the course of tech-
nical developments.
The information and illustrations contained in these operating instructions may nei-
ther be copied and distributed, nor used for the purposes of competition. All rights
are expressly reserved in accordance with copyright laws.
The warranty and liability conditions of LIEBHERR’s general business conditions will
not be enlarged upon through the above information.
MJFCIFSS
Operating Manual
1 Product description ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Assembly - overview.............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Machine and construction equipment....................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Uppercarriage........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Undercarriage........................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2 Vibration emissions................................................................................................................................ 1-4
1.3 EC Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4 Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.1 Working technical data ............................................................................................................. 1-7
1.4.2 Technical description................................................................................................................ 1-7
2 Safety instructions......................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Meaning of the symbols in this manual.................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Use in accordance with the regulations ................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4 Servicing the machine safely ............................................................................................................... 2-14
2.5 Signs on the machine .......................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 2-20
2.5.2 Arrangement of signs ............................................................................................................. 2-22
2.5.3 Explanation of signs ............................................................................................................... 2-24
3 Control and operation ................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Operating and control elements............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Overview of the operator’s standing position ........................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Arrangement of joystick ............................................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.3 Keyboard .................................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.1.4 Monitoring display .................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.5 Main screen ............................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.2 The access and the outfit of the cab.................................................................................................... 3-25
3.2.1 Entering or leaving the cab..................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.2 Height adjustable cab (optional extra) .................................................................................... 3-28
3.2.3 Height and inclination adjustable cab (optional extra) ............................................................ 3-28
3.2.4 Cab adjustable hydraulically on slide rails (optional extra)..................................................... 3-31
3.2.5 Safety lever ............................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.2.6 Operator’s seat ....................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.2.7 Windscreen ............................................................................................................................ 3-38
3.2.8 Sunshade ............................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.2.9 Emergency exit – rear window ............................................................................................... 3-39
3.2.10 Interior lighting ........................................................................................................................ 3-40
3.2.11 Fire extinguisher* ................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.2.12 Windscreen wiper ................................................................................................................... 3-41
3.2.13 Lighting ................................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.2.14 Heating/air-conditioning system ............................................................................................. 3-44
3.3 Setting the machine into operation ...................................................................................................... 3-50
3.3.1 Starting / stopping the machine .............................................................................................. 3-52
3.3.2 Starting aids ........................................................................................................................... 3-59
3.3.3 Starting aids ........................................................................................................................... 3-59
3.3.4 Jump start procedure ............................................................................................................. 3-64

3.3.5 Anti-theft device with code key (option).................................................................................. 3-65
3.3.6 Immobilizer with electronic ignition key (option) ..................................................................... 3-65
3.3.7 Emergency operations ........................................................................................................... 3-67
3.3.8 Travel functions ...................................................................................................................... 3-70
3.3.9 Drive warning device (optional extra) ..................................................................................... 3-73
3.3.10 Pre-requisite ........................................................................................................................... 3-74
3.3.11 Process preconisations. ......................................................................................................... 3-75
3.3.12 Other preconisations. ............................................................................................................. 3-76
3.3.13 With clevis type eylet available............................................................................................... 3-76
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 0-5

MJFCIFSS
Operating Manual
3.4 Working with the machine.................................................................................................................... 3-77

3.4.1 The uppercarriage swing movements .................................................................................... 3-83
3.4.2 Working position ..................................................................................................................... 3-85
3.4.3 Joystick functions when setting up the machine..................................................................... 3-86
3.4.4 Lowering the work equipment when the engine is not running............................................... 3-89
3.4.5 Turning, rotating, bolting and unbolting the add-on unit ......................................................... 3-90
3.4.6 Magnetic system (optional extra)............................................................................................ 3-91
3.4.7 Cut off by end switches of attachment movements (Option) .................................................. 3-92
3.4.8 Overload warning device (Option) .......................................................................................... 3-97
3.5 Attaching and dismounting equipment parts........................................................................................ 3-99
3.5.1 Mechanical quick-change adapter (option)............................................................................. 3-99
3.5.2 Hydraulic quick-change adapter (option) .............................................................................. 3-104
3.5.3 Minimum impact working methods for your machine............................................................ 3-111
3.5.4 Preparatory activities ............................................................................................................ 3-112
3.5.5 Working with the hoe type bucket......................................................................................... 3-113
3.5.6 Loading the transport vehicle ............................................................................................... 3-114
3.5.7 Working with the Shovel bucket ........................................................................................... 3-115
3.5.8 Working with the clamshell bucket (construction equipment) ............................................... 3-117
3.5.9 Hoisting work ........................................................................................................................ 3-119
3.5.10 Working with the hydraulic hammer...................................................................................... 3-120
3.5.11 Working with the grapple (industrial equipment)................................................................... 3-121
3.5.12 Skimming .............................................................................................................................. 3-122
3.6 Transport............................................................................................................................................ 3-123
3.6.1 Transporting the machine on a low loader ........................................................................... 3-124
3.6.2 Loading the machine with a crane ........................................................................................ 3-126
3.6.3 Travelling procedures for mining machine............................................................................ 3-127
3.6.4 Excavator lifting and lashing operations ............................................................................... 3-129
4 Malfunctions ................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Error code charts ................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Faults and remedies .............................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.1 Diesel engine and fuel system.................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.2 Hydraulic system ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.3 Transmission ............................................................................................................................ 4-5
4.2.4 Electrical system....................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.5 Work equipment ....................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.6 Heating/air-conditioning system ............................................................................................... 4-7
4.3 Fuses and relays.................................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.1 Fuse box E50 ......................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.2 A1010 Plate ............................................................................................................................ 4-11
5 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Servicing the machine safely ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Maintenance access doors .................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.2.1 Overview of access doors ........................................................................................................ 5-8
5.2.2 Door lock .................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.3 Lubricants and operating fluids ............................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.1 General information on changing lubricants and operating fluids........................................... 5-10
5.3.2 Lubrication chart ..................................................................................................................... 5-11

5.3.3 Lubricant chart ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.3.4 Operating material chart ......................................................................................................... 5-13
5.4 Lubricating and operating material specifications ................................................................................ 5-14
5.4.1 Lubrication oil for the diesel engine ........................................................................................ 5-14
5.4.2 Fuel......................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.4.3 Hydraulic oil specifications for LIEBHERR Mining excavators ............................................... 5-14
5.4.4 Swing and travel gear oils ...................................................................................................... 5-19
5.4.5 Splitterbox oil .......................................................................................................................... 5-19
0-6 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Operating Manual
5.4.6 Lubricating grease and other lubricants ................................................................................. 5-20

5.4.7 Coolant ................................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.4.8 Lubricants specifications for -40°C......................................................................................... 5-22
5.5 Diesel engine ....................................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.5.1 Check air filter for contamination ............................................................................................ 5-23
5.5.2 Checking the oil level in the diesel engine ............................................................................. 5-23
5.5.3 Changing the diesel engine oil ............................................................................................... 5-24
5.5.4 Refill the engine oil sump ....................................................................................................... 5-26
5.5.5 Engine and splitterbox mounting screws ................................................................................ 5-27
5.5.6 Splitterbox mounting screws .................................................................................................. 5-27
5.5.7 Belt for the alternator of the Diesel engine ............................................................................. 5-28
5.6 Monitoring system of the Diesel engine (QSK system) ....................................................................... 5-28
5.6.1 Indicator lights H60, H61 and H62 ......................................................................................... 5-28
5.6.2 Diagnostic switches S82 and S136 for engine monitoring ..................................................... 5-30
5.7 Cooling system .................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.1 Checking and cleaning the cooling system ............................................................................ 5-31
5.7.2 Checking the coolant level ..................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3 Coolant antifreeze and anti-corrosion fluid ............................................................................. 5-32
5.7.4 Changing the coolant ............................................................................................................. 5-32
5.7.5 Changing the water filter ........................................................................................................ 5-33
5.8 Fuel system ......................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.8.1 Refuelling ............................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.8.2 Electrical refuelling pump (optional extra) .............................................................................. 5-34
5.8.3 Draining the fuel tank ............................................................................................................. 5-36
5.8.4 Check fuel system / fuel level ................................................................................................. 5-37
5.8.5 Drain the water separator of the fuel filters ............................................................................ 5-38
5.9 Air system ............................................................................................................................................ 5-38
5.9.1 Air pressure regulator and compressor .................................................................................. 5-39
5.9.2 Antifreeze pump ..................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.9.3 Drain the air tank .................................................................................................................... 5-40
5.9.4 Air filter and air lubricator for central lubrication ..................................................................... 5-40
5.10 Dry air filter .......................................................................................................................................... 5-41
5.10.1 Checking the air inlet hose ..................................................................................................... 5-42
5.10.2 Changing the primary filter element ....................................................................................... 5-42
5.10.3 Changing the safety element.................................................................................................. 5-43
5.11 Hydraulic system ................................................................................................................................. 5-44
5.11.1 Preparatory activities .............................................................................................................. 5-44
5.11.2 Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank ............................................................................ 5-44
5.11.3 Depressurizing the hydraulic system...................................................................................... 5-45
5.11.4 Emptying and refilling the hydraulic tank ................................................................................ 5-46
5.11.5 Return-line filter ...................................................................................................................... 5-47
5.11.6 Servo filter .............................................................................................................................. 5-48
5.11.7 Replenishing oil filter in swing circuit ...................................................................................... 5-50
5.11.8 High pressure filters in working circuit .................................................................................... 5-50
5.11.9 Control circuit ......................................................................................................................... 5-51
5.11.10 Bleeding the hydraulic pumps ................................................................................................ 5-51
5.11.11 Bypass oil filter for hydraulic circuit (option) ........................................................................... 5-53
5.11.12 Servicing the hydraulic cylinder .............................................................................................. 5-54
5.11.13 Replacing hydraulic hoses ..................................................................................................... 5-55

5.12 Oil changes on components ................................................................................................................ 5-56
5.12.1 General information ................................................................................................................ 5-56
5.12.2 Swing gear - Oil change ......................................................................................................... 5-57
5.12.3 Changing the oil in the splitterbox .......................................................................................... 5-58
5.12.4 Travelling gear - changing the oil ........................................................................................... 5-59
5.13 Travel gear........................................................................................................................................... 5-59
5.13.1 Checking mounting screws of travel gears, track pads and sprocket wheels ........................ 5-60
5.13.2 Monitoring the track tension ................................................................................................... 5-60
5.13.3 Retightening the track ............................................................................................................ 5-61
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 0-7

MJFCIFSS
Operating Manual
5.13.4 Releasing the track tension .................................................................................................... 5-62

5.13.5 Cleaning the travel gear ......................................................................................................... 5-62
5.14 Electrical system .................................................................................................................................. 5-63
5.14.1 Notes on the electrical system................................................................................................ 5-63
5.14.2 Main battery switch ................................................................................................................. 5-64
5.14.3 Battery care ............................................................................................................................ 5-64
5.15 Heating/air-conditioning system........................................................................................................... 5-65
5.15.1 Recirculated and fresh air filters ............................................................................................. 5-66
5.15.2 Heating system ....................................................................................................................... 5-67
5.15.3 Air-conditioning system .......................................................................................................... 5-68
5.16 Greasing the machine.......................................................................................................................... 5-69
5.16.1 Swing ring lubrication ............................................................................................................. 5-69
5.16.2 Lubrication of attachment bearing points................................................................................ 5-71
5.17 Quick-change systems......................................................................................................................... 5-71
5.17.1 Greasing the mechanical quick-change adapter (option) ....................................................... 5-71
5.17.2 Hydraulic quick-change adapter (option) ................................................................................ 5-72
5.18 Drive unit brakes and swing gear brakes............................................................................................. 5-73
5.19 Check mounting bolts for tightness...................................................................................................... 5-73
5.19.1 Mounting bolts of the counterweight ....................................................................................... 5-74
5.19.2 Mounting screws of the swing ring ......................................................................................... 5-74
5.19.3 Mounting screws of the hydraulic oil and fuel tank ................................................................. 5-75
5.19.4 Mounting screws of the swing gear and motor ....................................................................... 5-75
5.19.5 Connection of central piece and side frames ......................................................................... 5-76
5.20 Use environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids in LIEBHERR earthmoving machines ........................... 5-76
5.20.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 5-76
5.20.2 Prescriptions for biodegradable hydraulic fluids ..................................................................... 5-76
5.20.3 Oil change intervals ................................................................................................................ 5-77
5.20.4 Oil filters change intervals ...................................................................................................... 5-77
5.20.5 Water condensation................................................................................................................ 5-77
5.20.6 Changing to environmentally friendly hydraulic fluid............................................................... 5-77
5.20.7 Particular precautions ............................................................................................................. 5-78
5.21 Fire suppression system ...................................................................................................................... 5-78
5.22 Control and maintenance chart............................................................................................................ 5-78
5.23 Centralized lubrication system ............................................................................................................. 5-84
0-8 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Operating Manual Product description
Assembly - overview
1 Product description
1.1 Assembly - overview
This section comprises an overview of the machine and descriptions of the compo-
nents shown.
1.1.1 Machine and construction equipment
Fig. 1-1 Machine and construction equipment

100 Uppercarriage 320 Hydraulic cylinder

200 Undercarriage 330 Stick
300 Hydraulic jack 340 Hydraulic cylinder
310 Boom 350 Bucket
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 1-1

MJFCIFSS
Index
Product description Operating Manual
Assembly - overview
1.1.2 Uppercarriage
Fig. 1-2 Upper carriage
5 Installation carrier 800 Swing ring installation

165 Pumps box parts 1400 Centralized lubriacation
170 Attachments mounting parts 3000 Air system
180 Heating hoses installation 6000 Control cab
500Engine installation 7000 Hydraulic installation
700Swing gear installation 7100 Hydraulic tank installation LEC/en/Edition: 06 / 2011
1-2 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Assembly - overview
Fig. 1-3 Upper carriage
7600 Control valve installation 8900 Catwalk

8200 Rotating deck 9000 Electrical system
8500 Coachbuilding 9300 Fuel system
8600 Lower covering 9500 Counterweight installation
8700Cab 9700 Arrangement outside mirror
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 1-3

MJFCIFSS
Index
Vibration emissions
1.1.3 Undercarriage
Fig. 1-4 Undercarriage
208 Leading wheel 1000 Rotary connection

400 Crawlers 4500 Travelling mechanism with tum-
bler wheel
1.2 Vibration emissions
The operator seat built into the machine by the manufacturer conforms to ISO
7096:2000, EM 6. When replacing the seat, ensure that the new seat also conforms
to this standard.
Hand-arm vibration
If the machine is operated according to the manufacturer instructions, the weighted
(frequency-rated) effective hand-arm vibration is below 2.5 m/s² according to ISO
5349-1:2001.
Whole-body vibration
If the machine is operated according to the manufacturer instructions, the weighted
(frequency-rated) effective vibration shown for specific machine applications in the
1-4 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Vibration emissions
table below apply. These values conform to the specifications in the technical report
ISO/TR 25398:2006 "Earth-moving machinery – Guidelines for assessment of expo-
sure to whole-body vibration of ride-on machines – Use of harmonized data meas-
ured by international institutes, organizations and manufacturers". The method of
assessment conforms to ISO 2631-1:1997. The effective values in the table for rep-
resentable machines are shown with the applicable standard deviations. These de-
viations are classified according to the operating conditions in the classes "light-
duty", "normal" and "heavy-duty". It is the responsibility of the machine owner to as-
sess the operating conditions according to the classes, taking into account the ter-
rain, site conditions, site organisation, material, machine equipment, working
procedure and training of the operator.
As the quoted values are effective values for specific, common applications, the
whole-body vibration to which the operator is exposed can only be estimated. For a
more detailed assessment of the daily exposure of the operator across an 8-hour
shift, please refer to the LIEBHERR brochure on whole-body vibration and the soft-
ware designed for the assessment. This document and software are available from
the LIEBHERR dealer and are included as standard on the documentation CD (Li-
part) shipped with new machines.
For instructions how to reduce whole-body vibration during operation of mobile con-
struction machinery, please refer to chapter "Control, operation / working with ma-
chine / safety instructions / vibration protection".
Weighted effective vibration in m/s²

at operating conditions "light-duty" (1), "normal" (2) and "heavy-duty" (3)
Machine type Typical working cycles

x-axis y-axis z-axis
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Crawler excavator Excavator 0.14 0.31 0.49 0.08 0.19 0.31 0.13 0.30 0.47
with hydraulic hammer 0.16 0.38 0.59 0.09 0.22 0.35 0.27 0.55 0.83
Use for mining 0.31 0.46 0.61 0.19 0.30 0.41 0.29 0.61 0.93
Transfer travel 0.21 0.34 0.48 0.09 0.23 0.37 0.56 0.79 1.02
Mobile excavator Excavator 0.19 0.37 0.56 0.09 0.25 0.41 0.16 0.29 0.42
Transfer travel 0.21 0.29 0.38 0.24 0.38 0.52 0.42 0.61 0.80
The measurement uncertainty is defined in standard EN 12096:1997.

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 1-5

MJFCIFSS
Index
EC Declaration of Conformity
1.3 EC Declaration of Conformity
Fig. 1-5 Sample EC Declaration of Conformity (from year of manufacture 2010)

1-6 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Technical data
1.4 Technical data
1.4.1 Working technical data
Backhoe Shovel
Maximum working slope 5,0° - 8,7% 5,0° - 8,7%
Maximum travelling angle 25,5° - 47,6% 25,5° - 47,6%
Maximum tilt angle of diesel engine 45° 45°
Working ambient temperature range -12°C to +55°C -12°C to +55°C
Noise emission*
LpA (inside cab) with fans at 70% 73,7dB(A) 73,7dB(A)
Tab. 1-1 Working technical data
* The sound power level (Lwa) is determined according to Directive 2000/14/EG. The
measurement uncertainty of the sound power level value corresponds to the differen-
ce between the guaranteed and the measured value.
The sound pressure level (Lpa) is determined according to ISO 6396. The measure-
ment uncertainty is defined in the above standard.
1.4.2 Technical description

This should be taken from the accompanying technical description.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 1-7

MJFCIFSS
Index
Technical data
1-8 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Mining Excavator R 984 C
Operating Weight with Backhoe Attachment: 120,100 kg / 264,775 lb
Operating Weight with Shovel Attachment: 125,100 kg / 275,798 lb
Engine Output 504 kW / 675 HP
Bucket Capacity: 2.90 - 8.00 m³ / 3.7 - 10.4 yd³
Shovel Capacity: 5.70 - 9.00 m³ / 7.4 - 11.7 yd³
Index
R984C_es_072011.indd 1 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
R 984 C
Operating Weight with Backhoe Attachment: 120,100 kg / 264,775 lb
Operating Weight with Shovel Attachment: 125,100 kg / 275,798 lb
Engine Output: 504 kW / 675 HP
Bucket Capacity: 2.90 - 8.00 m³ / 3.7 - 10.4 yd³
Shovel Capacity: 5.70 - 9.00 m³ / 7.4 - 11.7 yd³
2 R 984 C Index
R984C_es_072011.indd 2 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Productivity and Efficiency Customer Support
Liebherr’s R 984 C mining excavator is the most flexi- On site, Liebherr’s customer support delivers tailor-made
ble digging and loading tool. It can be customized for professional solutions to your project specifics and site
all mining applications for maximum performance. Even requirements. Liebherr offers a partnership with the goal
under the hardest conditions, it achieves high producti- of mining more for less.
vity. Always ready for job, the R 984 C is your key to the
lowest operating and owning cost per tonne. Operating and Servicing
The R 984 C’s operator cab creates a comfortable and
Reliability ergonomic working environment. Furthermore, the ergono-
More than 50 years of experience in designing and manu- mic component access and long service intervals assist
facturing hydraulic excavators are the basis for the out- the service team to ensure maximum uptime.
standing reliability of the R 984 C. This excavator com-
bines innovative solutions, excellent design and Liebherr Safety and Environment
long-life components, ensuring maximum availability and The Liebherr R 984 C provides uncompromising safety for
performance throughout the whole equipment life. operators and maintenance crews, with innovative techno-
logies integrated into the machine.
Index R 984 C 3
R984C_es_072011.indd 3 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Quick Change Adapter
The optional Liebherr quick change
adapter assists in changing tools like
bucket or ripper without getting out
of the cab. This considerably saves
time compared to changing hydrau-
lic flexible devices:
• No nuts or pins needed
• No assembly and disassembly
• Remote control from inside cab
• No manual intervention needed
4 R 984 C Index
R984C_es_072011.indd 4 29.07.11 13:49

14:14
Productivity and Efficiency
Liebherr’s R 984 C mining excavator is the most flexible digging and loading tool.
It can be customized for all mining applications for maximum performance. Even
under the hardest conditions, it achieves high productivity. Always ready for job, the
R 984 C is your key to the lowest operating and owning cost per tonne.
Reach a New Level of Productivity

High Digging Forces With a multitude of possible backhoe attachments
configurations and a wide range of buckets the
R 984 C provides the highest crowd and breakout
forces in every application. Even under tough con-
ditions Liebherr’s R 984 C high digging force allows
easy bucket penetration and favorable bucket fill
factors to achieve high productivity.
Closed Loop Swing With an independent swing circuit the machine al-
Circuit lows the maximum swing torque whilst retaining
the full oil flow for the working circuit.
Compact Machine Liebherr’s excavator design is well-balanced and
Design provides the best machine stability. The high weight
distribution towards the undercarriage contributes
to an efficient utilization of the strong digging forc-
es and a favorable power to weight ratio of the up-
percarriage and attachment.
Efficiency for Less Cost

Efficient Cooling Liebherr’s large dimensioned cooling system re-
System duces fan power consumption and ensures an ideal
machine temperature. The hydrostatic fans operate
only as needed.
High Hydraulic The high pressure level of Liebherr hydraulic sys-
Efficiency tem together with the optimized pipe and hose lay-
out maximize the usable power transmission. The
Pressure Less Boom Down function combined with
the oil regeneration on the attachment saves en-
ergy and reduces swing back time.
Automatic Idle The electronic control of the hydraulic system and
Control engine allows automatic idle mode contributing to
less fuel consumption and load on the engine.
Highest Digging and Regeneration System

Breakout Forces
Retraction of attachment cylinders
• Advanced attachment technology without pump energy:
and design for optimized digging
• Pump flow can be used for other
and breakout force distribution
cylinder motions during retraction
• Strong structure design of boom cylinders
• Liebherr heavy duty bucket solution • Reduced fuel consumption
• Time savings
Index R 984 C 5
R984C_es_072011.indd 5 29.07.11 13:49

14:14
Liebherr Hydraulic Oil Filtration
• Standard: Integrated 5μ bypass
hydraulic oil filtration
• Optional: Additional external
bypass filtration system with
water separation for operations
in wet areas
6 R 984 C Index
R984C_es_072011.indd 6 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Reliability
More than 50 years of experience in designing and manufacturing hydraulic
excavators are the basis for the outstanding reliability of the R 984 C. This ex-
cavator combines innovative solutions, excellent design and Liebherr long-life
components, ensuring maximum availability and performance throughout the
whole equipment life.
Experience Liebherr Quality

Over 50 Years of Since 1954, Liebherr has been designing, manufac-
Experience turing and servicing crawler mounted excavators
used in toughest applications. Like its predeces-
sors, Liebherr’s R 984 C benefits from this long-
time experience in the customer-focused design
with modern engineering solutions and extensive
mining knowledge.
Quality Management Liebherr’s quality processes commence with the
machine design and simulations. Liebherr meets
the highest industry standards for special selections
of steels and selection of special casting materials.
During manufacturing and assembly, Liebherr qual-
ity management follows all manufacturing steps,
ensuring highest quality of each machine delivered.
Liebherr hydraulic excavator plants are ISO 9001
certified.
Heavy Duty First-class components and machine steel struc-
Excavator tures ensure a high machine reliability, even in
harsh mining conditions.
Advanced Design of All Mining Applications

Machine Design Liebherr’s design processes include the latest and
product specific numerical engineering tools, such
as Finite Element Analyses, Fatigue Calculations,
Torque and Displacement Analysis and Multibody
Simulations. These modern techniques allow reli-
able engineering solutions for series and special
applications.
Specific Solutions As each project is unique, Liebherr is developing
and supplying solutions to ensure performance
and reliability in specific mining environments.
Liebherr’s R 984 C can be customized to operate in
regions with temperatures of down to -40°C / -40°F
or up to 55°C / 131°F, as well as in high-altitude
regions of up to 4,000 m above sea level. Liebherr
also offers specific bucket-tailored solutions for
each type of application.
Cold / Hot Temperature Kit Liebherr Vertical Integration
Designed for maximum reliability in • Major components developed and manufac-
regions with temperatures of down to tured in-house
-40°C / -40°F or up to 55°C / 131°F.
• Designed specifically for severe mining ap-
• Integrated into machine structure plications
• Maximum efficiency • Service Exchange Program
• Increases machine and component • Service tools available for component mainte-
lifetime nance and exchange
• Optimum operator comfort even in
harsh temperature conditions
Index R 984 C 7
R984C_es_072011.indd 7 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Service Exchange Units (SEU)
Rebuild programs for compo-
nents are conducted by Liebherr-
certified repair shops, using best
practice guidance to ensure:
• Maximum component life
• Long - term reliability
• High performance
• Cost - efficiency
8 R 984 C Index
R984C_es_072011.indd 8 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Customer Support
On site, Liebherr’s customer support delivers tailor-made professional solutions to
your project specifics and site requirements. Liebherr offers a partnership with the
goal of mining more for less.
Your Mining Partner

Parts Logistics and Liebherr parts and service follow the machine into the
Services field with international logistics platforms ensuring
parts supply and maintenance services worldwide.
Customized Service Depending on specific requirements, Liebherr offers
and Product Support tailored support solutions integrating parts exchange
and management agreements, service and mainte-
nance on site or maintenance management agree-
ments.
Service Exchange Rebuild programs for components are conducted
Units by Liebherr-certified repair shops, ensuring rebuilt
component life and reliability match new compo-
nent performance expectations.
Complete Training Dedicated to mining the Liebherr training team pro-
Solutions vides operator and maintenance staff training pro-
grams to allow cost-efficient and safe operations.
Liebherr offers customized on-site training courses
according to your needs.
Factory Support
Service Engineering Liebherr design and field service engineers accom-
pany the excavators throughout the whole machine
life. Liebherr’s sales and service organizations and
the Liebherr factories’ product engineering groups
provides fast and proactive support to the mining
industry.
Service Tools Liebherr affords service tools for excavator-specific
maintenance which ensure safe working even when
handling large excavator components.
Liebherr Service Tools Liebherr Training Programs

A wide range of tools available for each service task: pump, Competence-based training, em-
cylinder, travel drive, track pad maintenance and exchange ploying an interdisciplinary learning
strategy:
• OEM solution certified CE
• Liebherr Mining Training Center for
• Fast component replacement
service staff training
• Designed specifically for requirements on Liebherr
• Well equipped training centers with
machines
service simulators
• High operational safety
• Mining excavators available for
• Cost-efficiency for service operations hands-on troubleshooting
• Usable on different excavator sizes • Customized training courses on site
• Other tools available on request
Index R 984 C 9
R984C_es_072011.indd 9 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Operator Comfort
• Excellent visibility over the whole working
area
• Pressurized cab to prevent dust penetration
(optional)
• Tinted safety glass all-around
• A/C and air filtration
• Suspended cab ensuring low vibration and
soundproof
• Adjustable seat
10 R 984 C Index
R984C_es_072011.indd 10 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Operating and Servicing
The R 984 C’s operator cab creates a comfortable and ergonomic working envi-
ronment. The ergonomically optimized machine controls assure the best operator
performance throughout each shift. Furthermore, the ergonomic component access
and long service intervals assist the service team to ensure maximum uptime.
Operator Workplace
Comfortable The large R 984 C’s spacious cab offers ideal work-
Working ing conditions and first-class comfort. The fully ad-
Environment justable seat and control fits to individual needs.
The position of the operator station together with
the large windows allow an outstanding visibility
over the whole working environment. The cab’s ef-
fective insulation creates a quiet working environ-
ment for maximum productivity.
Ergonomic Control The configuration and placement of operator con-
Elements trol elements and monitoring displays are perfectly
coordinated to support the productive perfor-
mance. The electronic control is easy and intuitive
to use. The dashboard and machine control panel
are easy to access and arranged for fast overview
on major machine functions.
Easy Serviceability
Ergonomic Service The R 984 C provides ergonomic component ac-
Access cess for fast and efficient service. All service points
are within reach through large catwalks and walk-
ways. The optional ground fast filling connections
gives easy and safe refilling of service fluids, saving
time, preventing spillage and reducing contamina-
tion by dust. The electronic health monitoring sys-
tem assists in trouble-shooting and maintenance
tasks. Liebherr excavators are equipped with lou-
vers for easy access of ground based support tools.
Extended Service The R 984 C offers all features for extended ma-
Intervals chine services intervals. The technical layout of fil-
tration systems with integrated bypass hydraulic oil
filters and the large dimensioned grease systems
are only some examples.
Automatic Lubrication System Ergonomic Service Access

All attachment and swing ring lu- Safe and efficient service through:
brication points are connected to
• Large catwalk and platform
the automatic lubrication system
• All service points on engine, fan drive
• Robust single line central
and hydraulic valve blocks are ac-
lubrication system
cessed from one large central platform
• Adjustable injectors
• Hinged louvers for easy cleaning and
• Greasing points are protected maintenance tasks
against external damages
• Optional fast filling connections
• Grease control in operator’s
reach in the cab
Index R 984 C 11
R984C_es_072011.indd 11 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Safe Machine Access
• Optional uppercarriage mounted
re-tractable access ladder
• Access ladders and catwalks feature
handrails and slip-resistant surfaces
• Optional wide catwalk with railings
12 R 984 C Index
R984C_es_072011.indd 12 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Safety and Environment
The Liebherr R 984 C provides uncompromising safety for operators and mainte-
nance crews, with innovative technologies integrated into the machine.
Safety Integrated Design

Easy and Safe All railings and catwalks are laid out to easily ac-
Machine Access cess all relevant machine areas. An optional wide
catwalk is available.
Protected Operator The laminated windows create a safe working en-
and Service Crew vironment for operators. Emergency stop arrange-
ments in the cab and optionally in the engine com-
partment ensure safe maintenance tasks. Safety
standards are achieved by a separated engine and
pump compartment, heat insulation on turbocharg-
ers and on the exhaust system as well as by the use
of heavy duty high resistant hydraulic hoses.
Environmental Care
Eco Features Throughout the whole design and manufacturing
process of Liebherr machines, environmental pro-
tection is given high priority. Material used for ma-
chine assembly is recyclable at 95 %. The hydraulic
system allows the use of biodegradable hydraulic
oils. The automatic idle mode contributes to less
fuel consumption and less load on the engine re-
sulting in reduced CO2 emissions.
Efficiency and Powered with the Cummins QSK 19 diesel engine
Environmental EPA Tier 2 or 3, the R 984 C offers fuel-efficient
Standards operations meeting the latest emission standards.
Optional Safety Features Fire Suppression System (optional)

• Kit for Mining and Quarry Application • Dry chemical system
including : emergency stop button,
• Checkfire control module including
fire extinguisher and protective grid
automatic detection / actuation
on the top of the cab
• Anti-restart relay (1 hour) after operating
• Cab protection FOPS
of the fire suppression system
• Protective grid for front cab window
• Travel alarm
Index R 984 C 13
R984C_es_072011.indd 13 29.07.11 13:49

13:52
Technical Data
Engine Hydraulic Controls
1 Cummins diesel engine Power distribution �� via monoblock control valves with inte
Rating per ISO 9249 �� 523 kW/710 HP at 2,100 rpm grated safety valves
reduced to 504 kW/675 HP at 1,800 rpm Flow summation �� to boom stick and bucket cylinders
Model �� QSK-19 C 750 Closed-loop circuit �� for uppercarriage swing drive
Type �� 6 cylinder in-line engine Servo circuit
Bore/Stroke �� 159/159 mm / 6.26/6.26 in Attachment and
Displacement �� 18.9 l/1,153 in3 swing �� proportional via joystick levers
Engine operation �� 4-stroke diesel Travel �� proportional via foot pedals or removable
direct injection hand levers
turbo-charged Additional functions �� via foot pedals or joystick toggle switch
reduced emissions
Cooling �� water-cooled
Air cleaner �� dry-type air cleaner with pre-cleaner,
primary and safety elements, automatic Electric System
dust discharge
Fuel tank �� 1,585 l/419 gal Electric isolation �� easy accessible battery isolations
Standard �� sensor controlled engine idling Working lights �� high brightness halogen lights:
Electrical system – 2 on working attachment
Voltage �� 24 V – 2 on RHS of uppercarriage
Batteries �� 2 x 170 Ah/12 V – 1 on LHS of uppercarriage
Starter �� 24 V/9.0 kW Xenon lights in option
Alternator �� three phase current 24 V/100 A Emergency stop switches �� in the cab/in option in engine compartment
Electrical wiring �� heavy duty execution in IP 65 standard for
operating conditions of – 50 °C to 100 °C/
– 58 °F to 212 °F
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic pump
for attachment and Swing Drive
travel drive �� 3 Liebherr variable flow, swash plate
pumps Drive by �� Liebherr swash plate motor
Max. flow �� 3 x 472 l/min. / 3 x 125 gpm Transmission �� Liebherr compact planetary reduction gear
Max. pressure �� 320 bar/4,640 psi Swing ring �� Liebherr, sealed single race ball bearing
Pump regulation �� electro-hydraulic with electronic engine swing ring, internal teeth
speed sensing regulation, pressure com- Swing speed �� 0 – 5.2 rpm stepless
pensation, automatic oil flow optimizer Holding brake �� wet multi-disc (spring applied, pressure
Hydraulic pump released)
for swing drive �� reversible, variable flow, swash plate pump, Option �� pedal controlled positioning brake
closed-loop circuit
Max. flow �� 403 l/min. / 106 gpm
Max. pressure �� 340 bar/4,931 psi
Hydraulic tank �� 880 l/232 gal Uppercarriage
Hydraulic system �� 1,660 l/438 gal
Hydraulic oil filter �� 2 full flow filters in return line with inte Design �� torque resistant modular design upper
grated fine filter area (5 µm), 1 high pres frame
sure filter for each main pump Attachment mounting �� parallel length girders
Cooler �� compact cooler, consisting of a water Catwalks �� on both sides (large catwalks with handrails
cooler, sandwiched with hydraulic oil and access ladder available in option)
cooler, aftercooler cores and air condi
tioning, hydrostatically driven fan
MODE selection �� adjustment of machine performance and
the hydraulics via a mode selector to match
application
LIFT �� for lifting
FINE �� for precision work and lifting with sensitive
movements
ECO �� for economical operation
POWER �� for maximum digging power and heavy
duty jobs
RPM adjustment �� stepless adjustment of engine output via
rpm at each selected mode
14 R 984 C
Index
NTB_R984C_T_enGB-US_11-07.indd 14 28.07.11 14:12

Technical Data
Operator’s Cab Central Lubrication System
Cab �� profiles and deep drawn technology, resil Type �� Lincoln Centromatic lubrication system, for
iently mounted, sound insulated, tinted the entire attachment/swing ring bearing
windows. Front window armored glass, and teeth
door with sliding window Grease pumps �� 1 Lincoln lubrigun (pneumatic) pump for
Operator’s seat �� shock absorbing suspension, adjustable to attachment/swing ring bearing lubrication
operator’s weight, 6-way adjustable seat (Lincoln Flowmaster hydraulic pump in
with mountable head rest option)
Joysticks �� integrated into adjustable seat consoles 1 Lincoln P203 (electric) pump for swing
Monitoring �� menu driven query of current operating teeth lubrication
conditions via the LCD display. Automatic Capacity �� 30 l/7.9 gal bulk container for attachment/
monitoring, display, warning (acoustical swing ring bearing, separated 8 l/2.1 gal
and optical signal) and saving machine container for swing ring teeth
malfunction data, for example, engine over- Refill �� via quick connection and grease filter for
heating, low engine oil pressure or low the attachment/swing ring bearing circuit
hydraulic oil level via filling point located direclty on the pump
Rear vision system �� camera installation on counterweight and for the swing ring teeth circuit
right-hand side of the uppercarriage dis
played over two LCD-display
Heating system �� standard automatic air conditioning, com-
bined cooler/heater, additional dust filter in Attachment
fresh air/recirculated
Noise level (ISO 6396) �� LpA (inside cab) = 73.7 dB(A) Type �� box-type, combination of resistant steel
with oil/water fans at 70 % and AC fan at plates and cast steel components
65 % Hydraulic cylinders �� Liebherr design
Pivots �� sealed, low maintenance
Pivots bucket-to-stick
bucket-to-link �� O-ring sealed and completely enclosed
Undercarriage Hydraulic connections �� pipes and hoses equipped with SAE split-
flange connections
Version HD �� heavy duty
Drive �� Liebherr swash plate motors
Transmission �� Liebherr planetary reduction gears
Travel speed �� 0 – 2.9 km/h / 0 – 1.8 mph
Drawbar pull max. �� 872 kN/196,033 lbf
Track components �� track pitch 280 mm/11”, maintenance-free
Track rollers/
Carrier rollers �� 9/2
Track pads �� double grouser
Parking brake �� wet multi-discs (spring applied, pressure
released)
Brake valves �� integrated in main valve block
R 984 C 15
Index

Dimensions
A2
E A1
D A
W
H C
OEL
K P
Q
L N
U S
Z B
V G
X
mm/ft in Stick Gooseneck Gooseneck Gooseneck

A 4,050/13’ 3” Length Boom Boom Boom
A1 5,275/17’ 3” 7.80 m/ 9.20 m/ 11.00 m/
A2 5,760/18’10” 25’7” 30’2” 36’
C 4,465/14’ 7” m/ft in mm/ft in mm/ft in mm/ft in
D 4,690/15’ 4” V 3.40/11’1” 8,800/28’10” 10,550/34’7” –/–
E 4,805/15’ 9” 4.50/14’9” 8,500/27’10” 10,250/33’7” 12,150/39’10”
H 4,295/14’ 1” 5.60/18’4” –/– 10,150/33’3” 11,900/39’
K 1,840/ 6’ 6.80/22’3” –/– 8,350/27’4” 10,000/32’ 9”
L 5,055/16’ 6” W 3.40/11’1” 5,650/18’ 6” 5,850/19’2” –/–
P 1,750/ 5’ 8” 4.50/14’9” 6,300/20’ 7” 6,250/20’6” 6,650/21’ 9”
Q 863/ 2’ 9” 5.60/18’4” –/– 6,950/22’9” 7,000/22’11”
S 4,000/13’ 1” 6.80/22’3” –/– 7,950/26’ 7,750/25’ 5”
U 6,471/21’ 2” X 3.40/11’1” 14,850/48’ 8” 16,250/53’3” –/–
N 500/1’7” 600/1’11” 750/ 2’ 5” 4.50/14’9” 14,300/46’10” 15,650/51’3” 17,400/57’
B 4,942/16’ 2” 5.60/18’4” –/– 15,400/50’6” 17,200/56’ 4”
G 5,290/17’ 4” 6.80/22’3” –/– 14,700/48’2” 16,750/54’11”
Z 7,985/26’ 2”
OEL Operator’s Eye Level 3,960/12’11”
A2
E A1
F D A
W1 C C1
OEL H
K P
Q
L N
U S
Z B
V1 G
X1
mm/ft in mm/ft in
A 4,050/13’ 3” Q 863/ 2’ 9”
A1 5,275/17’ 3” S 4,000/13’ 1”
A2 5,760/18’10” U 6,471/21’ 2”
C 5,265/17’ 3” Z 7,985/26’ 2”
C1 5,430/17’ 9” N 500/1’7” 600/1’11” 750/ 2’ 5”
D 4,690/15’ 4” B 4,942/16’ 2”
E 4,805/15’ 9” G 5,290/17’ 4”
F 2,075/ 6’ 9” V1 12,600/41’ 3”
H 4,295/14’ 1” W1 5,400/17’ 8”
K 1,840/ 6’ X1 15,500/50’10”
L 5,055/16’ 6” OEL Operator’s Eye Level 4,760/15’ 7”
P 1,750/ 5’ 8”
16 R 984 C
Index

Backhoe Attachment
with Gooseneck Boom 7.80 m/25’7”
ft m
50 Digging Envelope 1 2
14 Stick lengths m 3.40 4.50
ft in 11’ 1” 14’9”
40 12 Max. digging depth m 7.95 9.05
ft in 26’ 29’8”
10 Max. reach at ground level m 13.70 14.75
30 ft in 44’11” 48’4”
8 Max. dump height m 9.20 9.80
ft in 30’2” 32’1”
20 6 Max. teeth height m 14.00 14.65
ft in 45’11” 48’
4
Max. digging force (SAE) kN 416 346
10
lbf 93,521 77,784
2 Max. breakout force (SAE) kN 550 550
lbf 123,645 123,645
0 0
-2
-10
-4
Operating Weight
and Ground Pressure
-20 -6
The operating weight includes the basic machine with gooseneck
boom 7.80 m/25’7”, stick 3.40 m/11’1” and bucket 7.00 m3/9.16 yd3.
-8 1
-30 2 Undercarriage HD
-10
16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0m Pad width mm/ft in 600/1’11” 750/2’5”
Weight kg/lb 120,100/264,775 121,300/267,420
50 40 30 20 10 0 ft Ground pressure kg/cm2 / psi 1.80/25.60 1.46/20.77
Buckets
For materials classe
according to VOB, Section C, DIN 18300 < 5 < 5 < 5 5 – 6 5 – 6 5 – 6 7 – 8 7 – 8 7–8
Typical operation
according to VOB, Section C, DIN 18300 GP GP GP HD HD HD XHD XHD XHD
Capacity ISO 7451 m3 8.00 7.30 6.70 7.70 7.00 6.40 6.70 6.20 5.80
yd3 10.46 9.55 8.76 10.07 9.16 8.37 8.76 8.11 7.59
Suitable for material up to a specific weight of
with stick 3.40 m t/m3 1.6 1.8 2.0 1.6 1.8 2.0 1.6 1.8 2.0
with stick 11’1” lb/yd3 2,698 3,035 3,373 2,698 3,035 3,373 2,698 3,035 3,373
with stick 4.50 m t/m3 – 1.5 1.65 – 1.5 1.65 – – 1.65
with stick 14’9” lb/yd3 – 2,530 2,782 – 2,530 2,782 – – 2,782
Cutting width mm 2,600 2,400 2,250 2,550 2,400 2,250 2,600 2,500 2,500
ft in 8’6” 7’10” 7’4” 8’4” 7’10” 7’4” 8’6” 8’2” 8’2”
Weight kg 7,200 6,800 6,600 7,700 7,500 7,200 9,300 9,000 8,200
lb 15,873 14,991 14,550 16,976 16,535 15,873 20,503 19,842 18,078
GP: General purpose bucket with Esco V 69 SD teeth
HD: Heavy-duty bucket with Esco V 71 SD teeth
XHD: Heavy-duty rock bucket with Esco V 71 SD teeth
R 984 C 17
Index

Lift Capacities
Stick 3.40 m Stick 4.50 m

Height Radius of load from centerline of machine (m) Height Radius of load from centerline of machine (m)
(m) 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 (m) 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5
12.0 12.0
10.7#
10.5 10.5 (10.7#)
13.1# 10.7# 8.8#
9.0 (13.1#) 9.0 (10.7#) ( 8.8#)
14.8# 13.4# 11.2# 10.5#
7.5 (14.8#) (13.4#) 7.5 (11.2#) (10.5#)
19.0# 16.1# 14.1# 12.7# 13.6# 12.1# 10.9#
6.0 (19.0#) (16.1#) (14.1#) (12.7#) 6.0 (13.6#) (12.1#) (10.9#)
28.2# 21.6# 17.6# 14.9# 12.9 18.6# 15.4# 13.1# 11.5# 8.3#
4.5 (28.2#) (21.6#) (17.6#) (14.9#) (13.1#) 4.5 (18.6#) (15.4#) (13.1#) (11.5#) (8.3#)
32.3# 23.9# 19.0# 15.8# 12.4 28.7# 21.5# 17.1# 14.2# 12.2# 9.3
3.0 (32.3#) (23.9#) (19.0#) (15.8#) (13.4#) 3.0 (28.7#) (21.5#) (17.1#) (14.2#) (12.2#) (9.6#)
34.7# 25.7# 20.1# 15.6 11.9 32.5# 23.9# 18.6# 15.2# 11.9 9.0
1.5 (34.7#) (25.7#) (20.1#) (16.4#) (13.6#) 1.5 (32.5#) (23.9#) (18.6#) (15.2#) (12.7#) (9.4#)
25.7# 35.4# 26.4# 19.6 14.9 11.6 25.4# 34.6# 25.4# 19.7# 14.9 11.3
0 (25.7#) (35.4#) (26.4#) (20.6#) (16.6#) (13.4#) 0 (25.4#) (34.6#) (25.4#) (19.7#) (15.8#) (12.9#)
21.4# 34.6# 34.4# 25.8 19.0 14.6 17.0# 30.2# 34.9# 25.9 18.9 14.3 11.0
– 1.5 (21.4#) (34.6#) (34.4#) (26.0#) (20.3#) (16.1#) – 1.5 (17.0#) (30.2#) (34.9#) (25.9#) (20.0#) (15.9#) (12.7#)
31.8# 42.5# 31.8# 24.4# 18.8 14.4# 24.6# 38.2# 33.6# 25.2 18.4 14.0 10.9
– 3.0 (31.8#) (42.5#) (31.8#) (24.4#) (19.0#) (14.4#) – 3.0 (24.6#) (38.2#) (33.6#) (25.2#) (19.5#) (15.2#) (11.5#)
44.3# 35.7# 27.3# 21.0# 15.8# 33.8# 42.0# 30.6# 23.2# 17.8# 13.3#
– 4.5 (44.3#) (35.7#) (27.3#) (21.0#) (15.8#) – 4.5 (33.8#) (42.0#) (30.6#) (23.2#) (17.8#) (13.3#)
25.8# 20.1# 14.9# 45.5# 34.3# 25.5# 19.3# 14.1#
– 6.0 (25.8#) (20.1#) (14.9#) – 6.0 (45.5#) (34.3#) (25.5#) (19.3#) (14.1#)
22.9# 17.2# 11.9#
– 7.5 – 7.5 (22.9#) (17.2#) (11.9#)
– 9.0 – 9.0

– 10.5 – 10.5
– 12.0 – 12.0
The load values are quoted in tons (t) on the backhoe bucket’s load hook, and may be swung 360° on firm and even ground. Values quoted in brackets apply to the
undercarriage when in longitudinal position. Capacities are valid for 600 mm wide double grouser pads. Indicated loads are based on ISO 10567 standard and do not
exceed 75 % of tipping or 87 % of hydraulic capacity (indicated via #). Maximum load for the backhoe bucket’s lifting eye is 27 t. Without bucket (6.40 m3), the lift
capacities will increase by 7,200 kg, without bucket cylinder, link and lever they increase by an additional 1,900 kg. Lifting capacity of the excavator is limited by
machine stability, hydraulic capacity and maximum permissible load of the load hook.
When lifting loads, the hydraulic excavator must be equipped with automatic check valve on its hoist cylinders and overload warning device according to European
Standard, EN 474-5.
18 R 984 C
Index

Backhoe Attachment
ft m
Digging Envelope 1 2 3 4*
16
50 Stick lengths m 3.40 4.50 5.60 6.80
14 ft in 11’1” 14’9” 18’4” 22’3”
Max. digging depth m 9.25 10.35 11.45 12.30
40 12 ft in 30’4” 33’11” 37’6” 40’4”
Max. reach at ground level m 15.20 16.25 17.35 18.10
10 ft in 49’10” 53’3” 56’10” 59’4”
30
Max. dump height m 10.20 10.85 11.45 12.20
8
ft in 33’5” 35’7” 37’6” 40’
20 6 Max. teeth height m 15.00 15.70 16.35 16.40
ft in 49’2” 51’5” 53’7” 53’9”
4
10 Max. digging force (SAE) kN 416 346 300 273
2 lbf 93,521 77,784 67,443 61,373
Max. breakout force (SAE) kN 550 550 550 405
0 0 lbf 123,645 123,645 123,645 91,048
-2 * with stick 6.80 m with R 974 B litronic` buckets

-10
-4
-20 -6
Operating Weight
-8 and Ground Pressure
-30 1
-10 2 The operating weight includes the basic machine with gooseneck
3 boom 9.20 m/30’2”, stick 4.50 m/14’9” and bucket 4.70 m3/6.15 yd3.
-40 -12 4
Undercarriage HD
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0m
Pad width mm/ft in 600/1’11” 750/2’5”
Weight kg/lb 118,800/261,909 120.000/264,554
60 50 40 30 20 10 0 ft
Ground pressure kg/cm2 / psi 1.78/25.32 1.44/20.48
Buckets
Capacity ISO 7451 m3 2.90 3.50 3.90 4.70 5.50 6.20 2.70 3.20 3.80
yd3 3.79 4.58 5.10 6.15 7.19 8.11 3.53 4.19 4.97
with stick 3.40 m t/m3 – – 2.2 2.0 1.8 1.5 – – –
with stick 11’1” lb/yd3 – – 3,710 3,373 3,035 2,530 – – –
with stick 4.50 m t/m3 – 2.2 2.0 1.8 1.5 – – – –
with stick 14’9” lb/yd3 – 3,710 3,373 3,035 2,530 – – – –
with stick 5.60 m t/m3 2.2 2.0 1.8 1.5 – – – – –
with stick 18’4” lb/yd3 3,710 3,373 3,035 2,530 – – – – –
with stick 6.80 m t/m3 – – – – – – 2.2 2.0 1.8
with stick 22’3” lb/yd3 – – – – – – 3,710 3,373 3,035
Cutting width mm 1,3001) 1,3001) 1,4001) 1,6001) 1,8001) 2,0001) 1,3502) 1,5502) 1,7502)
ft in 4’3”1) 4’3”1) 4’7”1) 5’2”1) 5’10”1) 6’6”1) 4’5”2) 5’1”2) 5’8”2)
Weight kg 3,720 4,080 4,530 4,970 5,280 5,700 3,190 3,310 3,610
lb 8,201 8,995 9,987 10,957 11,640 12,566 7,033 7,297 7,959
1) Medium-duty bucket with teeth size V 69 SD (appropriate for materials up to classification 5, according to VOB, Section C, DIN 18300)
2) Bucket R 974 B litronic`
R 984 C 19
Index

Lift Capacities

(m) 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0 (m) 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0
12.0 12.0
12.2# 9.8#
10.5 (12.2#) 10.5 ( 9.8#)
12.5# 11.7# 9.9# 9.5#
9.0 (12.5#) (11.7#) 9.0 ( 9.9#) ( 9.5#)
14.8# 13.1# 11.9# 11.2# 10.2# 9.6#
7.5 (14.8#) (13.1#) (11.9#) 7.5 (11.2#) (10.2#) ( 9.6#)
25.4# 19.5# 16.1# 13.8#) 12.3# 14.0# 12.1# 10.8# 9.8#
6.0 (25.4#) (19.5#) (16.1#) (13.8# (12.3#) 6.0 (14.0#) (12.1#) (10.8#) ( 9.8#)
21.9# 17.5# 14.7# 12.9# 10.8 25.9# 19.4# 15.6# 13.2# 11.5# 10.2#
4.5 (21.9#) (17.5#) (14.7#) (12.9#) (11.5#) 4.5 (25.9#) (19.4#) (15.6#) (13.2#) (11.5#) (10.2#)
23.9# 18.8# 15.6# 13.1 10.4 21.8# 17.2# 14.2# 12.1# 10.3
3.0 (23.9#) (18.8#) (15.6#) (13.4#) (11.7#) 3.0 (21.8#) (17.2#) (14.2#) (12.1#) (10.6#)
25.1# 19.8# 15.6 12.5 10.0 29.2# 23.7# 18.5# 15.1# 12.4 9.8
1.5 (25.1#) (19.8#) (16.2#) (13.7#) (11.9#) 1.5 (29.2#) (23.7#) (18.5#) (15.1#) (12.7#) (11.0#)
28.6# 25.1 19.0 14.9 12.0 28.9# 24.8# 19.1 14.9 11.8 9.4
0 (28.6#) (25.6#) (20.2#) (16.6#) (13.9#) 0 (28.9#) (24.8#) (19.3#) (15.7#) (13.1#) (11.1#)
21.2# 32.2# 24.6 18.5 14.5 11.7 18.3# 33.1# 24.5 18.3 14.2 11.3 9.2
– 1.5 (21.2#) (32.2#) (25.2#) (20.1#) (16.5#) (13.6#) – 1.5 (18.3#) (33.1#) (25.0#) (19.7#) (15.9#) (13.2#) (11.0#)
31.6# 30.2# 24.0# 18.4 14.4 11.8 25.5# 31.9# 24.1 17.9 13.9 11.1 9.1
– 3.0 (31.6#) (30.2#) (24.0#) (19.3#) (15.8#) (12.7#) – 3.0 (25.5#) (31.9#) (24.5#) (19.4#) (15.7#) (12.9#) (10.3#)
33.8# 27.1# 21.9# 17.7# 14.2# 34.3# 29.6# 23.1# 17.9 13.9 11.2
– 4.5 (33.8#) (27.1#) (21.9#) (17.7#) (14.2#) – 4.5 (34.3#) (29.6#) (23.1#) (18.4#) (14.8#) (11.8#)
27.7# 22.7# 18.5# 14.7# 34.0# 26.2# 20.7# 16.5# 12.9#
– 6.0 (27.7#) (22.7#) (18.5#) (14.7#) – 6.0 (34.0#) (26.2#) (20.7#) (16.5#) (12.9#)
16.1# 12.8# 26.8# 21.1# 16.7# 12.9#
– 7.5 (16.1#) (12.8#) – 7.5 (26.8#) (21.1#) (16.7#) (12.9#)
9.9#
– 9.0 – 9.0 ( 9.9#)
– 10.5 – 10.5
– 12.0 – 12.0

(m) 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0 (m) 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0
8.1# 8.8#
13.5 ( 8.1#) 12.0 ( 8.8#)
8.7# 7.5#
12.0 10.5 ( 8.7#) ( 7.5#)
8.1# 8.9# 8.8#
10.5 ( 8.1#) 9.0 ( 8.9#) ( 8.8#)
8.1# 9.3# 9.0#
9.0 ( 8.1#) 7.5 ( 9.3#) ( 9.0#)
8.9# 8.4# 8.0# 10.4# 9.8# 9.3# 7.5#
7.5 ( 8.9#) ( 8.4#) (8.0#) 6.0 (10.4#) ( 9.8#) ( 9.3#) (7.5#)
10.7# 9.6# 8.8# 8.2# 12.6# 11.4# 10.4# 9.7# 8.6
6.0 (10.7#) ( 9.6#) ( 8.8#) (8.2#) 4.5 (12.6#) (11.4#) (10.4#) ( 9.7#) (8.6#)
13.9# 11.8# 10.4# 9.3# 8.5# 20.0# 16.4# 14.1# 12.4# 11.1# 10.2# 8.4
4.5 (13.9#) (11.8#) (10.4#) ( 9.3#) (8.5#) 3.0 (20.0#) (16.4#) (14.1#) (12.4#) (11.1#) (10.2#) (9.3#)
19.9# 15.7# 13.0# 11.2# 9.8# 8.3 30.9# 23.1# 18.4# 15.4# 13.3# 11.8# 9.9 8.1
3.0 (19.9#) (15.7#) (13.0#) (11.2#) ( 9.8#) (8.8#) 1.5 (30.9#) (23.1#) (18.4#) (15.4#) (13.3#) (11.8#) (10.6#) (9.5#)
30.6# 22.3# 17.3# 14.1# 11.9# 10.1 7.9 34.2# 25.4# 20.1# 16.6# 14.2# 11.7 9.5 7.8
1.5 (30.6#) (22.3#) (17.3#) (14.1#) (11.9#) (10.3#) (9.0#) 0 (34.2#) (25.4#) (20.1#) (16.6#) (14.2#) (12.3#) (10.9#) (8.9#)
31.3# 24.0# 18.6# 15.0# 12.0 9.5 7.6 18.0# 35.1# 27.0# 21.3# 17.0 13.7 ) 11.2 9.2
0 (31.3#) (24.0#) (18.6#) (15.0#) (12.5#) (10.7#) (9.2#) – 1.5 (18.0#) (35.1#) (27.0#) (21.3#) (17.5#) (14.8#) (12.7#) (11.1#)
16.5# 31.9# 24.9# 18.8 14.5 11.4 9.1 7.3 21.6# 36.6# 27.4 20.7 16.3 13.1 10.8 9.0
– 1.5 (16.5#) (31.9#) (24.9#) (19.3#) (15.6#) (12.9#) (10.8#) (9.1#) – 3.0 (21.6#) (36.6#) (27.7#) (21.9#) (18.0#) (15.1#) (12.9#) (11.0#)
21.7# 33.1# 24.4 18.1 14.0 11.1 8.9 26.6# 36.0# 26.7 20.1 15.8 12.8 10.6 8.9
– 3.0 (21.7#) (33.1#) (25.0#) (19.6#) (15.8#) (12.9#) (10.7#) – 4.5 (26.6#) (36.0#) (27.6#) (22.0#) (18.0#) (15.0#) (12.6#) (10.4#)
28.3# 31.7# 24.1 17.8 13.7 10.9 8.9 32.9# 34.4# 26.6 19.9 15.7 12.7 10.6
– 4.5 (28.3#) (31.7#) (24.2#) (19.1#) (15.4#) (12.5#) (10.0#) – 6.0 (32.9#) (34.4#) (26.6#) (21.3#) (17.4#) (14.4#) (11.7#)
36.6# 29.3# 22.6# 17.8 13.8 11.0 41.2# 31.5# 24.6# 19.8# 15.8 12.9#
– 6.0 (36.6#) (29.3#) (22.6#) (17.9#) (14.3#) (11.3#) – 7.5 (41.2#) (31.5#) (24.6#) (19.8#) (16.0#) (12.9#)
33.7# 25.4# 19.8# 15.6# 12.1# 35.7# 27.0# 21.3# 16.9# 13.2#
– 7.5 (33.7#) (25.4#) (19.8#) (15.6#) (12.1#) – 9.0 (35.7#) (27.0#) (21.3#) (16.9#) (13.2#)
25.5# 19.7# 15.2# 11.4# 26.1# 20.2# 15.7# 11.7#
– 9.0 (25.5#) (19.7#) (15.2#) (11.4#) – 10.5 (26.1#) (20.2#) (15.7#) (11.7#)
– 10.5 – 12.0
exceed 75 % of tipping or 87 % of hydraulic capacity (indicated via #). Maximum load for the backhoe bucket’s lifting eye is 27 t. Without bucket (3.90 m3/2.70 m3*), the
lift capacities will increase by 4,530 kg/3,190 kg*, without bucket cylinder, link and lever they increase by an additional 1,900 kg/1,100 kg*. Lifting capacity of the exca-
vator is limited by machine stability, hydraulic capacity and maximum permissible load of the load hook.
Standard, EN 474-5.
* Just for stick 6.80 m
20 R 984 C
Index

Backhoe Attachment
with Gooseneck Boom 11.00 m/36’
ft m
Digging Envelope 1 2 3*
16
50
Stick lengths m 4.50 5.60 6.80
14
ft in 14’9” 18’4” 22’3”
40 12 Max. digging depth m 12.50 13.60 14.45
ft in 41’ 44’7” 47’4”
10 Max. reach at ground level m 18.15 19.20 20.00
30 ft in 59’6” 62’11” 65’7”
8
Max. dump height m 11.25 11.80 12.65
20 6 ft in 36’10” 38’8” 41’5”
Max. teeth height m 16.05 16.60 16.80
4 ft in 52’7” 54’5” 55’1”
10
2 Max. digging force (SAE) kN 346 300 273
lbf 77,784 67,443 61,373
0 0
Max. breakout force (SAE) kN 550 550 405
-2 lbf 123,645 123,645 91,048
-10
-4 * with stick 6.80 m with R 974 B litronic` buckets
-20 -6
-8
-30 Operating Weight
-10 and Ground Pressure
-40 -12
1 The operating weight includes the basic machine with gooseneck
-14 2 boom 11.00 m/36’, stick 5.60 m/18’4” and bucket 2.90 m3/3.8 yd3.
3
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0m
Undercarriage HD
Pad width mm/ft in 600/1’11” 750/2’5”

60 50 40 30 20 10 0 ft Weight kg/lb 122,200/269,405 123,400/272,050
Ground pressure kg/cm2 / psi 1.83/26.03 1.48/21.05
Buckets
Capacity ISO 7451 m3 2.90 3.50 3.90 4.70 2.70 3.20
yd3 3.79 4.58 5.10 6.15 3.53 4.19
with stick 4.50 m t/m3 2.2 1.8 1.6 1.2 – –
with stick 14’9” lb/yd3 3,710 3,035 2,698 2,024 – –
with stick 5.60 m t/m3 2.0 1.6 1.2 – – –
with stick 18’4” lb/yd3 3,373 2,698 2,024 – – –
with stick 6.80 m t/m3 – – – – 2.2 1.8
with stick 22’2” lb/yd3 – – – – 3,710 3,035
Cutting width mm 1,3001) 1,3001) 1,4001) 1,6001) 1,3502) 1,5502)
ft in 4’3”1) 4’3”1) 4’7”1) 5’2”1) 4’5”2) 5’1”2)
Weight kg 3,720 4,080 4,530 4,970 3,190 3,310
lb 8,201 8,995 9,987 10,957 7,033 7,297
1) Medium-duty bucket with teeth size V 69 SD (appropriate for materials up to classification 5, according to VOB, Section C, DIN 18300)
2) Bucket R 974 B litronic`
R 984 C 21
Index

Lift Capacities
with Gooseneck Boom 11.00 m/36’

(m) 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0 (m) 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0
5.5# 4.4#
12.0 (5.5#) 12.0 (4.4#)
5.5# 5.5# 4.3#
10.5 (5.5#) (5.5#) 10.5 (4.3#)
5.7# 5.4# 4.5# 4.4#
9.0 (5.7#) (5.4#) 9.0 (4.5#) (4.4#)
6.8# 6.1# 5.6# 5.1# 4.7# 4.5#
7.5 ( 6.8#) (6.1#) (5.6#) 7.5 (5.1#) (4.7#) (4.5#)
10.7# 8.7# 7.4# 6.5# 5.9# 5.6# 6.4# 5.6# 5.1# 4.7#
6.0 (10.7#) ( 8.7#) ( 7.4#) (6.5#) (5.9#) (5.6#) 6.0 ( 6.4#) (5.6#) (5.1#) (4.7#)
12.2# 9.7# 8.1# 7.0# 6.2# 5.7# 10.8# 8.7# 7.2# 6.2# 5.5# 4.9#
4.5 (12.2#) ( 9.7#) ( 8.1#) (7.0#) (6.2#) (5.7#) 4.5 (10.8#) ( 8.7#) ( 7.2#) (6.2#) (5.5#) (4.9#)
13.6# 10.7# 8.8# 7.5# 6.6# 6.0# 12.4# 9.8# 8.0# 6.8# 5.9# 5.2#
3.0 (13.6#) (10.7#) ( 8.8#) (7.5#) (6.6#) (6.0#) 3.0 (12.4#) ( 9.8#) ( 8.0#) (6.8#) (5.9#) (5.2#)
14.8# 11.6# 9.5# 8.0# 6.9# 6.1 18.6# 13.8# 10.8# 8.8# 7.4# 6.3# 5.5#
1.5 (14.8#) (11.6#) ( 9.5#) (8.0#) (6.9#) (6.2#) 1.5 (18.6#) (13.8#) (10.8#) ( 8.8#) (7.4#) (6.3#) (5.5#)
20.7# 15.7# 12.4# 10.1# 8.4# 7.2# 20.0# 15.0# 11.7# 9.5# 7.9# 6.7# 5.8#
0 (20.7#) (15.7#) (12.4#) (10.1#) (8.4#) (7.2#) 0 (20.0#) (15.0#) (11.7#) ( 9.5#) (7.9#) (6.7#) (5.8#)
21.0# 16.2# 12.9# 10.5# 8.7 7.1 13.3# 20.8# 15.8# 12.4# 10.0# 8.3# 7.0# 5.7
– 1.5 (21.0#) (16.2#) (12.9#) (10.5#) (8.8#) (7.4#) – 1.5 (13.3#) (20.8#) (15.8#) (12.4#) (10.0#) (8.3#) (7.0#) (6.0#)
13.0# 20.3# 20.9# 16.3# 13.1# 10.4 8.5 7.0 11.0# 17.8# 21.1# 16.2# 12.8# 10.4# 8.4 6.8 5.6
– 3.0 (13.0#) (20.3#) (20.9#) (16.3#) (13.1#) (10.7#) (8.9#) (7.4#) – 3.0 (11.0#) (17.8#) (21.1#) (16.2#) (12.8#) (10.4#) (8.6#) (7.2#) (6.0#)
19.9# 26.3# 20.4# 16.1# 13.0# 10.4 8.5 16.2# 23.4# 20.9# 16.3# 13.0 10.3 8.3 6.7
– 4.5 (19.9#) (26.3#) (20.4#) (16.1#) (13.0#) (10.6#) (8.8#) – 4.5 (16.2#) (23.4#) (20.9#) (16.3#) (13.0#) (10.5#) (8.7#) (7.2#)
27.7# 24.7# 19.4# 15.5# 12.5# 10.2# 8.2# 22.2# 26.6# 20.3# 16.0# 12.8# 10.3 8.3 6.8#
– 6.0 (27.7#) (24.7#) (19.4#) (15.5#) (12.5#) (10.2#) (8.2#) – 6.0 (22.2#) (26.6#) (20.3#) (16.0#) (12.8#) (10.4#) (8.5#) (6.8#)
29.2# 22.4# 17.8# 14.3# 11.5# 9.1# 29.4# 24.8# 19.2# 15.2# 12.2# 9.8# 7.8#
– 7.5 (29.2#) (22.4#) (17.8#) (14.3#) (11.5#) ( 9.1#) – 7.5 (29.4#) (24.8#) (19.2#) (15.2#) (12.2#) ( 9.8#) (7.8#)
24.5# 19.1# 15.3# 12.2# 9.5# 29.7# 22.2# 17.3# 13.8# 10.9# 8.5#
– 9.0 (24.5#) (19.1#) (15.3#) (12.2#) ( 9.5#) – 9.0 (29.7#) (22.2#) (17.3#) (13.8#) (10.9#) ( 8.5#)
14.2# 11.2# 8.2# 24.2# 18.4# 14.4# 11.3# 8.5#
– 10.5 (14.2#) (11.2#) ( 8.2#) – 10.5 (24.2#) (18.4#) (14.4#) (11.3#) ( 8.5#)
12.6# 9.5#
– 12.0 – 12.0 (12.6#) ( 9.5#)
Stick 6.80 m
Height Radius of load from centerline of machine (m)
(m) 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0
5.6#
12.0 (5.6#)
5.5#
10.5 (5.5#)
5.6#
9.0 (5.6#)
6.0# 5.8# 5.7#
7.5 (6.0#) (5.8#) (5.7#)
6.9# 6.4# 6.0# 5.8#
6.0 ( 6.9#) (6.4#) (6.0#) (5.8#)
8.6# 7.6# 6.9# 6.4# 6.1#
4.5 ( 8.6#) ( 7.6#) (6.9#) (6.4#) (6.1#)
17.6# 13.7# 11.2# 9.5# 8.3# 7.4# 6.8# 6.3#
3.0 (17.6#) (13.7#) (11.2#) ( 9.5#) ( 8.3#) (7.4#) (6.8#) (6.3#)
20.0# 15.4# 12.4# 10.4# 9.0# 7.9# 7.2# 6.6#
1.5 (20.0#) (15.4#) (12.4#) (10.4#) ( 9.0#) (7.9#) (7.2#) (6.6#)
21.9# 16.8# 13.5# 11.2# 9.6# 8.4# 7.5# 6.5
0 (21.9#) (16.8#) (13.5#) (11.2#) ( 9.6#) (8.4#) (7.5#) (6.8#)
15.3# 23.1# 17.9# 14.4# 11.9# 10.2# 8.8# 7.6 6.3
– 1.5 (15.3#) (23.1#) (17.9#) (14.4#) (11.9#) (10.2#) (8.8#) (7.8#) (7.0#)
11.7# 18.5# 23.8# 18.6# 15.0# 12.5# 10.5 8.8 7.4
– 3.0 (11.7#) (18.5#) (23.8#) (18.6#) (15.0#) (12.5#) (10.6#) (9.2#) (8.0#)
15.9# 22.8# 24.1# 19.0# 15.3 12.4 10.2 8.6 7.3
– 4.5 (15.9#) (22.8#) (24.1#) (19.0#) (15.4#) (12.8#) (10.8#) (9.3#) (8.0#)
20.6# 28.1# 23.8# 18.9# 15.1 12.2 10.1 8.5
– 6.0 (20.6#) (28.1#) (23.8#) (18.9#) (15.4#) (12.8#) (10.8#) (9.2#)
26.3# 29.7# 23.0# 18.5# 15.1# 12.3 10.2 8.7#
– 7.5 (26.3#) (29.7#) (23.0#) (18.5#) (15.1#) (12.6#) (10.5#) (8.7#)
33.2# 27.6# 21.6# 17.4# 14.3# 11.8# 9.6#
– 9.0 (33.2#) (27.6#) (21.6#) (17.4#) (14.3#) (11.8#) ( 9.6#)
32.6# 24.6# 19.4# 15.6# 12.7# 10.1#
– 10.5 (32.6#) (24.6#) (19.4#) (15.6#) (12.7#) (10.1#)
26.1# 20.0# 15.8# 12.5# 9.5#
– 12.0 (26.1#) (20.0#) (15.8#) (12.5#) ( 9.5#)
exceed 75 % of tipping or 87 % of hydraulic capacity (indicated via #). Maximum load for the backhoe bucket’s lifting eye is 27 t. Without bucket (3.90 m3/2.70 m3*), the
lift capacities will increase by 4,530 kg/3,190 kg*, without bucket cylinder, link and lever they increase by an additional 1,900 kg/1,100 kg*. Lifting capacity of the exca-
vator is limited by machine stability, hydraulic capacity and maximum permissible load of the load hook.
Standard, EN 474-5.
* Just for stick 6.80 m
22 R 984 C
Index

Shovel Attachment
with Shovel Boom 5.40 m/17’8”
ft m
40
Digging Envelope
12
Stick length 3.90 m/12’9”
10 Max. reach at ground level 10.80 m/35’5”

30 Max. dump height 8.90 m/29’2”
Max. crowd length 4.50 m/14’9”
8 T Bucket opening width T 1,900 mm/ 6’2”
Max. crowd force at ground level (SAE) 550 kN/123,645 lbf

20 6
Max. crowd force (SAE) 750 kN/168,607 lbf
Max. breakout force (SAE) 550 kN/123,645 lbf
4
10
2
Operating Weight
and Ground Pressure
0 0
The operating weight includes the basic machine with shovel attach-
ment and a 7.00 m3/9.16 yd3 bucket.
-2
-10
Undercarriage HD
-4
Pad width mm/ft in 600/1’11” 750/2’5”
Weight kg/lb 125,100/275,798 126,300/278,444
12 10 8 6 4 2 0m Ground pressure kg/cm2 / psi 1.88/26.74 1.48/21.05
40 30 20 10 0 ft
Bottom Dump Buckets

For materials classe
according to VOB, Section C, DIN 18300 < 5 < 5 5 – 6 5 – 6 5 – 6 7 – 8 7 – 8 7–8
Typical operation
according to VOB, Section C, DIN 18300 GP GP HD HD HD XHD XHD XHD
Capacity ISO 7546 m 3 9.00 7.70 7.70 7.00 5.70 7.00 7.00 5.70
yd3 11.77 10.07 10.07 9.16 7.46 9.16 9.16 7.46
Suitable for material up to a specific weight of t/m3 1.3 1.7 1.5 1.8 2.3 1.5 1.8 2.2
lb/yd3 2,192 2,867 2,530 3,035 3,879 2,530 3,035 3,710
Cutting width mm 2,900 2,900 2,900 2,900 2,500 2,900 2,900 2,500
ft in 9’6” 9’6” 9’6” 9’6” 8’2” 9’6” 9’6” 8’2”
Weight kg 13,300 11,000 13,300 12,900 11,400 14,400 12,600 12,400
lb 29,321 24,251 29,321 28,440 25,133 31,747 27,778 27,337
Wear kit level I I II II II III III III
GP: General purpose bucket with Esco V 69 RYL teeth
HD: Heavy-duty bucket with Esco V 69 RYL teeth
XHD: Heavy-duty rock bucket with Esco V 69 RYL teeth
Level I: For non-abrasive materials, such as limestone, without flint inclusion, shot material or easily breakable rock, i.e., deteriorated rock, soft
limestone, shale, etc.
Level II: For preblasted heavy rock, or deteriorated, cracked material (classification 5 to 6, according to DIN 18300)
Level III: For highly-abrasive materials such as rock with a high silica content, sandstone etc.
R 984 C 23
Index

X D
H
H
Component Dimensions and Weights

H
H
L
L
L
L H
H
Basic Machine (with Catwalks)
L
Track pads mm/ft in 600/1’11” 750/2’5”
H Weight with
H counterweight
H 19,000 kg/41,888 lb kg/lb 89,140/196,520 90,330/199,143
L
L
Catwalks and Railings
(Wooden Crate)
L L Length mm/ft in 3,500/11’ 5”
L H
H
H Height mm/ft in 2,400/ 7’10”
L
Width mm/ft in 1,900/ 6’ 2”
H
Weight kg/lb 1,800/3,968
H
H
L
L
L
L
H
Counterweight
L
H L Length mm/ft in 900/ 2’11” 900/ 2’11”*
H Height mm/ft in 1,800/ 5’10” 1,800/ 5’10”*
H Width mm/ft in 4,050/13’ 3” 4,050/13’ 3”*
H Weight kg/lb 19,020/ 41,932 22,000/ 48,502*
H
* only with 11.00 m/36’ gooseneck boom
H
H
H
H Cab Elevation
L H
L Length mm/ft in 1,950/6’4”
L
H Height mm/ft in 1,130/3’8”
Width mm/ft in 1,250/4’1”
L
L Weight kg/lb 600/1,323
L L
L
H
H
L
L Protective Grid Up
L H L Length mm/ft in 1,730/5’8”
H H Height mm/ft in 185/ 7”
H Width mm/ft in 950/3’1”
Weight kg/lb 30/66
L
L
H
Front Window Screen
L
L H L Length mm/ft in 1,970/6’5”
L H Height mm/ft in 500/1’7”
H Width mm/ft in 970/3’2”
H Weight kg/lb 45/99
H
24 R 984 C
Index

L
Component Dimensions and WeightsL

L
L Backhoe Hoist Cylinder (two)

Ø Diameter mm/ft in 400/ 1’3”
Weight kg/lb 2 x 1,330/2 x 2,932
L
Gooseneck Boom with Stick Cylinder

L
Boom length m 7.80 9.20 11.00
L H
ft in 25’7” 30’2” 36’
L Length mm 8,200 9,600 11,400
ft in 26’10” 31’5” 37’4”
L H Height mm 2,800 2,800 3,250
H
ft in 9’2” 9’2” 10’7”
H
Width mm 1,600 1,600 1,600
ft in 5’2” 5’2” 5’2”
Weight kg 13,345 14,285 15,810
H
lb 29,421 31,493 34,855
L
Stick with Bucket Cylinder
Stick length m 3.40 4.50 5.60 6.80
ft in 11’1” 14’9” 18’4” 22’3”
L
H L Length mm 4,800 5,700 6,800 8,000
L ft in 15’8” 18’8” 22’3” 26’2”
H Height mm 1,850 1,650 1,550 1,400
ft in 6’ 5’4” 5’1” 4’7”
L H Width mm 945 945 945 945
H ft in 3’1” 3’1” 3’1” 3’1”
Weight kg 7,400 7,730 7,885 6,600
lb 16,314 17,042 17,383 14,550
H
Mining Backhoe Buckets

for Boom 7.80 m/25’7”
Application GP GP GP
H Capacity ISO 7451 m3 8.00 7.30 6.70
yd3 10.46 9.55 8.76
L Length mm 2,900 2,800 2,800
ft in 9’6” 9’2” 9’2”
H H Height mm 2,250 2,200 2,200
L H ft in 7’4” 7’2” 7’2”
Width mm 2,600 2,400 2,250
ft in 8’6” 7’10” 7’4”
H Weight kg 7,200 6,800 6,600
L lb 15,873 14,991 14,550
L
Application HD HD HD
Capacity ISO 7451 m3 7.70 7.00 6.40
L yd3 10.07 9.16 8.37
L Length mm 3,100 2,900 3,000
ft in 10’2” 9’6” 9’10”
H
H Height mm 2,300 2,200 2,150
ft in 7’6” 7’2” 7’
Width mm 2,550 2,400 2,250
ft in 8’4” 7’10” 7’4”
H Weight kg 7,700 7,500 7,200
L lb 16,976 16,535 15,873
H
H
L
L
R 984 C 25
Index

H
Component Dimensions and Weights L
Mining Backhoe Buckets

for Boom 7.80 m/25’7”
Application XHD XHD XHD
H Capacity ISO 7451 m3 6.70 6.20 5.80
yd3 8.76 8.11 7.59
L Length mm 3,100 3,150 2,950
ft in 10’2” 10’3” 9’8”
H
H Height mm 2,200 2,200 2,200
ft in 7’2” 7’2” 7’2”
Width mm 2,600 2,500 2,500
ft in 8’6” 8’2” 8’2”
Weight kg 9,300 9,000 8,200
L lb 20,503 19,842 18,078
Backhoe Buckets
for Boom 9.20 m/30’2” and 11.00 m/36’
Capacity ISO 7451 m3 2.90 3.50 3.90
H
yd3 3.79 4.58 5.10
L Length mm 2,700 2,900 2,900
ft in 8’10” 9’6” 9’6”
H Height mm 2,100 2,250 2,250
ft in 6’10” 7’4” 7’4”
Width mm 1,300 1,300 1,400
ft in 4’3” 4’3” 4’7”
Weight kg 3,720 4,080 4,530
lb 8,201 8,995 9,987
Capacity ISO 7451 m3 4.70 5.50 6.20

yd3 6.15 7.19 8.11
L Length mm 2,900 2,900 2,900
ft in 9’6” 9’6” 9’6”
H
H Height mm 2,250 2,250 2,250
ft in 7’4” 7’4” 7’4”
Width mm 1,600 1,800 2,000
ft in 5’2” 5’10” 6’6”
Weight kg 4,970 5,280 5,700
L lb 10,957 11,640 12,566
L Shovel Hoist Cylinder (two)

Ø Diameter mm/ft in 400/ 1’3”
Weight kg/lb 2 x 1,330/2 x 2,932
L H
Shovel Boom
L Length mm/ft in 5,800/19’
Width mm/ft in 1,800/ 5’10”
L H Weight without
L crowd cylinder kg/lb 11,090/24,449
Weight
crowd cylinder kg/lb 563/1,241
26 R 984 C L
Index

H
L
Component Dimensions and Weights

L
H
L H
Shovel Stick
H L Length mm/ft in 4,350/14’ 3”
Width mm/ft in 1,900/ 6’ 2”
Weight kg/lb 6,130/13,514
L Shovel Bucket Cylinder (two)

Ø Diameter mm/in 300/ 11”
L
Weight kg/lb 2 x 810/2 x 1,786
L
Bottom Dump Buckets
for Boom 5.40 m/17’8”
Capacity ISO 7451 m 3 5.70 7.00 7.70 9.00
yd3 7.46 9.16 10.07 11.77
L Length mm 2,800 2,800 2,850 3,250
L ft in 9’2” 9’2” 9’4” 10’7”
H Height mm 2,900 3,000 3,000 3,050
ft in 9’6” 9’10” 9’10” 10’
L Width mm 2,500 2,900 2,900 2,900
ft in 8’2” 9’6” 9’6” 9’6”
H
Weight
Wear kit level I kg – – 11,000 13,300
lb – – 24,251 29,321
L H
Wear kit level II kg 11,400 12,800 13,300 –
lb 25,133 28,219 29,321 –
Wear kit level III kg 12,400 14,400 – –
lb 27,337 31747 – –
H
R 984 C 27
Index

Equipment
Undercarriage Operator’s Cab
Printed in Germany by Typodruck RG-BK-RP LFR/SP 11003234-1-07.11_enGB-US All illustrations and data may differ from standard equipment. Subject to change without notice. All indicated loads are based in accordance with ISO 9248.
Three track guides per track • Profile and deep drawn component •
Integrated travel drive • Tinted side windows •
Digging locks • Armored windshield •
Different undercarriage versions + Door with sliding window •
Different track pad width + Washer and wiper •
6-way adjustable cloth suspension seat •
Seat and consoles independently adjustable •
Coat hook •
Dome light •
Uppercarriage Sun blinds •
Engine hood with lift help • Radio installation prep-kit •
Lockable tool box • Removable handle for travel pedals •
Handrails, non slip surfaces • Cigar lighter and ashtray •
Tool kit • Removable custom floor mat •
Maintenance-free swing brake lock • Storage and literature tray •
Maintenance-free HD-batteries • Digital instrumentation •
Sound insulation • Digital instruments for oil temp. engine RPM and oil pressure •
Electric fuel tank filler pump + Digital hour meter visible from outside •
Pedal controlled positioning swing brake + Automatic air conditioning system •
Customized paint – compl. machine + AM/FM stereo radio with USB connection +
Protection for front working light + Air power seat adjustment with heating +
Heavy counterweight + Warning beacon +
Additional flood lights +
Bluetooth connection for mobile phone +
Hydraulics
Electronic pump regulation •
Stepless work mode selector • Attachment
Pressure storage for controlled lowering of attachments with Cylinders with shock absorber •
engine turned off • Sealed pivots •
Hydraulic tank shut-off valve • Two flood lights on the boom •
Pressure compensation • Bucket mounted 27 t lifting eye •
Flow compensation • Automatic lubrication system Lincoln “Centromatic” for
Filter with integrated fine filter area (5 µm) • attachment and swing ring •
Pressure test ports • Safety check valves on the hoist cylinders (only on 528 series) •
Additional hydraulic circuits + Overload warning device +
Bio-degradable hydraulic oils + Hydraulic quick change tool adapter +
Filter for secondary circuit + Liebherr equipment program +
Special buckets +
Cylinder – rod protection +
Additional piping for hydraulic tools +
3,40 m/11’1” stick equipped for additional pipings +
Engine
Direct injection •
Turbo charger •
Air filter with pre-cleaner, main and safety element •
Air filter with automatic dust ejector •
Automatic idling •
Main switch for electric circuit •
Cold start aid •
Fuel pre-heater +
•
= Standard, + = Option
Options and/or special attachments, supplied by vendors other than Liebherr, are only to be installed with the
knowledge and approval of Liebherr in order to retain warranty.
Liebherr-Mining Equipment Colmar SAS

49 rue Frédéric Hartmann, F-68025 Colmar Cedex
 +33 369 49 20 00, Fax +33 369 49 23 18
www.liebherr.com, E-Mail: info.lec@liebherr.com
Index

Operating Manual Safety instructions
Meaning of the symbols in this manual
2 Safety instructions
Working with the machine holds dangers to which you as the owner, machine oper-
ator or maintenance expert could be exposed. If you regularly read and note the safe-
ty information, however, you can prevent danger and accidents. This is particularly
true for those who are only occasionally in contact with the machine, eg. for mainte-
nance work. The following information comprises safety regulations which, if fol-
lowed conscientiously, will contribute to your safety and that of other persons, as well
as avoiding damage to the machine.
Following these precautions does not release you from the responsibility to take note
of safety regulations which apply on site or of guidelines given by legal bodies or pro-
fessional associations.
For EU countries, guideline 2009 / 104 / EC contains the minimum required safety
information applicable to the owner.
2.1 Meaning of the symbols in this manual
Work processes and actions that could cause danger are accompanied by safety
informations in these operating instructions. These safety informations describe
various dangers which are emphasized by the terms Danger, Caution and Note.
These terms are identified by symbols in the operating instructions and have the
following meaning:
Danger!
Warning relating to a danger that carries with it a high risk of death or serious injury
if the appropriate preventative measures are not taken.
Caution!
Warning relating to dangers that could result in physical injury and/or damage to the
machine if the appropriate preventative measures are not taken.
Note!
This symbol identifies user tips and operating and maintenance procedures whose
use will guarantee a high degree of user-friendliness and longevity to the machine
or which will considerably simplify working procedures.
– This symbol identifies a listing.

• This symbol identifies a sub-listing.

 This symbol signifies the following: “The precondition must be fulfilled”.
The machine operator or the maintenance personnel must first fulfil the
precondition described, i e. the machine must be brought into a particular work
position in order to be able to carry out the actions subsequently described.
 This symbol identifies an action.
The machine operator or the maintenance personnel should be active at this
location and carry out the action described.
 This symbol means “Carry out an activity".
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2-1

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety instructions Operating Manual
Use in accordance with the regulations
If the machine operator or maintenance personnel have carried out the activities
described in an action, the result of this action will be described here.
Following these notes does not relieve you of responsibility for following
additional rules and guidelines!
Additional points that should be noted are:
– the safety regulations which apply on site,
– statutory road traffic regulations,
– the guidelines provided by professional associations.
2.2 Use in accordance with the regulations
– The hydraulic excavator is a machine with work equipment (eg. hoe type bucket,
grab, bucket attachment) designed to detach, lift, transport and shake off earth,
stones and other materials, while the transportation of the load itself usually takes
place without moving the machine. Moving the machine when it is carrying a load
must be carried out while observing the appropriate safety measures (see section
"Notes for safe working").
– Machines used for hoisting are subject to specific conditions and must be fitted
with the stipulated safety devices (see section “Hoisting work”).
– Machines used underground (deep mining and tunnel construction) must be
equipped with exhaust gas reducing equipment (e.g. diesel particle filter). Always
comply with the statutory regulations applicable at the location of operation.
– Special tasks require special attachments and possibly also special safety devic-
es. This equipment may only be attached to the machine and used with the ex-
plicit consent of and according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the basic
machine.
– Any other use, in particular transporting persons or working in explosive atmos-
pheres or contaminated environments is not deemed to be in accordance with
regulations. The manufacturer is not liable for any damage resulting from this ac-
tion. The user is solely responsible for the risk incurred.
– Observing the operating instructions and the inspection / maintenance instruc-
tions is also deemed to be appropriate use in accordance with regulations.
2.3 Safety Instructions
General safety instructions

– Please familiarize yourself with the operating instructions before starting up the
machine.
– Ensure that you have obtained, read and understood any additional instructions
relating to special accessories for the machine.
– Only specifically authorized persons may operate, maintain or repair the machine.
The legal minimum age is to be adhered to.
– Only employ trained or appropriately instructed personnel. Clearly establish
which personnel are responsible for operating, setting up, maintaining and repair-
ing the machine. Give personnel the power to refuse to carry out unsafe instruc-
tions. This also applies in relation to traffic regulations.
2-2 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
– Only permit apprentices and personnel who are in training or who have only gen-
eral training to operate on the machine under the constant supervision of an ex-
perienced member of staff.
– As far as possible, monitor personnel to ensure that they are adhering to safe
working practices, are aware of risks and are observing the operating instructions.
– Always wear safe work clothes when you are working on or with the machine.
Avoid wearing rings, wrist watches, ties, scarves, open jackets, baggy clothing
etc... There is a risk of injury from, for example, getting caught up or being drawn
in.
– Wear individual protective equipment (protective goggles, safety helmets, safety
shoes and gloves, reflective vests and ear protection etc...).
– Ensure that you obtain information on any special safety regulations for the job
site from the site foreman.
– Always tilt up the safety lever before leaving the operator’s seat.
– When getting in and out, do not hold on to the steering column, control panel or
joystick. Doing this could cause unintentional movement, which could result in an
accident.
– Never jump from the machine; use the steps, ladders, gangplanks and supporting
straps provided for this purpose.
– Face the machine when getting in or out and always use three-point support, i.e.
two hands and one foot or two feet and one hand must always be in contact with
the access system at the same time.
– Familiarize yourself with the location of the emergency exit.
– In the absence of any other instructions, proceed as follows for all maintenance
and repair work:
• park the machine on firm, level ground
• align the uppercarriage with the undercarriage so that the sprockets locate at
the back-end
• anchor the bucket in the ground.
• place all operating levers into neutral and tilt the safety lever up.
• switch off the engine and remove the start key.
– Before touching any parts of the hydraulic circuits, you must also operate all pilot
control devices (joystick and pedals) in all directions with the start key in contact
position and with the security lever lowered, in order to reduce the actuating and
dynamic pressures in the work circuits. You must then reduce the internal tank
pressure as described in these operating instructions.
– Secure all loose parts on the machine.
– Never operate a machine before carrying out a careful inspection tour and check-
ing whether any warning signs are missing or illegible.
– Respect all danger and safety instructions.
– For special applications the machine must be equiped with specific safety equip-
ments. Work only if they are mounted and functional.
– Do not carry out any modifications, alterations or conversions to the machine
which may affect safety without the express permission of the manufacturer. This
also applies for the installation of safety devices and valves and for welding work
on load-bearing parts.
– It is forbiden to repair the structure of the cab.
– Not original equipment and component parts or such kind, wich has generaly not
been validated by LIEBHERR for installation or extension, has not to be installed
or added onto the excavator without previous written agreement of LIEBHERR.
Wherefore the necessary technical documentations has to be at LIEBHERR’s dis-
posal.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2-3

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
Avoidance of crushing and burns

– Do not work beneath the equipment if it is not safely positioned on the ground or
supported.
– Do not use any damaged or insufficient load-bearing take-up materials, such as
ropes or chains.
– Wear adapted work gloves when working with wire cables.
– When working on the equipment, never use your fingers to locate bores; use the
correct punch for the procedure.
– Ensure that no objects enter the fans when the engine is on. The fan will eject or
destroy these objects and will itself be damaged.
– Near operating temperature, the parts of the engine cooling system, of the ex-
haust system and of the hydraulic system can reach very high temperatures.
Avoid coming into contact with coolant carrying parts, with parts from the exhaust
system and with hot oil or oil-bearing parts.There is a risk of sustaining burns.
– Only check the coolant when the sealing cap of the expansion container has
cooled to a point where it is possible to touch it. Then turn the cap carefully to let
off the overpressure.
– Wear protective goggles and gloves when working on the battery. Avoid sparks
and naked flames.
– Never permit the bucket to be guided by hand by auxiliary personnel.
– When reaching into the engine compartment, always secure the side doors
against unintentional closing by positioning the supports if provided for this pur-
pose.
– Never lay under the machine if it is raised with work equipment and has not been
correctly and securely supported with appropriate supports.
Avoidance of fire and explosions

– Switch off the engine when refuelling.
– Do not smoke or use a naked flame when refilling tanks and working near or
charging the batteries.
– Always start the engine in accordance with the operating instructions.
– Check the electrical system regularly.
– Have all faults, such as loose connections, blown fuses and lamps and clogged
or abraded cables rectified by authorized personnel.
– Do not transport any combustible liquids anywhere on the machine other than in
the tanks provided for this purpose.
– Check all lines, hoses and screwed joints regularly for leakage and damage.
– Rectify leakages immediately and replace damaged components.
– Oil spraying out of leaking areas can easily cause a fire.
– Ensure that all holds and shields are correctly installed to guard against vibration,
abrasion and heat accumulation.
– Do not use cold start materials (ether) in the vicinity of heat sources, naked flames
or in inadequately ventilated areas.
– Do not use any starting aids containing flammable material to start diesel engines
with preheating or flame glow systems. There is a risk of EXPLOSION.
– Familiarize yourself with the location and operation of fire extinguishers on the
machine and with local fire warning and fire abatement options.
– It is possible to install an extinguisher into the driver’s cab.
2-4 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
– All doors, covers and boxes locks have to be unlocked before operation in order
to facilitate firefighting in case of fire. Only electrical boxes from and over 50V
must remain locked during operation.
Bringing the machine safely into service

– Carry out a careful inspection tour around the machine each time before starting
it.
– Ensure that no one, except an authorized person, is in the work and movement
area of the machine.
– Check the machine for loose bolts, cracks, wear, leakage and damage.
– Never attempt to operate a damaged machine.
– Ensure that any damage is immediately rectified.
– Ensure that all hoods and covers are closed, but that locks are unlocked, to facil-
itate the fight against fire in case of.
– Ensure that all warning signs are present.
– Keep windows and interior and exterior mirrors clean. Secure doors and windows
against unintended movement.
– Ensure that no one is working on or under the machine and warn personnel in the
vicinity of the machine that it is about to start by sounding the horn.
Safely getting up
– Proceed with the the same precautions to climb up or down onto the machine, as
to install yourself at the operator’s seat.
– When getting up or down, position the machine on even, horizontal ground. The
upper structure should be positioned with the undercarriage in such a way that
the steps and ladders are aligned with each other.
– Ensure that steps, ladders and hand-rails (grips) are in good condition. In partic-
ular, you should ensure that they are free of dirt, oil, ice and snow.
NOTE: To ensure that the doors open properly in all weather conditions, the door
seals must be dusted with talc or silicon at least every two months or more often
if required. The door hinges and locks should be greased regularly.
– If you are able to reach the door handle with your free hand, open the doors be-
fore you climb any higher. External influences, such as wind, can make it more
difficult to open doors. Because of this, always use your hand for control when
opening doors. Ensure that the door is latched open to prevent it slamming open
and shut.
– In case of bad weather conditions, be particulary vigilant to realise the climbing
and descent from the cab with the best safety conditions, and do or give the in-
stuctions to the execution of prior preparations to be accomplished, as enunciated
above, in order to displace yourself safely.

– Be particulary vigilant with those prerequisites conditions.
– For cab with a side door:
• Now continue to climb up, still using the three-point support and sit down in the
operator’s seat as soon as you enter the cab.
• Fasten the safety belt (if available), unlock the door, using the planned lever,
and close it immediately using the door handle, before tilting down the safety
lever, and start the machine.
• If you wish to work with the door open, it is necessary to fasten your safety belt.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2-5

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
If unavailable, let it be instaled before working with the door open.

– For cab with a rear door:
• Now continue to climb up, still using the three-point support and close the door
as soon as you enter the cab.
• Sit down in the operator’s seat and fasten the safety belt (if available) before tilt-
ing down the safety lever, and start the machine.
Adjusting the operator’s standing position

– Before starting the machine, adjust the seat, mirrors, armrests and operator’s
controls in such a way that you are able to work comfortably and safely.
– Acoustic insulation devices on the machine must be set to the insulation position
throughout operation.
Protection from vibration - seat adjusting

– Keep the seat in good condition and adjust it as follows:
• The seat and its damping action should be adjusted depending on the weight
and height of the operator.
• Check the seat’s damping action and adjustment mechanisms regularly and en-
sure that these seat characteristics remain as per the seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
Utilisation in confined spaces

– Only operate combustion engines and fuel-operated heaters in adequately venti-
lated spaces. Before starting in closed areas, ensure adequate ventilation.
Follow the regulations which apply for the particular area of use.
Starting the machine safely

– Before starting, check all control lamps and instruments for correct function, place
all operator’s controls in Neutral and tilt the safety lever up.
– Before starting, sound the horn briefly to alert people in the vicinity of the machine.
– Only start the machine from the driver’s seat.
– In the absence of any other instructions, start the engine in accordance with the
regulations given in the operating instructions.
– Tilt the safety lever down and then test all display and checking devices.
– In enclosed spaces, only allow the engine to run when there is adequate ventila-
tion. If necessary, open doors and windows to ensure sufficient fresh air supplies.
– Bring the engine and hydraulic oil to operating temperature. Low oil temperatures
make the control unit react sluggishly.
– Check that the equipment is operating correctly.
– Move the machine carefully to an open area and then check the function of the
running and slewing gear brakes, the steering and the signaling and lighting de-
vices.
Stopping the machine safely

– Only stop the machine on level, firm ground.
– If the machine has to be stopped on an incline, chocks should be used to secure
it from rolling away.
– Before stopping the machine, each time it is possible, align the uppercarriage with
the undercarriage so that the sprockets locate at the back-end. This is the only
one position which enables a secured access to every maintenance locations on
the uppercarriage.
2-6 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
– Use the stop bolts to secure the upper structure facing the undercarriage, if avail-
able.
– Lower the equipment and anchor the grab lightly in the ground.
– Position every control lever into neutral position and depress the parking and
slewing brakes.
– Stop the engine in accordance with the operating instructions and tilt the safety
lever up before leaving the cab.
– Lock the machine, included hoods and compartments, retire every keys and se-
cure the machine against unpermited use and vandalis.
Safely getting down

to instal yourself.
– Stop the machine on level, horizontal ground. The upper structure should be po-
sitioned with the undercarriage in such a way that the steps and ladders are
aligned with each other.
– Open and lock the door. Be sure of it’s locking. Take care of weather conditions !
Unfasten the safety belt.
– Position yourself with your face toward the machine when getting out and use
three-point support, i.e. two hands and one foot or two feet and one hand must
always be in contact with the access system at the same time. Climb down until
you can close the doors safely. Always use your hand for control when closing the
doors. Lock the door.
– Now climb down to the ground.
Working safely with the machine

– Before you start working, acquaint yourself with the special features of the job site
and any special precautions and warning signals. Examples of particular work en-
vironments would be on-site or traffic obstructions, the load-carrying capacity of
the ground and any requirements to make the job site safe from public use.
– Always maintain a safe distance from overhangs, edges, slopes and unsafe
ground.
– Be particularly careful in conditions of reduced visibility and changeable ground
conditions.
– Familiarize yourself with the location of power lines on the job site and take par-
ticular care when working near them. If necessary, inform the responsible author-
ities.
– Maintain a safe distance from electrical aerial lines. Do not allow the equipment
to come near cables when working near electrical aerial lines. Risk of fatality! In-
form yourself about required safety distances.
– The following actions must be carried out in the event of any transfer of electricity:
• do not move the machine or its equipment,
• do not leave the driver’s cab,

• warn any personnel in the vicinity not to come close to the excavator and
not to touch it,
• instruct or initiate that someone turns off the voltage.
• move the machine, if possible, from the danger zone to a sufficient distance,
• Do not leave the machine until you are absolutely sure that voltage in the line,
which had been touched or damaged, has been turned off !
– Before moving the machine, always ensure that any attachments are safely se-
cured.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2-7

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
– When driving onto public roads, paths and squares, observe current traffic regu-
lations and if necessary, ensure that the machine has been made safe as per reg-
ulations beforehand.
– Always turn on the lights in conditions of poor visibility or darkness.
– Do not permit any passengers in the machine.
– Only work when seated properly and with the safety belt securely fastened (if
available).
– Report all function faults and ensure that all necessary repairs are carried out im-
mediately.
– Assure yourself that no one is endangered when you start the machine moving.
– Before you start working, test the brake system in accordance with the regulations
given in the operating instructions.
– Never leave the driver’s seat while the machine is moving.
– Never leave the machine unattended while the engine is running.
– The machine must be positioned, moved and operated in such a way that it is sta-
ble and that there is no danger of overturning. Only known loads may be moved
with the equipment; this applies particularly when using the grab.
– Position the upper structure in the longitudinal direction when moving and hold
the load as close to the ground as possible.
EXCEPTION : excavators used for loading and unloading, see the part "Safe use
when loading and unloading (particularly when loading and unloading wood)" on
page 10.
– Adjust your driving speed to suit local conditions.
– Avoid any working movements which may tip the machine. Should the machine
start to tip or slide sideways, however, turn the upper structure to face downhill
and lower the equipment at the same time.
– As far as possible, work downhill or uphill and not side on to the slope.
– Drive safely on stony, sleepery or inclined ground
– Only drive downhill at the permitted speed or you could lose control of the ma-
chine.
– Always shift down to a lower running step before a slope. When doing this, the
diesel engine must run at maximal speed and the speed may only be reduced us-
ing the foot pedals.
– Load an occupied truck only if all safety requirements are fulfilled, notably in order
to protect the truck operator.
– For demolition work, digging and crane operations etc., always use protective de-
vices specifically designed for the purpose.
– For terrain which is difficult to gain an overview of and whenever necessary, ask
for the assistance of a spotter. Only permit one person to give you signals.
– Authorize only experienced people to attach load and to give indications to the
machine operator. This people must be in the operator’s sight or in radio contact
with him.
– Depending on the equipment combination, there is a risk of collision between the
work tool and the cab, the cab protection or the boom cylinders. The greatest de-
gree of care must be taken to avoid damage when the hoe teeth come within this
area.
lift ring of the attachment and the cab or the cab protection. Before operating, en-
sure that there is no risk of collision, especially on excavator with cab elevation.
If necessary remove the lift ring.
2-8 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
– In case of a thunderstorm :
• lower the attachment to the ground and if possible anchor the digging tool into
the soil.
• leave the cab and move away from the machine before the storm breaks out.
Otherwise, you must stop the excavator, turn off the radio and keep inside the
closed cab until the end of the storm.
– Auxiliary control units can have various functions. Always check their functions
when starting up the machine.
– Stop the swinging motion of the uppercarriage when lowering the attachment into
a ditch without striking the attachment on the ditch walls.
– Inspect the machine for damage if the attachment has been swung into a wall or
any other obstacles.
– Applications in which the attachment is to be used to strike the material being ex-
tracted are not permitted, even when working in a longitudinal direction.
– Repeated strikes against an object leads to damage to the steel structures and
machine components.
– Please refer to your LIEBHERR dealer if special teeth for heavy-duty or special
applications are required.
– Do not attach too large bucket or bucket with side cutters or that are during oper-
ations with rocky material. This would prolong the work cycles and may lead to
damage to the bucket as well as further machine components.
– With the 2x45° offset articulation, the offset position may only be employed if the
working tool or the attachment does not touch the material.
– Operation of the offset articulation to drill into the material is not permitted.
– Do not lift the machine during operation. Should this happen, lower the machine
slowly back to the ground.
– Do not let the machine fall heavily on the ground and do not hold it back with the
hydraulics. This would damage the machine.
– During operation with the attachment it is forbidden to raise the machine with the
dozing blade (e.g. carving at the ceiling when tunnelling).
Safe use with a hydraulic hammer

– The hydraulic hammer must be selected with particular care. When using a hy-
draulic hammer not permitted by LIEBHERR, steel structures or the other ma-
chine components can become damaged.
– Before beginning breaking tasks, position the machine on firm and level ground.
– Use a hydraulic hammer designed exclusively for breaking stone, concrete and
other breakable materials.
– Only operate the hydraulic hammer in the longitudinal direction of the machine
and with the windshield closed or with a front protective grid.
– Ensure during hammer operation that no cylinder is entirely extended or retracted
and that the stick is not in the vertical position.
– In order to avoid damages to the machine, try not to break stone or concrete while
performing retraction and extension motions of the hydraulic hammer.

– Do not apply the hydraulic hammer uninterrupted for more than 15 secs. at a time
to the same place. Change the breaking point. Too long uninterrupted operation
of the hydraulic hammer leads to an unnecessary overheating of the hydraulic oil.
– Do not use the drop force of the hydraulic hammer to break stone or other mate-
rials. Do not move obstacles with the hydraulic hammer. Misuse of this nature
would damage both the hammer and the machine.
– Do not use the hydraulic hammer to lift objects
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2-9

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
Safe use when loading and unloading (particularly when

loading and unloading wood)
– According to use, it can be necessary when working with a grab to move with the
equipment raised and the load lifted up; this applies, for example, when loading
and unloading wood.
– Here, the centre of gravity of the machine will be displaced upwards in the vertical
direction. The driving characteristics of the machine will thus be influenced per-
sistently, e.g. through reduction of the dynamic stability.
The following instructions are therefore to be observed at all times:
• Adjust vehicle handling to suit the altered machine characteristics and environ-
mental conditions.
• Reduce your speed to prevent the need for sudden braking and steering ma-
noeuvres.
• Avoid sudden speed changes, such as braking, accelerating and changing di-
rection.
• Only rotate the upper structure when the undercarriage is stationary.
• Only rotate the upper structure after you have picked up the load.
• Only move the machine when you have picked up and lifted the load and rotat-
ed the upper structure to the driving position.
• There is a danger of possible swinging movement and dropping of the load
when the equipment is raised.
• A protective grid (FOPS) in accordance with ISO 10262 must be attached to the
cab.
• A protective roof (FOPS) in accordance with ISO 10262 must be attached if
there is a risk of objects falling from above.
• Only the maximum permissible load may be taken up using the grab.
– NOTE: The weight of absorbent materials, such as logs, is dependent on length,
diameter and specific weight. The influencing variables present in a natural prod-
uct, such as moisture, must be noted.
– Working procedures when using machines with grabs require the machine oper-
ator to receive special instruction and training.
– Use as part of the work process is only permitted when the machine operator has
sufficient training and practical experience.
Safe use of machines with tower elevation

– Due to the tower elevation, the centre of gravity of the machine will be displaced
upwards in the vertical direction. The driving and work characteristics of the ma-
chine will thus be influenced persistently, e.g. through reduction of the dynamic
stability.
– Due to the heightened centre of gravity, the machine must be aligned horizontally
before use. In horizontal alignment, the centre of gravity of the upper structure is
over the centre of the undercarriage, which reduces the risk of tilting.
– The machine can still sway and tilt despite being aligned!
2 - 10 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
When moving the machine:

• Rotate the upper structure parallel to the undercarriage undercarriage (trans-
port position).
• Draw the equipment as close as possible to the machine.
• Only at this point may the support feet be retracted and the machine moved.
• Moving with loads is not permitted.
• Check the terrain to be covered to ensure that the ground is solid and even. Pot-
holes and uneven surfaces jeopardize the stability of the machine.
• Adjust vehicle handling to suit the altered machine characteristics (high centre
of gravity) and environmental conditions.
noeuvres.
rection.
• Ascending gradients and obstacles may only be approached in the longitudinal
direction in order to prevent unacceptable banking of the machine.
• Special care should be taken when driving through narrow passages - drive
slowly!
When loading and unloading:
• The machine must be supported and aligned horizontally before moving (slew-
ing) the upper structure out of the transport position.
• It is imperative that you check the contact surface of the support (load carrying
capacity of the substrate). A support subsiding would have disastrous conse-
quences!
• Carry out all movements with increased care.
• To slew the load, move the equipment as close as possible to the machine
(Caution! swinging grab)and hold the load close to the undercarriage and
above the substrate.
• Avoid braking or accelerating the equipment or upper structure abruptly.
• Do not lift any loads which are heavier than those given in the load chart.
Protection from vibration

– Vibrational loads on mobile building machinery are mainly the result of the type
and method of use. The following parameters in particular are decisive influences:
• Terrain conditions: Uneven areas and potholes;
• Operational techniques: Speed, steering, brakes, controlling the machine’s
control elements when driving and working.
– To a large extent, the machine operator determines the vibrational loads since he
selects the speed, gearbox ratio, working method and route himself.
This means that there is a wide range of different vibrational loads for the same
machine type.
Whole-body vibrational load for the machine operator can be reduced if the following
recommendations are observed:
– Select suitable machines, equipment parts and auxiliary devices for each part of
the job.
– Use a machine that has a suitable seat (i.e. for earth-moving machinery such as
hydraulic excavators, this should be a seat which corresponds with EN ISO
7096).
structions.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2 - 11

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
– Check the maintenance status of the machine, particularly with respect to: tyre
pressure, brakes, steering, mechanical connections etc.
– Do not steer, brake, accelerate, shift gears, move or load the machine’s equip-
ment jerkily.
– To reduce vibrational load, adjust the machine speed to suit the route as follows:
• Reduce speed when driving on difficult terrain;
• Drive around obstacles and avoid driving on very difficult terrain.
– Keep the terrain on which the machine is working and driving in good condition:
• Remove large stones and obstacles;
• Fill in ruts and holes;
• Have machines ready to prepare and maintain suitable ground conditions and
calculate in sufficient time to carry out any work required.
– Drive longer distances (e.g. on public roads) at an appropriate (medium) speed.
– Use special auxiliary systems (if available) which reduce vibration for machines
that are driven frequently.
If such auxiliary systems are not available, regulate speed to avoid "oscillating"
the machine.
Towing the machine safely

– Always follow the correct procedure if applicable.
– The machine may only be towed in exceptional circumstances, e.g. in order to
move the machine away from an area where it is at risk.
– Before towing, check all attachments and towing devices for safety and stability.
– Towing devices such as bars, cables or ropes must have adequate tensile
strength and should be secured around the undercarriage tower or the towing
hook provided on the undercarriage.
Any damage or accidents which occur while towing the machine are not covered
by the manufacturer’s guarantee.
– Ensure that there is no one in the vicinity of the towing devices when towing.
– Stretch safely and hold the towing devices. Avoid kinks on cables or ropes.
– When towing, maintain the correct transport position, permitted speed and route,
and avoid lurching.
– After towing, return the machine to correct operational status.
– When restarting the machine, be sure only to proceed in accordance with the op-
erating instructions.
Attaching and removing equipment parts safely

– Equipment or attachments made by other manufacturers or those which do not
have general approval from LIEBHERR for installation or attachment may not be
installed or attached to the machine without LIEBHERR’s prior written consent.
– LIEBHERR must be provided with the appropriate technical documentation nec-
essary for this purpose.
– Before carrying out any major repair work on the equipment, position the machine
on level, firm ground.
supported with appropriate supports.
– Before loosening lines or unscrewing bolts, you must store the equipment, switch
off the engine and press the start key to the contact position and both joysticks
and the pushbuttons to “Turn grapple” in order to reduce the pressure in the hy-
draulic system.
2 - 12 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Safety Instructions
– Do not attempt to lift heavy parts. Use devices which are suitable for this purpose
and which have sufficient load carrying capacity.
– Do not use cable which is damaged or does not have sufficient load carrying ca-
pacity. Wear work gloves when working with wire cables.
– When working on the equipment: switch off the engine and keep the safety lever
tilted up. Never use your fingers to locate bores; use the correct punch for the pro-
cedure.
– During repair work: ensure that the hydraulic lines are secured correctly and that
all bolts and connections are tight.
– When you have removed and chocked an equipment part, close open areas of
the hydraulic circuit to stop dirt entering. Only allow authorized persons in the vi-
cinity of the machine or the lifting device used.
Removing and installing equipment pins safely

– If possible, always use a hydraulic bolt press to press out the equipment’s bolts.
– If you have to remove a bolt using a sledge-hammer, a driving punch and a bore
hole conductor held by another person must be used.
– To drive in a bolt, screw the drive screws provided in the toolbox if provided into
the bolt's threaded hole and only hammer these screws.
– When installing bolts locked by means of castle nuts and cotter pins, first drive the
bolt to the stop, then screw the castle nut by hand until contact and then only pull
it far enough to push in the cotter pin.
Transporting the machine safely

– Due to transport restrictions, use only suitable means of transport and lifting de-
vices with sufficient load-carrying capacity.
– Park the machine on a flat surface and wedge the crawler or wheels securely.
– If required, detach a part of the machine’s working equipment during transporta-
tion.
– The ramp used to drive the machine up onto the flatbed trailer should not exceed
an inclination of the angle value indicated in the "Technical data" section of this
manual (machine must be able to walk up unaided) and should have a wooden
cover to prevent sliding back.
– The undercarriage undercarriage should be swept clean, i.e. before driving up the
ramp, clean any snow, ice and mud from the crawler / wheels of the machine.
– Align the machine precisely with the loading ramp.
– Attach the hand lever for fine-tune driving (crawler excavator) onto the accelerator
pedals.
– Ensure that a spotter gives the machine operator the required signal.
– Prepare the placing block to ensure against rolling back when the machine is driv-
ing up onto the flatbed.
– Tilt the equipment up and drive up the loading ramp. While doing this, always hold
the equipment securely over the loading area, drive very carefully up the ramp
and onto the transportation vehicle.
– Rotate the upper structure carefully to the rear and lower the equipment. Due to
restrictions during transport on hoe equipment, tilt the arm in and dismantle the
bucket during transportation.
– After loading the machine onto the flatbed trailer, the upper structure must be se-
cured facing the undercarriage using the stop bolts (only A devices).
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2 - 13

MJFCIFSS
Index
Servicing the machine safely
– Secure the undercarriage and the remaining individual parts using chains and
blocks to prevent slipping.
– Before you leave the machine, reduce pressure on all pressure lines, remove the
ignition key and tilt up the safety lever.
– Lock all cab and panel doors.
– Before transportation, find out all details about the route to be travelled, particu-
larly as they relate to width, height and weight restrictions.
– Pay particular attention when driving under electrical lines and bridges and
through tunnels.
– When unloading the machine, take the same amount of care as was taken when
it was loaded. Remove all chains and blocks. Start the engine as per the operating
instructions. Drive carefully off the trailer’s loading area and down the ramp. Hold
the working equipment as securely as possible over the ground while doing this.
Have a spotter guide you.
2.4 Servicing the machine safely

– Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by specially trained person-
nel.
– Observe statutory timetables or intervals given in the operating instructions for re-
peat tests / inspections. It is imperative that a suitably equipped workshop is
available in order to carry out maintenance work.
– The inspection and maintenance schedule given at the end of these operating
instructions defines precisely who is required / permitted to carry out what work.
Jobs listed as daily / weekly work may be carried out by the machine's driver or
maintenance personnel when they have received appropriate instruction.
The remaining work may only be carried out by specialist personnel with appro-
priate training.
– Replacement parts must correspond to the technical requirements determined by
the manufacturer. Original replacement parts are always guaranteed to meet the-
se criteria.
– Always wear safe work clothes when carrying out maintenance work. Avoid the
wearing of rings, wrist watches, ties, scarves, open jackets, baggy clothing etc...
There is a risk of injury from, for example, getting caught up or being drawn in.
Protective goggles, safety helmets, safety shoes and gloves, reflective vests and
ear protection etc. are required for specific jobs.
– Do not remain in direct proximity of the diesel engine while the diesel engine is
running.
Persons with pacemakers should not approach within 20 cm of the running diesel
engine.
Do not touch voltage-carrying parts on the electrical connection of the individual
solenoid injection pumps (Unit Pumps UP) while the diesel engine is running.
– Do not permit unauthorised persons to approach the machine during maintenan-
ce work.
– Cordon off a wide maintenance area if required.
– Inform operational personnel before starting to carry out any special work and re-
pair work. Designate persons in charge of supervision.
2 - 14 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– In the absence of any other information in the operating instructions, carry out all
maintenance work on the machine on level, firm ground with the working equip-
ment set aside and the engine switched off.
– For some machines, the only one position which enables a secured access to
every maintenance locations on the uppercarriage, is when the uppercarriage is
aligned with the undercarriage so that the sprockets locate at the back-end.
The ladder situated on the undercarriage only corresponds with the uppercar-
riage’s access when the excavator is in this configuration.
– Pull out the ignition key and shut off the main battery switch.
– Always tighten any loose screw connections during maintenance and repair work.
– The mounting bolts of the main components, of the hydraulic hoses and of the
counterweight must be replaced after every removal.
– If safety devices have to be dismantled during set-up, maintenance and repair
work, they must be immediately reinstalled and checked at the end of the work.
– When carrying out repair work, particularly when working under the machine,
hang a “Do not start” warning sign in a clearly visible position on the control panel.
Pull out the start key and shut off the main battery switch.
– Operate combustion motors and fuel operated heaters only in well ventilated
areas. Before operating these units, check ventilation.
– In addition, always follow applicable local regulations.
Cleaning
– Clean oil, fuel or care products off the machine before starting maintenance or re-
pair work and pay particular attention to connections and screw fittings.
Do not use aggressive cleaning products and use lint-free cleaning cloths.
– Do not use aggressive cleaning products or steam jet devices to clean the ma-
chine for the first two months after initial set-up of the machine (or after repaint-
ing).
– Do not use combustible liquids to clean the machine.
– Before cleaning the machine with water or steam jets (high pressure cleaner) or
other cleaning materials:
• lubricate all bearing points, bolt connections and the rim bearing to prevent wa-
ter or steam entering the bearing points.
• cover or glue shut all openings into which for safety or functional reasons water
or steam may not be permitted to enter.
Electric motors, electrical components, control boxes, plug connections and air
filters are particularly at risk.
– Ensure that the fire warning systems and fire extinguishers of the engine compart-
ment’s temperature sensor do not come into contact with hot cleaning products
during cleaning work.
The fire extinguisher could start.
– If you use a high pressure cleaner with steam or hot water to clean the machine,
observe following recommendations :
• the distance between the nozzle and the surface to be cleaned must be no low-
er than 20 inches
• the water temperature should not exceed 60°c (140°F)
• limit the water pressure to 80 bar maximum (11500 PSI)
• if you employ cleaning fluid, only use neutral cleaning agents such as custom-
ary car shampoos diluted to 2 or 3 percent maximum
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2 - 15

MJFCIFSS
Index
– After cleaning:
• remove all covers completely.
• check all fuel, engine oil and hydraulic lines for leakage, loosened connections,
chafing and damage.
• rectify any defects found immediately.
• lubricate all bearing points, bolt connections and the rim bearing to displace any
water or cleaning products that may have entered.
Field of view
– Mirrors and cameras, which were possibly removed for the transport, must be in-
evitably reinstalled and correctly adjusted before the initial set-up of the machine.
– Regularly check that the interior and exterior mirrors as well as the cameras are
correctly adjusted.
– Control the surroundings, and particularly the nearness area of the machine, dur-
ing operation or when travelling.
– Mirrors are installed on the machine:
• on the left to check the left side of the machine.
• on the front to check the front side of the machine.
• on the right to check the right side of the machine.
• above the counterweight to check the rear side of the machine.
– On some machines, some mirrors may be replaced with cameras.
– At each extension, construction or change on the machine, the sight conditions
must be maintained. These conditions must otherwise be checked according to
ISO 5006.
– Mirrors must be cleaned at least at daily intervals.
– Damaged mirrors and cameras must be immediately replaced.
– The site has to be organised so that the dangers due to a restricted field of view
are minimized, particularly for machines with an operating weight which is supe-
rior to 40 tons.
Crack testing
– Even when the machine is operated carefully, there is a possibility of individual
cases of overloading occurring, which could lead to cracks or loose connections.
The machine should therefore be checked regularly for cracks, loose connections
or other visible damage to maintain operational safety.
– In order to be able to check for cracks, it is essential that the machine is kept clean
and cleaned regularly.
– The tests should be carried out in accordance with the monitoring and mainte-
nance plan:
• every 250 operating hours by the machine owner’s maintenance personnel.
• every 500 operating hours by authorised specialist personnel.
– It is advisable to carry out these tests: supported, on firm, horizontal substrate,
with the equipment in longitudinal and cross direction for variable loads. Current
accident prevention regulations must be adhered to.
2 - 16 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Especially check the supporting components, in particular :

• framed construction undercarriage with axle and gearbox storage, support out-
riger, lower slewing ring support with tower and slewing ring.
• framed construction uppercarriage with bearing for boom and hoist cylinder, up-
per slewing ring support, cab suspension, mounting for slewing gear and coun-
ter weight.
• framed construction components of attachments, e.g. boom, stick, quick
change adapter, digging tool and grapple.
• hydraulic cylinders, axles, steering, pins and pin connections, ascents, ladders
and mounting elements.
– The crack test should be carried out visually. If a crack is suspected, the dye pen-
etration test should be carried out as a crack test on areas which do not have
good visibility, such as the ring bearing support, in order to increase testing safety.
– Any damage found must be rectified immediately. Welding work on load-bearing
parts of the earth-moving machinery, loading devices and transport devices may
only be carried out by trained specialist personnel and only in accordance with the
accepted rules of welding engineering. In case of doubt, contact the LIEBHERR
customer support service to discuss suitable remedies.
Welding, drilling, firing and grinding work

– Any welding on structural parts (as undercarriage, uppercarriage, equipment
parts,…) may only be done the manufacturer, or authorized official dealer. If this
rule is neglected, the warranty is voided.
– Only carry out welding, drilling, firing and grinding work on the machine with ex-
press authorization. Clean dust and combustible materials off the machine and its
surrounding areas before welding, drilling, firing or grinding.
Ensure adequate ventilation. Risk of fire or explosion.
– Before welding repairs on other parts, always disconnect the battery. Always re-
move the negative terminal first and reconnect it last.
– Nevertheless if welding repair should be done on components which may contain
inflammable gases (welded counterweight, hydraulic tank, fuel tank, …), these
components must be previously and sufficiently ventilated with pressurized air to
avoid all fire or explosion hazard
– Before welding, connect the ground cable as close as possible to the welding
point, so the welding current will not run through the swing ring, joints, gears,
bushings, rubber parts and seals
Process materials
– When working with oils, greases and other chemical substances, observe the ap-
propriate current safety regulations for the product.
– Ensure that process materials and replacement parts are disposed of in a safe
and environmentally acceptable manner.
– Take care when handling hot process materials
(Risk of burning and scalding).
Repair work
and which have sufficient load capacity. When replacing single parts and larger
subassemblies, carefully secure them on lifting devices them so that they do not
present a risk. Only use suitable and correctly functioning lifting devices and load
take-up devices with adequate load capacity.
Do not stand or work under swinging loads.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2 - 17

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Do not use lifting devices which are damaged or do not have sufficient load car-
rying capacity.
Wear work gloves when working with wire cables.
crane operator. This people must be in the operator’s sight or in radio contact with
him.
– When working above body height, use safe climbing devices and working plat-
forms which are appropriate for the job.
Do not use machine parts as climbing devices if they are not designed for this pur-
pose.
When working at height, wear a harness to prevent falling.
Ensure that all grips, steps, rails, platforms and ladders are free of dirt, snow and
ice.
– Pneumatic cylinders do not have to be used as handles. Open doors and covers
carefully, so that pneumatic cylinders do not hit their stops, because this could
cause mechanical damages.
– Make sure the equipment on which you will operate is securely supported before
working (e.g. replacing teeth). Prevent metal touching metal when doing this.
– For safety reasons, never open and remove a track chain unless having previous-
ly totally released the pretension of the chain tensioning unit.
securely supported with appropriate supports.
– Always jack the machine up in such a way that any weight displacement does not
jeopardize stability and prevent metal touching metal while doing this.
– Work on the suspension, brake and steering systems may only be carried out by
trained specialist personnel.
– If the machine has to be repaired on a slope, secure the crawler with chocks and
connect the upper structure to the chassis using stop bolts.
– Only personnel with special training and experience may work on hydraulic equip-
ment.
– When searching for leakage, wear protective gloves. A fine jet of liquid under
pressure can penetrate the skin.
– Do not unscrew any lines or connections before you have set aside the equip-
ment, switched off the engine and depressurized the hydraulic system. After
switching off the engine, with the start key in contact position and with the safety
lever down into its lowest position, you must operate all pilot control devices (joy-
stick and pedals) in all directions in order to reduce the actuating and dynamic
pressures in the work circuits. You must then reduce the internal tank pressure
as described in these operating instructions.
Electrical system
Have all faults, such as loose connections, blown fuses and lamps and clogged
or abraded cables rectified by personnel.
– Only use original fuses with approved current strength.

– For machines with electrical neutral and high tension leads:
• switch the machine off immediately in the event of malfunctions in the power
supply.
– Work on the machine’s electrical equipment may only be carried out by skilled
electrical personnel or by trained personnel under the supervision of an electri-
cian in accordance with electrical regulations.
2 - 18 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– When working on live parts, ensure that a second person is available to operate
the emergency-off or the main switch and overvoltage release. Cordon off the
working area with a red and white safety chain and a warning sign. Only use in-
sulated tools.
– When working on neutral and high tension subassemblies, after releasing the
voltage, briefly disconnect the supply cable at earth and electronic devices such
as capacitors using an earthing rod.
– First test the released parts to make sure that they are off circuit, earth them and
then disconnect them briefly. Insulate adjacent live parts.
– Disconnect the battery before working on the electrical system or carrying out any
electric arc welding on the machine.
First disconnect the negative, then the positive pole. When reconnecting, proceed
in the reverse order.
Hydraulic accumulator
– All work on the hydraulic accumulators must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel.
– Inexpert assembly and handling of hydraulic accumulators can cause serious ac-
cidents.
– Do not operate damaged hydraulic accumulators.
– Before working on a hydraulic accumulator, you must reduce the pressure in the
hydraulic system (hydraulic system including hydraulic tank), as described in
these operating instructions.
– Do not carry out welding or soldering or do any mechanical work on the hydraulic
accumulator.
The hydraulic accumulator can be damaged by heat penetration and can be
made to rupture by mechanical working. RISK OF EXPLOSION!
– Only charge the hydraulic accumulator with nitrogen. There is a RISK OF EXPLO-
SION if oxygen or air is used.
– The accumulator body can become hot during operation; there is a risk of burning.
– New hydraulic accumulators must be charged with the pressure required for the
purpose of use before installation.
– The operating data (minimum and maximum pressure) are marked permanently
on hydraulic accumulators. Ensure that this marking remains visible.
Hydraulic lines and hoses.

– It is forbidden to carry out repair work on hydraulic lines and hoses!
– All lines, hoses and bolt connections must be checked regularly for externally vis-
ible damage and any possible damage must be immediately checked for leakage.
– Never check for leaks with your bare hands, use a sheet of paper or something
else.
– Any damaged parts must be removed immediately! Spurting oil can lead to injury
and burns.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2 - 19

MJFCIFSS
Index
Signs on the machine
– Even with correct storage and permitted load, lines and hoses are subject to the
natural aging process. This restricts their duration of use.
• Incorrect storage, mechanical damage and unauthorized load are the most
common causes of failure.
• In relation to duration of use, current norms, regulations and guidelines pertain-
ing to lines and hoses at place of use must be adhered to.
• Use at the limit range of permissible load can shorten duration of use (e.g. high
temperatures, frequent movement cycles, extremely high pulse frequencies,
multiple shift usage).
– Lines and hoses should be replaced if the following are found during inspection:
• Damage to the outer sheath as far as the liner (e.g. chafing, cuts and cracks);
• Brittleness of the outer sheath (fracture formation in hose material);
• Deformations which do not correspond to the natural form of the line or hose,
whether in a unpressurized or pressurized state or on bends e.g. sheath sepa-
ration, blistering;
• Unsealed areas;
• Non-adherence to requirements during installation;
• Damage or deformations to the hose fittings which reduce the tightness of the
fittings or the hose / fitting connection;
• Hoses working themselves out of the fittings;
• Corrosion of the fittings which reduces function and tightness;
– When replacing lines and hoses, use only original replacement parts.
– Install and mount lines and hoses correctly. Do not mix up the connections.
– The following is to be noted when replacing lines and hoses:
• Always ensure that the lines and hoses are installed free of torsion. For high-
pressure hoses, the screws from the half-clamps or full flange must always be
attached to both hose ends and should only be tightened afterwards.
• When tightening the flange on high-pressure lines and hoses with bent fittings,
the side with the bent fitting must always be tightened first and then the side with
the straight fitting tightened afterwards.
• Any mounting clamps which are located in the centre of the hose may only be
attached and tightened subsequently.
• Check daily to ensure that all clamps, covers and protective devices are prop-
erly fastened. Doing this will prevent vibration and damage during operation.
• Install the lines and hoses in such a way that they cannot chafe on other lines,
hoses or parts.
• A minimum distance from other parts of approx. half the exterior diameter of the
hose is recommended. The distance should not, however, be less than 10 to
15 mm.
• When replacing the lines or hoses on moving parts (e.g. from the boom to the
stay), check before initial start-up that there are no chafing areas in the entire
area of movement.
2.5 Signs on the machine

2.5.1 Introduction
The excavator comprises several types of signs:
– the safety plates provide warnings relating to dangers of accidents which could
result in serious injury or death.
– the information plates indicate specific points relating to the operation, mainte-
nance and characteristics of the machine.
2 - 20 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– the nameplates are attached to components for which the machine serial
number must be provided when ordering spare parts.
Danger!
Non-observance of safety plates can result in serious injury or death.
 Check warning plates regularly to ensure that they are complete and clearly leg-
ible.
 Replace missing or illegible safety and information plates immediately. You will
find the ordering numbers of these plates in the spare parts book of the excava-
tor.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2 - 21

MJFCIFSS
Index
2.5.2 Arrangement of signs
Fig. 2-1 Arrangement of signage on the machine

3 Notice external start 7 Warning sign danger zone

5 Notice Latch points 11 Prohibition Sign
2 - 22 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 2-2 Arrangement of signs on the machine
11 Warning sign engine shut down 28 Lubrication chart

20 Sign control symbols 29 Notice latching and lifting points
21 Warning sign attachment 30 ID tag hydraulic excavator

22 Notice accident prevention 31 Notice safety belt
27 Notice safety lever
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2 - 23

MJFCIFSS
Index
2.5.3 Explanation of signs
Plate 3: External start

The information in the operating instructions must be carefully noted when starting
externally.
Plate 5: Lashing point

– Indicates the machine’s lashing points.
Plate 7: Obstruction
– It is forbidden to stand in the danger zone.
Plate 11: Engine shut down

The engine bonnet may only be opened when the engine is switched off.
Plate 20: Information about control symbols

Schematic representation of the correlation between the main controls in the cab and
the induced actions for the operation of the excavator.
Plate 21: Equipment

Work equipment reaches as far as the cab! Caution – work equipment retracted.
2 - 24 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Plate 22: Accident prevention

The accident prevention regulations given in the operating instructions must be care-
fully noted when operating the machine.
Plate 27: Safety lever

Pull safety lever up fully before leaving the operator’s seat.
Plate 28: Lubrication chart

Displays the relevant capacities and the change intervals, grease quality, fill and lu-
brication positions.
Plate 29: Latch points and lifting points

Indicates the latch points and the stopping points for the lifting on the hydraulic ex-
cavator.
Plate 30: Typeplate LFR (Liebherr France) "CE"

This typeplate displays the following information:
– Product identification number
– Type
– Construction year
– Nominal engine power
– Max. speed
– Operating mass
Plate 30: Typeplate LFR (Liebherr France)
This typeplate displays the following information:

– Product identification number
– Type
– Construction year
– Nominal engine power
– Max. speed
– Operating mass
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 2 - 25

MJFCIFSS
Index
Plate 31: Safety belt

The safety belt must be fastened before starting the machine..
2 - 26 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Operating Manual Control and operation
Operating and control elements
3 Control and operation
3.1 Operating and control elements
3.1.1 Overview of the operator’s standing position

Fig. 3-1 Operator’s standing position
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3-1

MJFCIFSS
Index
Control and operation Operating Manual
1 Safety lever - servo control H61 Monitoring system / indicator S57Switch for swing brake control
3 Right joystick light "WARNING" S71Swit. / eng. RPM cont. in manu
4 Left joystick H62 Monitoring system / indicator S73Swit. / saf. mode of servo circ.
5 Pedal for left travel gear light "PROTECTION" S82Rot. swit. /fault cod. INC - DEC
6 Pedal for right travel gear P5 Hourmeter S84-1Push button / swing ring teeth
7 Attach. or special attach. control* R6 Engine RPM adjust. +/- Manu lubrication
8 Air conditioner vent S1 Ignition key S84-2Safety swit. / central lubricat.
9 Uppercarriage lock S2 Switching unit S136Diagnostic switch
15 Control units - add. attachments* S4 Horn (NA+a) S218Cab roof window wiper and
17 Control unit - air conditioner S5 Push but. for rot. device*, or washer
A3 Radio* horn, or float posit. boom (NA) U15Control unit / central lubricat.
H1 Monitoring display S6 Push but. for float posit. boom or
H10 Buzzer rotating device (NA) * Optional equipment
H60 Engine monitoring system / indi- S55Switch for lift. magnet*, cont. (a) Only if rotating device installed
cator light "STOP" commut. between add. mov.* (NA) Location only for North America
Fig. 3-2 Operator’s standing position, seen from the operator’s point of view
3-2 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
3 Right joystick S1 Ignition switch

4 Left joystick S2 Keyboard
E8 Cigarette lighter S5 Push button for rotating device*, or horn, or float position boom (NA)
H1 Monitoring screen S6 Push button for float position boom or rotating device (NA)
* Optional equipment
(NA) Location only for North America
3.1.2 Arrangement of joystick
Fig. 3-3 Joystick, right (3) and left (4)
Standard control
The left joystick (4) controls the stick and slewing movements.
– Direction of movement a and b: Stick is drawn in or out.
– Direction of movement c and d: Uppercarriage is rotated to the left or to the right.
The right joystick (3) controls the boom or bucket and grab movements.
– Direction of movement e and f: Bucket will be tilted up or down, grab will close or
open.
– Direction of movement g and h: Boom will be raised or lowered.
Note !
From delivery, the machine is equipped with the standard control system corre-
ponding to the norm ISO. Nevertheless, the machine can be equipped with a com-
mutation circuit allowing the use of a special control system (for example
LIEBHERR control system).
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3-3

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.1.3 Keyboard
Fig. 3-4 Excavator keyboard
3-4 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
S10 - Floodlight / Equipment headlight

 Press the switch.
 Driving light is activated.
 LED 1 in the switch illuminates.
 Press switch again.
 Driving light is deactivated.
 LED 1 in the switch goes out.
 Equipment headlight is activated.
 Driving light and equipment headlight are switched on.
 LEDs 1 and 2 in the switch illuminate.
 Driving light and equipment headlight are switched off.
 LEDs 1 and 2 in the switch go out.
S11 – Windshield washer installation
 Press and hold button.
 Washing water will be sprayed onto the windscreen through the outlet nozzles.
 The windscreen washer runs continuously.
 Release the button.
 Washing water will be stopped.
 Windscreen washer will run continuously for approx. another 3 seconds.
S14 – Windscreen washer
 Press switch.
 Intermittent setting is activated.
 LED I in the switch illuminates.
 Continuous operation is activated.
 LED C in the switch illuminates.
 LED I in the switch goes out.
 Windscreen washer is switched off.
 LED C in the switch goes out.
S17 – Swing gear brake
 Press switch.
 Swing gear brake is engaged.
 Uppercarriage is locked.
 LED in the switch illuminates.
 Swing gear brake is released.
 LED in the switch goes out.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3-5

MJFCIFSS
Index
S18 – Overload warning device (optional extra)

 Press switch.
 Overload warning device is activated.
 Overload warning device is deactivated.
 No overload warning device is built in.
 Press switch.
 The symbol for "No overload warning device is present" appears on the mon-
itoring screen.

 The symbol for "No overload warning device is present" goes out.
 LED in the button goes out.
S19 – Rotating device (grapple, ...)
An additional hydraulic circuit for rotating device operation is necessary to drive
some specific equipments (such as rotating grapple, rotating bucket, rotating stick,
quick change coupling, ...).
The push button S19 turns on and off the control circuit of these specific equipments.
 If S19 turned on,
 the specific equipments can be actuated using the push buttons S5 on top of
the left joystick handle.
 When no rotating device is operated, the button S19 must be turned off.
 The button S19 is operative only if the safety lever is pushed down.
S20 – Low idle automatic
The push button S20 also serves to adjust the time lag between the return to neutral
of all joysticks and pedals and the automatic reduction to low idle of the engine RPM.
The adjustment is performed similar to the one described above for the windshield
wiper pause time via button S14.
 Press switch.
 The function "low idle automatic" is turned on.
 The function "low idle automatic" is turned off.
S21 - Travel speed increase (not used)
3-6 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
S22 - Auxiliary floodlights (optional installation)

 Additional headlight is switched on.
 LED in switch illuminates.
 Additional headlight is switched off.
S36 – Cold starting aid (Startpilot)
The push button S36 controls the cold start system.
 An ether based starting fluid is sprayed into the air inlet manifold of the Diesel
engine.
 At the same time, the control light inside the push button will light up.
The cold start system cannot be actuated if the engine is running or at operating tem-
perature
S41 – Rotating beacon (optional installation)
 Press switch.
 Rotating beacon is switched on.
 Rotating beacon is switched off.
S56– Pressure increase
 Press switch.
 The light diode in the button is on.
 The forces on the working attachment are increased,
 and the movements of the machine become slow at the same time (load lifting
operation, ...).
S85 – Grapple operation
This button must be turned on each time when a grapple is operated.
S86– Mode selection, speed adjustment

Four different modes can be selected by pressing the switch. The currently active
mode will be displayed under the letter on the LED.
– L: LIFT mode (speed level 5)
– F: FINE mode (speed level 10)
– E: ECO mode (speed level 8)
– P: POWER mode (speed level 10)
P4– Engine speed display
The speed range of the diesel engine is displayed in 10 levels.
S228 – Increase speed

 Press switch.
 Speed will be increased by one level.
 A second LED to the right illuminates in display P4.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3-7

MJFCIFSS
Index
S229 – Decrease speed

 Press switch.
 Speed will be decreased by one level.
 A second LED from the right goes out in display P4.
S354– Parking brakes
Depressing this button will successively apply and release the mechanical parking
brakes in the travel gear.
When the light diode 1 of the button is on, the brakes are applied.
3.1.4 Monitoring display
Fig. 3-5 Monitoring display

3-8 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
A Analog indicator H24 No function

B Check display P2 Coolant temperature display
C Main screen P2.1 Coolant temperature display red
area
D Menu control, screen P3 Fuel level display
H2 Indicator light, engine oil pressure P3.1 Fuel level display red area
H12 Indicator light, battery S349 Back button
H19 No function S350 Down button
H20 No function S351 Up button
H23 No function S352 Menu button
Area A: Diesel engine monitoring
P2 –Diesel engine coolant temperature display

The display must be in the green area when operating the machine.
In the event of overheating (over 98 ºC = 204°F), the red LEDs P2.1 at the end of
indicator P2 will flash.
The buzzer in the cab also sounds.
When this Indicator light illuminates, the error will be saved as error code E 503.
 The red indicator protection H62 on the control board will light up.
 The Quantum system will cause an engine shutdown.
 Find and rectify the cause of the problem.
P3 – Fuel level display
The LED indicator lights show the fuel level. When the both red light P3.1 light up,
about 10% to 20% fuel are left in the tank as reserves.
Area B :Indicator lights
H2 –Indicator light, low engine oil pressure

The Indicator light illuminates if the engine oil pressure drops below a given value
when the machine is operating.
The buzzer in the cab also sounds.
When this Indicator light illuminates, the error will be saved as error code E 501.
 The red indicator protection H62 on the control board will light up.
 The Quantum system will cause an engine shutdown.
 Find and rectify the cause of the problem.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3-9

MJFCIFSS
Index
H12 –Indicator light, battery charge

The Indicator light illuminates if the ignition key is placed in the contact position.
The Indicator light goes out as soon as the engine is started.
When the machine is operating, this Indicator light illuminates if the V-belt alternators
or the electrical charging system are defective.
 Bring the engine to a low idle immediately.
 Allow the engine to idle for approximately 5 seconds.
 Switch off the engine.
 Rectify the error.
H19 – No function
H20 –No function
H23 – No function
H24 – No function
Area D: Menu control for screen
Fig. 3-6 Screen menu control
The screen can be operated using the following 4 buttons:

– S349: Back button
– S350: Down button
– S351: Up button
– S352: Menu* button
* = Change from main to submenus
These buttons can be used to jump from the operator’s menu to the submenus or to
move from page to page.
Area C: Screen
To change the screen contrast:

 Press button Menu and arrow button Up (higher contrast) or Down (lower con-
trast) simultaneously.
 The value set will be saved.
To alter the brightness of the main screen:

 Press button Back and arrow button Up (brighter) or Down (darker) simultane-
ously.
3 - 10 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
 The value set will be saved.
Note!
A light sensor built in to the top left of the monitoring screen controls the illumination
on the main screen, dependent on the brightness of the environment. Tracking is
carried out using the buttons and originating from the basic setting. Illumination will
be automatically reduced in conditions of low environmental brightness.
To change the brightness and the contrast setting to the works setting:
 Turn off the ignition.
 Press and hold the Up and Down buttons simultaneously.
 Turn on the ignition again.
 Release the buttons once the automatic check is completed.
3.1.5 Main screen

The main screen appears when the machine has been switched on and remains on
display until the screen is changed over to the menu selection screen using the Menu
button.
Fig. 3-7 Main screen
EC Cable error display SY Symbol, clock

INF Information TI Hourmeter, current tool (Tool Control)
Main screen design
SY field
The upper field of the monitor shows on the one hand warning and indicator symbols,
on the other hand a clock. Should more than two symbols be shown, so the clock is
not displayed any more and up to four symbols can be shown at the same time in the
field SY.
If more than 4 symbols must be shown, then every 10 seconds, the symbols move
to the left by one symbol. (see chapter , "Warning symbols in the SY field" on page
12).
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 11

MJFCIFSS
Index
EC field
The EC window displays the error codes for electrical faults which occur in the exca-
vator's electronics system (line errors, sensor errors etc.). A maximum of 7 error
codes are displayed simultaneously. If there are more than these 7 errors present,
an arrow which points to where the other error codes are located will be displayed
next to the error code window.
 Press the Up or Down button.
 The error code window will be shifted in the direction selected in the error code
list.
INF field
The INF field displays information temporarily, in both text and graphic form.
If more than 3 symbols are to be displayed, the symbols will shift one symbol to the
left approx. every 10 seconds.
The information is displayed in graphic or text form and indicates specific operating
states on the machine. (see chapter , "Information symbols in the INF field" on page
14).
TI field
The machine operating hours and the daily operating hours counter are displayed
bottom right in this field. During the start-up phase, the operator will be alerted about
a possible up-coming service interval, by a graphic symbol displayed instead of the
machine hour-meter.
The symbol ® is displayed when an external flow limitation (function "set option") is
activated (see "Status of hydraulic pumps and electrical inputs and outputs menu" on
page 20).
The symbol "" appears when no external flow limitation is activated. But an internal
flow limitation (travel, swing,...) may be actived.
After having selected a tool (see chapter , "Menu "Set option"" on page 17), the name
of the tool is displayed (for example HM200).
Menu navigation in the event of an error display

If an error is recognized as “new” in the SY field, the user is returned to the main
screen. The relevant error display is activated.
Depending on the error (level of urgency), the buzzer will sound either continuously
or in short consecutive bursts. This symbol will be displayed in the INF field.
Danger!
If the error displayed is not rectified immediately, this could lead to persons sustain-
ing injury or the machine being damaged.
 Rectify / have the error rectified immediately.
 To switch off the buzzer, press the Back button.

 The error will be acknowledged and stored.
Warning symbols in the SY field

Each of the symbols which follow will be assigned an error code in the form “E 5xx”.
Each error which occurs will be stored via the relevant error code.
3 - 12 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
E 502–Coolant low
This symbol appears if the coolant level drops below the water sensor level.
The buzzer sounds simultaneously.
 Switch the engine off as quickly as possible.
 Localise the leak and carry out repairs.
Caution!
This monitoring device acts as an increased level of security in case of larger
amounts of water loss (e.g. hose rupture). It does not relieve the operator or mainte-
nance personnel from the responsibility of regularly checking the coolant level in the
equalizing reservoir.
E 503 –Coolant overheat - Warning stage
This symbol appears simultaneously with the P2 coolant temperature display if the
coolant temperature exceeds 100°C during at least 3 seconds. The buzzer sounds
simultaneously and the engine power is reduced.
E 504–Hydraulic oil level low
This symbol appears if the oil level in the hydraulic tank drops below the minimum
level.
The buzzer sounds simultaneously.
 Find the leak and carry out repairs.
 Depressurize the hydraulic tank.
 Only refill the hydraulic oil using the return-line filter.
E 505 –Hydraulic oil overheat
This symbol appears if the hydraulic oil temperature in the tank exceeds 99 °C.
 Localise and rectify the error (radiator dirty etc.).
E 506 – Splitterbox oil overheat
This symbol appears if the oil temperature in the splitterbox exceeds 100 °C.
 Localise and rectify the error.
E 511 – Over voltage for the BBT

This symbol appears if the operating voltage for the BBT exceeds 30 volts for at least
0.5 seconds.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 13

MJFCIFSS
Index
Information symbols in the INF field
Preheating on
This symbol appears while preheating is taking place.
Preheating off
Preheating will stop automatically after about 20 seconds and the symbol Preheat
off appears for approx. 2 seconds on the main screen.
Manual diesel speed adjustment
This symbol appears if toggle switch S71 for manual speed adjustment is switched
to the Manu position.
Service due
This symbol appears if a service interval is due.
 Switch on the ignition.
 The service interval to be carried out will be displayed for approx. 10 seconds
in place of the overall operating hours.
Acknowledge error
This symbol appears if a machine error (E5xx) has occurred and the buzzer sounds
simultaneously.
Parking brake and swing gear brake operation changed.
This symbol appears if switch S73 is in the emergency position.
“Increased care required” note: Operation changed

Servo control operation changed

Overload warning device (optional extra)

This symbol appears if the maximum permitted load capacity of the machine has
been reached.
No overload warning device present
This symbol appears if switch S18 (overload warning device) is operated, but either
no overload warning device is present on the machine or the switch is not cleared.
3 - 14 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Getting information from the operator’s menu on the main

screen
Main screen menu selection
Fig. 3-8 Main screen
 To change to the operator’s menu, the main screen must be visible.

 Press the Menu button on the main screen.
 The list of accessible menus is displayed.
Fig. 3-9 Menu selection in the operator’s menu.
To select the operator’s menu:

 Press arrow key Down or Up.
 The following or previous operator’s menu will be displayed on screen with a
black background.
 The selected menu is displayed with a black background, the Reset daily oper-
ating hours menu is used here as an example.
 Press the Menu button again.
 The sub-menu for the function selected is displayed.
 Press the Back button again.
 The sub-menu will be aborted.
Symbol Description
Reset daily operating hours counter
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 15

MJFCIFSS
Index
Symbol Description
Confirm service interval
Select flow and pressure limitation relating to mounted tool

(e.g. hammer)
Operating hours and device data
Status of hydraulic pumps and electrical inputs and outputs
Recorded and stored errors
Clock
Tab. 3-1 Overview of menu options
Reset daily operating hours counter menu

The daily operating hours counter can be reset to 0 using this menu.
Fig. 3-10 Resetting the daily operating hours counter
 Press the Up arrow key.

 The OK which is not crossed out will be displayed with a black background.
 Press the Menu* button.
 The operating hours will be reset to 0.
 The arrow key symbols Up and Down and the Menu symbol will no longer be
displayed.
To exit the menu:

 Press the Back button.
Confirm service interval menu

This menu is used for information on service intervals and to confirm service work
which has been carried out.
3 - 16 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-11 Service intervals menu
The operating hours of the next service interval (in this example, “500 Hrs”) and the
current operating hours (“478 Hrs”) are displayed in the menu.
A pending service interval can be confirmed a maximum of 50 operating hours before
the service interval is due.
When this time period has been reached a query will appear to ask whether the serv-
ice work has been carried out.
 Service work carried out.
 Press the Up arrow key.
 The OK which is not crossed out will be displayed with a black background.
 Press the Menu button.
 The current operating hour will be confirmed as the last service interval carried
out.
 Service work not carried out.
The sub-menu will be aborted.
Menu "Set option"

Allocation of flow and pressure limitation options to external input I1
In this menu, the user can choose between predefined options. For each option a
pressure limitation and a flow limitation is assigned. When an option is chosen, the
limitation values assigned to this option are effective as soon as the command of the
optional tool is actuated (actuation of the foot pedal for hammer or grapple for exam-
ple).
A
Danger!
A wrong option can cause damage to the tool (for example: hydraulic hammer) or
restrict its capacity (for example: milling tool)
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 17

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-12 Menu "Set option"
EV1 = Oil flow limitation valve 1 EV2 = Oil flow limitation valve 2
EV6 = Pressure limitation valve Quota = not used
The black field represents the active option.

 Press the Up or Down arrow key.
 A different, predefined option displayed with the arrow (1-10) can be assigned
(e g. when work equipment is changed).
 The selection is confirmed. The active option field is black (in this example Op-
tion 1 "HM2000").
To exit the menu:

 In the main screen the name of the chosen option(HM200) is displayed.
 The tool will be supplied with the reduced pressure and the reduced flow pre-
defined for the option 1.
Fig. 3-13 Main screen, The chosen option is displayed
1 Chosen option (tool) 2 The symbol "R" is displayed when

the option tool is used
3 - 18 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Note!
The standard name of the option is "Option 1", "Option 2"...
Liebherr or its customer department can assigned a concrete name to the each op-
tion, for example "HM2000" or "Grapple".
Operating hours menu

Pages 1 to 3 provide an overview of the operating hours of individual units, process-
es and operating types.
Fig. 3-14 Engine service life menu (example)
Page 1 provides the service life in hours for:

– Diesel engine in P mode
– Diesel engine in E mode
– Diesel engine in F mode
– Diesel engine in L mode
– Diesel engine at maximum RPM H
– Diesel engine in low idle L
– Diesel engine operating in manual, Manu speed adjustment
Fig. 3-15 Service life for travelling motion menu

 Page 2 is displayed.
– Equipment movements using the joystick
– Travelling motion using the accelerator pedal in crawling and fast modes
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 19

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Swing movements of the swing gear.

– Additional attached equipment operated via the foot pedals
Fig. 3-16 Technical data

The technical data menu, page 4, provides information on:
– The model of the excavator
– "typ" : the type of the excavator
– "serie" : the serial number of the excavator
– "ver" : the installed Software-Versions for, respectively, the monitoring display,
the control unit BBT, the pump regulator BSt, and, on the second line, the installed
version of the Diesel engine control circuit „PLD“ and also the SPF nb. (specifica-
tion number) of this circuit.
– "nom" : not used
– "volt" : indication for the momentary operating voltage.
- "hours" : operating hours for operation with the input X2.8 activated (not used),
operation with the input X2.14 activated (not used) and operation of the Diesel
engine with standard power curve (maximum power).
To exit the menu:

Status of hydraulic pumps and electrical inputs and outputs menu

Pages 1 to 3 provide information on the operating position of the hydraulic pumps.
Fig. 3-17 Flow and pressure limitation menu
3 - 20 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-18 Main screen when an external limitation is active
The page 1/5 displays the active option and the percentage of the pressure and flow
limitation due to the activation of this option. The bar chart contains the current
value, which supplies the regulation valves. The flow of each pump can be
independently regulated with the solenoid valves EV1, EV2 and EV3. The valve
EV6 regulates the work pressure.
– On the left picture, an external limitation (Hardware input I1, option1) is activated
(see Fig. 3-17 on page 20). The current supplying the solenoid valves is limited
at 55% of its maximal value. When an external limitation is activated, the symbol
"R" is displayed in the TI field of the main screen, (see Fig. 3-18 on page 21).
– On the right picture, an internal limitation (Pressure increase ) and an exter-

nal limitation (Hardware input I1, option1) are simultaneously activated. When
several flow limitations are activated at the same time, the one with the smallest
value is decisive for the hydraulic pump. In this case, the symbol "R" is displayed
in TI field of the main screen. If just internal limitation are activated, the symbol
"R" will be changed in "ò".
Note!
An external limitation is activated as soon as the option pedal is actuated.
There are three types of internal limitations:
– The internal limitation M1 is activated when travelling.
– The internal limitation M2 is activated when the pressure increase is actuated
(button S56 on the control unit).
– The internal limitation M3 is activated when using the trapp.
Fig. 3-19 LR magnet and fan speed current values menu
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 21

MJFCIFSS
Index

The current power of the LR magnet (current value for power setting) is displayed on
page 2.
The current power of proportional valve EV5 for fan speed control at the hydrostatic
fan drive is displayed on page 3.
Fig. 3-20 Electrical inputs

Pages 4 and 5 provide an overview of the status of different electrical inputs.
A“ ” means "Input not active".
A“ ”means "Input active".
An “NC” beneath the terminal designation means that the software for the relevant
input has been deactivated.
M4 / Time (and B19 / Time) on the last line of pages 4 / 5 refers to the delay times
set for the windscreen’s intermittent switching and to automatic idling.
Fig. 3-21 Electrical inputs

3 - 22 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
The screen 7/7 gives information about the components of the PLD control system
of the Diesel engine :
Input X2/13 refers to operation of the Diesel engine with standard power curve.
Input X2/15 refers to external commutation of hydraulic power.
PWRred refers to power reduction of the Diesel engine.
To exit the menu:

Error menu (operating errors and electrical system errors)
Fig. 3-22 Recorded errors menu
There are 3 selection options in this menu:

– By selecting list Exxx, machine errors recorded by the sensors are listed.
– By selecting list E-elec, all main screen cable errors stored when operating are
listed.
– By selecting list S-Exxx, all errors which appeared when the service connector
was connected are listed.
To select the desired error type:

 Press the Down or Up arrow key.
 The following or preceding error type will be displayed with a black back-
ground.
 The sub-menu on a black background will be displayed.
 If more than 6 error codes are present, arrow key Down or Up can be used to
scroll to the next page.
Machine error list Exxx:

Fig. 3-23 Error list (Fig. left) and Error occurrence (Fig. right) menu
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 23

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Select list Exxx.

 The first page of the sub-menu appears.
All errors and their error codes are listed on the first page.
 Use the Down or Up arrow key to select the error code desired.
 The second page of the sub-menu appears.
Operating hours and the duration of the first and last ten occurrences of the error se-
lected will be listed on the second page.
 The first page of the sub-menu appears.
 Press the Back button again to select another error type or press the Down or Up
arrow key to select a new error code.
s*: Error was indicated by a buzzer and was acknowledged using the Back button.
The duration is given in seconds.
m*: Error was indicated by a buzzer and was acknowledged using the Back button.
The duration is given in minutes.
Note!
Only operating errors with an error code E 5xx will be displayed in the list Exxx
menu.
Cable error list E-elec.:
Fig. 3-24 Occurrence of electrical error (Fig. left) and Error statistics (Fig. right)
 Select Cable error list E-elec.:

 The sub-menu appears.
All electrical errors and their error code are listed.
The “Test” column displays the number of errors which have occurred since the last
deletion.
The hour information "reset test at x Hrs" (e g. 12 Hrs) indicates the operating hour
in which the "Test" column was deleted.
 A different error type may be selected.
3 - 24 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
The access and the outfit of the cab
Other errors list S-Exxx:
Fig. 3-25 Call up service operation error list menu
No information will be displayed in this menu if the service connector is not connect-
ed.
Set time menu
Fig. 3-26 Clock setting
 After selection of the function the digit completely right is inversely displayed.
 Press key UP or DOWN to adjust the selected digit.
 Press MENU key to select the next digit.
 Press the Enter key to store the set number.
 on screen appears shortly to confirm "update xx: xx".
3.2 The access and the outfit of the cab
Safely getting up
to install yourself at the operator’s seat.

– When getting up or down, position the machine on even, horizontal ground. The
upper structure should be positioned with the undercarriage in such a way that
the steps and ladders are aligned with each other.
– Ensure that steps, ladders and hand-rails (grips) are in good condition. In partic-
ular, you should ensure that they are free of dirt, oil, ice and snow.
NOTE: To ensure that the doors open properly in all weather conditions, the door
seals must be dusted with talc or silicon at least every two months or more often
if required. The door hinges and locks should be greased regularly.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 25

MJFCIFSS
Index
– If you are able to reach the door handle with your free hand, open the doors be-
fore you climb any higher. External influences, such as wind, can make it more
difficult to open doors. Because of this, always use your hand for control when
opening doors. Ensure that the door is latched open to prevent it slamming open
and shut.
– In case of bad weather conditions, be particulary vigilant to realise the climbing
and descent from the cab with the best safety conditions, and do or give the in-
stuctions to the execution of prior preparations to be accomplished, as enunciated
above, in order to displace yourself safely.
– Be particulary vigilant with those prerequisites conditions.
– For cab with a side door:
• Now continue to climb up, still using the three-point support and sit down in the
operator’s seat as soon as you enter the cab.
• Fasten the safety belt (if available), unlock the door, using the planned lever,
and close it immediately using the door handle, before tilting down the safety
lever, and start the machine.
• If you wish to work with the door open, it is necessary to fasten your safety belt.
If unavailable, let it be instaled before working with the door open.
– For cab with a rear door:
• Now continue to climb up, still using the three-point support and close the door
as soon as you enter the cab.
• Sit down in the operator’s seat and fasten the safety belt (if available) before tilt-
ing down the safety lever, and start the machine.
Safely getting down

to instal yourself.
– Stop the machine on level, horizontal ground. The upper structure should be po-
sitioned with the undercarriage in such a way that the steps and ladders are
aligned with each other.
– Open and lock the door. Be sure of it’s locking. Take care of weather conditions !
Unfasten the safety belt.
– Position yourself with your face toward the machine when getting out and use
three-point support, i.e. two hands and one foot or two feet and one hand must
always be in contact with the access system at the same time. Climb down until
you can close the doors safely. Always use your hand for control when closing the
doors. Lock the door.
– Now climb down to the ground.
3 - 26 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.2.1 Entering or leaving the cab
Climbing up
Caution!
Entering or leaving the cab incorrectly could lead to injury.
 Ensure that the safety lever is always in its highest position when entering or
leaving the cab.
 Always use the handholds provided for the purpose when entering or leaving the
machine.
 Do not hold onto the controls to steady yourself.
 Never jump from the machine.
Cab:
Fig. 3-27 Climb up using the handholds
Getting in
Fig. 3-28 Door - exterior
1 Door handle 2 Latch 11 Door lock
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 27

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Press the door lock 11 on the door handle 1 and open the door.
 If the door is to remain open during operations, swing the door back 180° and se-
cure in the latch 2.
 Climb in with your face towards the machine and sit in the operator’s seat.
 Adjust the seat and steering column if necessary.
Getting out
Fig. 3-29 Door - interior
3 Door handle on door lock 4 Lever for the latch
 Switch off the machine and push the safety lever up.
 Push the door handle 3 on the lock down.
 Open the door fully and secure it in the latch 2.
 Climb out with your face towards the machine.
To release the door latch:

 The door is secured in latch 2.
 Move the lever 4 next to the cab frame outwards.
 The door is now unlocked.
 Close the door.
3.2.2 Height adjustable cab (optional extra)

Various versions of height adjustable cab are available, and their controls are de-
scribed hereafter.
3.2.3 Height and inclination adjustable cab (optional extra)

A hydraulically adjustable cab is an auxiliary device enabling the cab to be variably
height and/or inclination adjusted.
3 - 28 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Danger!
When the cab is raised, the route the machine will be travelling must be even, free
of all obstructions and must not have a gradient that could affect the stability of the
machine.
 Only adjust the cab when the machine is stationary.
 Ensure that no persons are within the machine’s danger area when carrying out
the cab adjustment.
Danger!
The safety belt is designed to protect the operator.
 Before starting the machine, always put on the safety belt.
 Ensure that the safety belt is not twisted when it is secured.
 To ensure your safety, check the condition, function and fastening of the belt
regularly and replace any damaged parts without delay.
Adjusting the height of the cab

The height of the cab is controlled using the switches S200, S201 and S78 in the rear
left control panel.
Fig. 3-30 Adjusting the height of the cab
 The machine is ready to operate.

 The safety lever is pushed up.
 The engine is running.
To raise the cab:

 Press and hold switch S200.
 The cab travels upwards as long as switch S200 is being pressed.
To lower the cab:

 The cab travels downwards as long as switch S201 is being pressed.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 29

MJFCIFSS
Index
Emergency operations
If the height adjustable system of the cab is broken-down due to a fault in the diesel
engine or another defect, there is an emergency cab lowering function.
There are two ways to lower the cab in an emergency:
Emergency cab lowering inside the cab:

Emergency cab lowering from outside the cab:
Fig. 3-31 Emergency cab lowering button in the battery room.
It is possible to lower the cab using an emergency lowering button on the outside of
the machine.
Danger!
Danger of crushing.
 Ensure that no one is standing in the vicinity of the lifting frame when lowering
the cab from the outside in an emergency.
Ensure that you do not place any part of the body in the area of the moving parts
when lowering the cab in an emergency.
 Open the rear left side door (battery room).

 Press and hold emergency lowering button S79.
Adjusting the inclination of the cab

With a cab tiltable to 30° for demolition machines (3), the buttons S200, S201, S78
3 - 30 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
and S79 allow to tilt the cab to the rear or to the front.
Fig. 3-32 Adjusting the inclination of the cab
Repair and maintenance
Danger!
Repair and maintenance work on the cab, lifting frame or on the related hydraulics
system should be carried out – as far as possible – with the cab lowered.
 For repair and maintenance work which can only be carried out when the cab is
raised, the cab should be supported by equipment which is suitable for this pur-
pose.
3.2.4 Cab adjustable hydraulically on slide rails (optional extra)

A cab adjustable hydraulically on slide rails is an auxiliary device enabling the cab to
be variably height adjusted.
Danger!
When the cab is raised, the route the machine will be travelling must be even, free
of all obstructions and must not have a gradient that could affect the stability of the
machine.
 Only adjust the cab when the machine is stationary.
 Ensure that no persons are within the machine’s danger area when carrying out
the cab adjustment.
Danger!
 Before starting the machine, always put on the safety belt.
 Ensure that the safety belt is not twisted when it is secured.
Danger!
The operator must get in or out of the cab only when this one is in low position.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 31

MJFCIFSS
Index
Danger!
The option cab adjustable hydraulically on slide rails can be combined with the op-
tion tower elevation installation. If you have equally this option on your machine, be
sure that the uppercarriage will be aligned with the undercarriage when you stop
the machine.
So that the ladders of the uppercarriage will be aligned with the ladders of the un-
dercarriage, so the operator can go up or down of the machine without danger.
Adjusting the height of the cab

The height of the cab is controlled using the switches S200, S201 and S78 in the rear
left control panel.
Fig. 3-33 Adjusting the height of the cab
 The machine is ready to operate.

 The safety lever is pushed up.
 The engine is running.
To raise the cab:


 The cab travels upwards as long as switch S200 is being pressed.
To lower the cab:

3 - 32 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Emergency operations
If the height adjustable system of the cab is broken-down due to a fault in the diesel
engine or another defect, there is an emergency cab lowering function.
There are two ways to lower the cab in an emergency:
Emergency cab lowering inside the cab:

Emergency cab lowering from outside the cab:
Fig. 3-34 Emergency cab lowering button in the battery room.
It is possible to lower the cab using an emergency lowering button on the outside of
the machine.
Danger!
Danger of crushing.
 Ensure that no one is standing in the vicinity of the lifting frame when lowering
the cab from the outside in an emergency.
Ensure that you do not place any part of the body in the area of the moving parts
when lowering the cab in an emergency.
 Open the rear left side door (battery room).

 Press and hold emergency lowering button S79.
Repair and maintenance
Danger!
Repair and maintenance work on the cab, lifting frame or on the related hydraulics
system should be carried out – as far as possible – with the cab lowered.
 For repair and maintenance work which can only be carried out when the cab is
raised, the cab should be supported by equipment which is suitable for this pur-
pose.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 33

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.2.5 Safety lever
Fig. 3-35 Safety lever
For safety purposes, the left control panel is provided with a safety lever.
Caution!
The safety lever must always be pushed up into its highest position (see arrow)
when entering or exiting the cab.
When the safety lever is pushed up, the pilot control circuit is disconnected. This
means that:
– No work movements can be carried out when pilot control devices, e g. the joy-
stick or foot pedals, are operated.
– The slewing gear brake is locked (LED in switch S17 illuminates).
– It is not possible to release the slewing gear brake using switch S17.
When the safety lever is pushed (push up / push down) to its lowest position, the
slewing gear brake and the LED in switch S17 will return to their original states and
the pilot control devices will be active.
 Before the operator starts working, he must push the safety lever down into its
lowest position while seated in the operator’s seat.
3.2.6 Operator’s seat
Fig. 3-36 Standard operator’ seat (Fig. left) and air-cushioned (Fig. right, optional
extra)
3 - 34 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
1 Set horizontal, upper 4b Set seat inclination, 7 Set lumbar support

rear
2 Set horizontal, lower 5 Set seat springs 8 Seat heating
3 Adjust armrests 6 Set lumbar support 10 Set backrest
4a Set seat inclination,
front
The operator’s seat should be set up before starting the machine; this means that:
– The diesel engine may not be started.
– The safety lever must be pushed up.
This will avoid unexpected movement of the machine.
Setting the armrests
Fig. 3-37 Setting the armrests
 Turn the knurled head screw 3 on the armrest in direction a.

 The armrests incline upwards.
 Turn the knurled head screw 3 on the armrest in direction b.
 The armrests incline downwards.
Setting the seat and backrest

Fig. 3-38 Setting the seat and backrest
 Rear seat inclination: Pull lever 4a up, set the inclination and release the lever.
 Front seat inclination: Pull lever 4b up, set the inclination and release the lever.
 Backrest: Pull lever 10 up, set the inclination and release the lever.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 35

MJFCIFSS
Index
Setting the horizontal seat position
Fig. 3-39 Setting the horizontal
 Pull up the lever 1 to push the operator's seat in the horizontal direction.
 Pull up the lever 2 to push the operator's seat and control panels in the horizontal
direction.
Setting the seat springs
Fig. 3-40 Setting the seat springs
 Use the rotary knob 5 to set the seat springs to match the body weight.
3 - 36 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Options setting (optional extras)
Fig. 3-41 Switch bar on the air-cushioned operator’s seat
To set the vibration damping:

 Press button 5 (+ or -) and set the vibration system according to body weight.
To set the lumbar support:

 Press button 6 (+ or -) to inflate or deflate the lower lumbar chamber.
 Press button 7 (+ or -) to inflate or deflate the upper lumbar chamber.
To set the seat heating:

 Use switch 8 to switch the seat heating on or off.
The seat heating switches off automatically when the temperature set is reached.
Putting on / releasing the safety belt
Fig. 3-42 Safety belt
The safety belt is automatic. It is not necessary to adjust the length of the belt.
 Pull the belt and buckle 2 out of the roller mount 1.
 If pulled out of the roller mount sharply, the belt may lock.
 Push the buckle into the belt lock 3 until it fastens.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 37

MJFCIFSS
Index
Danger!
 Before starting the machine, always fasten the safety belt.
 Ensure that the safety belt is not twisted when it is fastened.
 To open lock 4, push down on the belt lock using your thumbs.
 The safety belt will slide automatically back into the roller mount 1.
Vibration damping
The seat complies with ISO 7096.
If the machine is used in accordance with regulations, the values of the vibration
damping transferred by the operator’s seat are less than or equal to the tested exci-
tation vibration for the relevant machine class in accordance with ISO 7096.
The values for vibration accelerations a zw , measured in accordance with ISO 2631-
1, therefore comply with the requirements for protection against whole body vibration
set out in EN 474-1 («acceleration» a zw between 0,5 and 2,5 ms-2).
3.2.7 Windscreen
Fig. 3-43 Locked positions of the windscreen
The windscreen can be locked in two positions.

– In the position a the windscreen is closed.
– In the position b the windscreen is fully opened (locked in place on the roof of the
cab)
Caution!
It is not allowed to work with the machine when the windscreen is in an intermediate
position!
To change the position of the windscreen

 Pull the lever 1 in and down to unlock the windscreen.
 Move the windscreen using the handle 2, secure it in one of the two positions a
or b and relock using the lever 1.
3 - 38 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.2.8 Sunshade
Fig. 3-44 Sunshades at windscreen and at cab roof
The cab is provided with two sunshades, located at the windscreen and at the cab
roof window.
Maneuvering the sunshade at the windscreen

 Using the strengthening tongue 1, pull the sunshade down to the desired position.
 Press the red button 2, the sunshade will roll itself up.
Maneuvering the sunshade at the cab roof

 Pull out the sunshade and secure it in the holders designed for the purpose.
 To retract the sunshade, take it out of the holders and let it roll up slowly.
3.2.9 Emergency exit – rear window

Fig. 3-45 Emergency exit – rear window
 In case of emergency, remove the rubber seal 2 from all around the rear window
by pulling the clip 1 on the inner side of the rear window. Thereafter push the win-
dow out.
Note !
For the machines equipped with a cab elevation, steps, ladders and hand-rails
(grips) are installed to secure the descent.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 39

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.2.10 Interior lighting
Fig. 3-46 Dome light for cab interior lighting
The dome light is controlled via the button 1.

 Push the button 1 to the right to switch on the light 2.
 Push the button 1 to the left.to switch on the spot 3.
 Push the button 1 into central position to switch the dome light off.
3.2.11 Fire extinguisher*

The interior of the cab of Your machine is fitted with fixing points allowing the mount-
ing of a fire extinguisher. These fixing points are on the right side wall of the cab, in
the front area for machinemodells up to R954C, in the rear corner for machine mod-
ells R964C and above.
Fig. 3-47 Possible locations for fixing the fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is mounted as an option; at delivery the machine is fitted with
only at customer’s wish.
3 - 40 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Note!
It is the responsibility of the owner of the machine to decide if it must be fitted with
a fire extinguisher or not, considering the operating conditions and the regulations
which apply in the country and at the point of use of the machine.
A kit for retrofit adaptation, suitable for the cab of Your machine, and comprising a
fire extinguisher and its mounting bracket can be ordered any time in Your LIEB-
HERR customer support service.
Caution!
If Your machine is fitted with a fire extinguisher:
 always comply with the operating guide on the body of the extinguisher,
 make sure, all the inspections of the fire extinguisher which are prescribed by
the regulations applicable to the operating place of the machine are accom-
plished.
3.2.12 Windscreen wiper
Windscreen wiper
When the ignition is switched on, pressing switch S14 will activate the windscreen
wiper.
 Press switch.
 Intermittent switching
 LED I in the switch illuminates.
 Continuous operation.
 LED C in the switch illuminates.
 LED I in the switch goes out.
 Windscreen wiper is switched off.
 LED C in the switch goes out.
Setting the interval time for the intermittent switching
The interval time can be set when the ignition is on by pressing switch S14.
 Press the switch until the windscreen wiper is switched off (LED I in switch goes
out)
 Press and hold switch.
 LED I in the switch flashes.
 Release the switch when the desired interval time has been reached.
 The interval time can be set between 2 and 10 seconds.
Windscreen washing system

When the ignition is switched on, pressing button S11 will activate the electric wind-
screen washing system.
 Press and hold button.
 Washing water will be sprayed onto the windscreen through the outlet nozzles.
 The windscreen washer runs continuously.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 41

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Release the button.

 Washing water will be stopped.
 Windscreen washer will run continuously for approx. another 3 seconds.
Windscreen washing fluid container
Fig. 3-48 Windscreen washing fluid container
The container for the windscreen washing fluid is located at the rear of the cab.
Once the cover (see arrow) has been opened, the container can be refilled with or-
dinary windscreen washing fluid.
Danger !
For the machines equipped with a cab elevation, fill the container with precaution.
Risk of tumble.
Respect the local rules and safety instructions for the works in altitude.
Volume: see lubricant chart
3 - 42 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.2.13 Lighting
Fig. 3-49 Arrangement of lighting
1 Rotating deck floodlights 4 Rotating beacon (optional extra)

2 Attachment floodlights 5 Floodlights on Counterweight
(optional extras)
3 Front roof floodlights (optional extra) 6 Roof floodlights, rear (optional extra)
Rotating deck and attachment floodlights

The rotating deck and attachment floodlights (1 & 2) are switched on by pressing
switch S10.
 Rotating deck floodlights are activated.
 Rotating deck floodlights are deactivated.
 LED 1 in the switch goes out.

 Attachment floodlights are activated.
 Rotating deck and attachment floodlights are switched on.
 LEDs 1 and 2 in the switch illuminate.
 Rotating deck and attachment floodlights are switched off.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 43

MJFCIFSS
Index
 LEDs 1 and 2 in the switch go out.
Additional headlight (optional extra)

Pressing switch S22 when the ignition is on switches on the additional floodlights (3
& 5).
 Additional floodlights are switched on.
 Additional floodlights are switched off.
Rotating beacon (optional extras)

Pressing switch S41 switches on the rotating beacon (4) when the ignition is on.
 Press switch.
 Rotating beacon flashes.
 Rotating beacon is switched off.
Roof floodlights, rear (optional extras)

Pressing switch S275 on the right control panel switches on the roof floodlights (6) at
the rear on the cab.
 Press switch.
 Rear floodlights on roof cab are switched on.
 Rear floodlights on roof cab are switched off.
3.2.14 Heating/air-conditioning system
Overview
The cab has a heating / air-conditioning system as standard. The heating / air-con-
ditioning system is used to heat, cool and ventilate the cab.
3 - 44 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-50 Air-conditioning system control device
Control buttons
1 – Air conditioning (cooling)
2 - Increase cab temperature
3 – Reduce cab temperature
4 – Control ON / OFF
5 – Evaporator fan speed – manual / automatic
6 – REHEAT function
7 – Heating – manual / automatic
8 – Fresh air / recirculated air
9 – Rear wall ventilation flap OPEN / SHUT
10 – Right control panel ventilation flap (2 (17)) OPEN / SHUT
11 – Windscreen footwell ventilation flap CENTRE / SHUT
12 – Windscreen footwell ventilation flap CENTRE / OPEN
Main screen displays
13 – Recirculated air
14 – REHEAT function
15 – Air conditioning (cooling)
16 – Rear wall ventilation flap OPEN
17 – Right control panel ventilation flap (2 (17)) OPEN
18 – Windscreen footwell ventilation flap CENTRE
19 – Windscreen footwell ventilation flap OPEN
20 – Automatic function
21 – Fan speed in manual operation bar
22 – Fan speed in manual operation symbol
23 – Heating in manual operation symbol
24 – Heating in manual operation bar
25 – Nominal value / error code

26 – Temperature (°)
If the control unit identifies an error, a flashing error number F1 – F5 will be displayed.
Note!
 In the event of an error occurring, please consult with the LIEBHERR customer
service.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 45

MJFCIFSS
Index
Switching on the control unit
Fig. 3-51 Switching on the control unit
 Switch on the unit using button 4.

 The software version will be displayed for approximately 12 seconds while the
control unit carries out an automatic check.
The heating and air-conditioning in the cab is operating. Heating performance and
fan speed will be controlled automatically if the AUTO (20) symbol is activated.
Setting the desired cab temperature
Fig. 3-52 Setting the desired cab temperature
The four figure segment display 25 displays the desired cab temperature.
 Use the button 2 to increase the temperature.
 Use the button 3 to reduce the temperature.
The temperature set will remain stored until the next change is made.
Switch on Air conditioning to cool the cab.
3 - 46 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Press button 7 to set the heating manually.

 The heating symbol will flash for 5 seconds.
 While the heating symbol is flashing, use button 2 or 3 to increase or reduce the
heating manually.
 Press button 7 to switch to automatic again.
Air-conditioning
Fig. 3-53 Air-conditioning
 Switch on the air-conditioning using button 1.

 The symbol 15 will be activated.
 The compressor will now be switched on by the control unit if required and
controls the heating and cooling unit’s speed automatically.
 To dehumidify the cab, switch on the air-conditioning system when heating the
cab.
 Press the REHEAT button 6.
 Symbol 14 is activated.
 In this case, switch on the air-conditioning unit until the windows are no longer
fogged.
After 10 minutes, the REHEAT function switches off automatically.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 47

MJFCIFSS
Index
Recirculated air and fresh air
Fig. 3-54 Recirculated air and fresh air
The heating and air-conditioning unit can be switched to recirculated or fresh air.
 Press button 8 to open / close the fresh air flap.
 Symbol 13 indicates that the fresh air flap is closed.
 Press button 5 to set the fan speed manually.
 The fan symbol will flash for 5 seconds.
 While the fan symbol is flashing, use button 2 or 3 (see Fig. 3-52) to increase or
reduce the fan speed manually.
 Press button 5 to reset the automatic function.
Adjustment of the air flow

Regulation of the air flow is carried out using buttons 9 - 12 (see Fig. 3-54) and using
rotating and lockable air vents.
3 - 48 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-55 Position of front air vents and vents on the rear cab wall
The air vents are located on the seat console 3 (19), on the right control panel 2 (17),
on the front window 4 (18) and on the cab rear wall 1 (16). The area that is open on
each ventilation flap is indicated with an arrow in the display.
To obtain optimal comfort:
 When heating, open the air vents in the footwell 3, the right control panel 2 and
possibly in the windscreen 4.
 When air-conditioning, open the air vents in the cab rear wall 1 and the right
control panel 2.
The best heating or cooling effect is achieved when using the recirculated air func-
tion.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 49

MJFCIFSS
Index
Setting the machine into operation
Note!
To prevent the starter motor and the battery from overloading, only switch on the
air-conditioning after starting the diesel engine.
 If the machine is used for a longer period of time without using the air-condition-
ing unit, operate the compressor every 2 weeks by pressing the REHEAT button
6 (see Fig. 3-53) .
Operating with independent heating (optional extra)
Fig. 3-56 Operating with independent heating
Note!
Independent heating can only be operated when the ignition is switched off.
It is not possible to carry out any manual settings in independent heating operation.
 Switch on the independent heating.

The independent heating will switch off automatically when the diesel engine is start-
ed.
3.3 Setting the machine into operation
Bringing the machine safely into service

– Carry out a careful inspection tour around the machine each time before starting
it.
– Ensure that no one, except an authorized person, is in the work and movement
area of the machine.
– Check the machine for loose bolts, cracks, wear, leakage and damage.
– Never attempt to operate a damaged machine.
– Ensure that any damage is immediately rectified.
– Ensure that all hoods and covers are closed, but that locks are unlocked, to facil-
itate the fight against fire in case of.
3 - 50 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Ensure that all warning signs are present.

– Keep windows and interior and exterior mirrors clean. Secure doors and windows
against unintended movement.
– Ensure that no one is working on or under the machine and warn personnel in the
vicinity of the machine that it is about to start by sounding the horn.
Adjusting the operator’s standing position

– Before starting the machine, adjust the seat, mirrors, armrests and operator’s
controls in such a way that you are able to work comfortably and safely.
– Acoustic insulation devices on the machine must be set to the insulation position
throughout operation.
Protection from vibration - seat adjusting

structions.
Utilisation in confined spaces

– Only operate combustion engines and fuel-operated heaters in adequately venti-
lated spaces. Before starting in closed areas, ensure adequate ventilation.
Follow the regulations which apply for the particular area of use.
Starting the machine safely

– Before starting, check all control lamps and instruments for correct function, place
all operator’s controls in Neutral and tilt the safety lever up.
– Before starting, sound the horn briefly to alert people in the vicinity of the machine.
– Only start the machine from the driver’s seat.
– In the absence of any other instructions, start the engine in accordance with the
regulations given in the operating instructions.
– Tilt the safety lever down and then test all display and checking devices.
– In enclosed spaces, only allow the engine to run when there is adequate ventila-
tion. If necessary, open doors and windows to ensure sufficient fresh air supplies.
– Bring the engine and hydraulic oil to operating temperature. Low oil temperatures
make the control unit react sluggishly.
– Check that the equipment is operating correctly.
– Move the machine carefully to an open area and then check the function of the
running and slewing gear brakes, the steering and the signaling and lighting de-
vices.
Stopping the machine safely

– Only stop the machine on level, firm ground.
– If the machine has to be stopped on an incline, chocks should be used to secure
it from rolling away.
– Before stopping the machine, each time it is possible, align the uppercarriage with
the undercarriage so that the sprockets locate at the back-end. This is the only
one position which enables a secured access to every maintenance locations on
the uppercarriage.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 51

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Use the stop bolts to secure the upper structure facing the undercarriage, if avail-
able.
– Lower the equipment and anchor the grab lightly in the ground.
– Position every control lever into neutral position and depress the parking and
slewing brakes.
– Stop the engine in accordance with the operating instructions and tilt the safety
lever up before leaving the cab.
– Lock the machine, included hoods and compartments, retire every keys and se-
cure the machine against unpermited use and vandalis.
3.3.1 Starting / stopping the machine
General information
Note!
When using the machine at a specific height above sea level and in connection with
certain outside temperatures, the performance and service life of the diesel engine
with turbocharging is decisively affected.
Under these conditions, there is also an increased risk of the coolant circuit and the
hydraulic oil overheating.
To avoid damaging CUMMINS diesel engines, the engine’s power must be reduced
when operating in the following environmental conditions (sea level and exterior tem-
perature):
– 3,000 m generally
– 2,700 m and exterior temperature up to 30 °C
Pay attention to both the coolant circuit and the hydraulic oil cooling simultaneously.
Activities before starting
Caution!
It is only possible to extinguish a source of fire if it is accessible.
 Before starting, unlock all locks on the panelling of the hydraulic excavator.
 In the event of fire, the doors can be opened immediately and the fire extin-
guished.
Arrangement of locks: see Maintenance chapter
Caution!
With the activities referred to below, a machine that is already warm from operating,
there is a risk of scalding or burning from hot coolant or oil.
 Please ensure that you read the information provided in the Maintenance chap-
ter on carrying out these activities.
Before starting the machine, the following activities should be carried out on a daily
basis:
– Check air filter for contamination.*
3 - 52 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Check the oil level in the engine*.

– Check the coolant level in the diesel engine*.
– Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank*.
– Drain the fuel system, if required*.
– If required, remove any ice and snow from the engine hood in the area of the cool-
ing and combustion air intake.
* For how to carry out the activities, see the Maintenance chapter.
Starting the diesel engine
Ignition key switching positions
Fig. 3-57 Ignition switch
0 Neutral 2 Preheating P Park position

1 Contact position 3 Start position
Switching on the electrical system
 The main battery switch must be in position A.

 Turn the ignition key to contact position 1.
 As soon as the ignition is switched on, an automatic check of the keypad and
the monitoring screen takes place.
Note!
If no automatic check of the keypad and monitoring screen is carried out when the
ignition key is in the contact position, check that the main battery switch is set to
“one”.
 Satisfy yourself that the display instruments are functioning perfectly when you
switch on the ignition.
 All control lamps must illuminate for a brief period with the exception of the
LED of switch S22 (auxiliary light).
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 53

MJFCIFSS
Index
 The LIEBHERR logo appears on the monitoring screen.
Service interval display
Fig. 3-58 Service interval request
After the automatic check, any service interval that may be due will be indicated by
a graphic symbol.
In place of the operating hours information, the number of hours relating to the serv-
ice interval required will now be displayed.
The service interval request will go out after approx. 8 seconds.
Starting the engine
Note!
Only operate the starter motor when the diesel engine is off.
 Operate the starter motor continuously for no longer than 10 seconds.
 If the engine does not start, turn the ignition key back to contact position 0, be-
fore restarting the engine.
 Wait at least 1 minute before trying to start the engine again.
Starting procedure when the exterior temperature is above 0 °C.

If the engine and batteries are in good condition, the engine can be started without
preheating.
 Turn the ignition key to start position 3.
 Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts.
 Control lamps H2, H12 and H24 must go out (H23 goes out after a short de-
lay).
 The buzzer will sound briefly when the engine starts until the engine oil pres-
sure builds up.
Starting procedure when the exterior temperature is below 0 °C.

Preheating improves the starting procedure of the diesel engine at low temperatures.
 Turn the ignition key to position 2.
 The symbol Preheating ON appears on screen.
 The symbol is displayed on the main screen for approx. 20 seconds.
 When the symbol Preheating END (2 seconds) appears, turn the ignition key to
start position 3.
3 - 54 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Release the ignition key as soon as the engine is running.
Engine afterignition
 Turn the ignition key to position 2 as soon as the engine is running after the start-
ing procedure.
 Symbol appears on the main screen.
 Release the ignition key.
Note!
Do not preheat an engine which is at operating temperature.
Starting procedure when the exterior temperature is below -18 °C.

For starting at temperatures below -18 °C, it is recommended to equip the machine
with the original LIEBHERR cold start aid (see Starting aids)
Fig. 3-59 Cold start aid
The cold start aid can be operated from the cab and replaces preheating.
External starting procedure
Caution!
Connecting old batteries or batteries which have been recharged several times to
charged batteries may result in increased gas formation in the discharged batteries.
Always wear safety glasses and protective gloves and avoid open flame and forma-
tion of sparks in the area close to the discharged batteries.
Use only battery cables with suitable diameter and proceed as follows to reduce to
a minimum the formation sparks.
 First connect one cable to the + terminal of the discharged battery and then to the
+ terminal of the charged (external) battery,

 next connect the second cable to the - terminal of the discharged battery and then
to the - terminal of the charged battery.
 Start the engine as described on previous page.
 Before removing the external starting cables, always bring to low idle the Diesel
engine of the excavator and, if applying, also the Diesel of the external machine.
 Then first disconnect the cable from the - terminal of the charged (external) bat-
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 55

MJFCIFSS
Index
tery and then from - terminal of the discharged battery,

 next disconnect the cable from the + terminal of the charged battery and then from
the + terminal of the discharged battery.
Engine shut down procedure

To shut down the engine, do not suddenly turn the engine off when the engine are
running at high idle.
 Reduce first the engine RPM to low idle via the arrow S229,
 and continue to run the engine for 3 - 5 minutes to lower temperature.
 Then turn the ignition key to "0" position to turn the engine off,
 remove the key.
Do not turn the starter while the engine is running, this could damage the starter and
the starter gear.
Engine shut down procedure with stop idle 5 min (option)

To shut down the engine, do not suddenly turn the engine off when the engine are
running at high idle.
 Reduce first the engine RPM to low idle via the arrow S229,
 Then turn the ignition key to "0" position to turn the engine off,
 remove the key.
 The engine does not stop immediately, it will first run at low idle for about 5 min-
utes (after running),
 and then be stopped automatically.
Do not turn the starter while the engine is running, this could damage the starter and
the starter gear.
Engine emergency shut down
Fig. 3-60 Emergency off switch
In case of an emergency, the engine can be shut down, during normal operation as
well during "after running",
 by pushing in either the emergency off switch 15 situated on the control desk, or
the one mounted below the counterweight.
3 - 56 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Caution!
The engine should be stopped this way only in emergencies. If the engine was
turned off in an emergency shut down, it is important to let the engine run at low idle
for a short time after restarting.
Speed adjustment and mode functions
Fig. 3-61 Speed adjustment and mode functions
The previously selected engine speed will be displayed on the LED chain P4. It is
divided into 10 speed levels.
 To adjust the engine speed, press arrow keys S228 or S229.
- or -
Press the mode switch S86.
Performance selection (adjustment) using the mode button

Four different modes can be selected by pressing switch S86.
– L: LIFT mode (speed level 5 – sensitive lifting of loads)
– F: FINE mode (speed level 10 – skimming work)
– E: ECO mode (speed level 8 – economical work)
– P: POWER mode (speed level 10)
Using the arrow keys to adjust speed
To increase the speed:

 Press switch S228.
 Speed will be increased by one level.

 A second LED to the right illuminates in the P4 display.
To reduce the speed:

 Speed will be decreased by one level.
 A second LED from the right goes out in display P4.
A flashing LED above switch S86 identifies an intermediate stage of the mode select-
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 57

MJFCIFSS
Index
ed.
The currently active mode will be displayed under the letter on the LED. The mode
selected will be saved when the engine is switched off and will be displayed by a
flashing LED above switch S86 the next time the engine is started.
The speed preselected after the diesel engine has been started will either be at level
1 (low idle on the diesel engine) or at level 3, if a warm-up phase is required for the
diesel engine.
 Press the mode switch S86.
 The mode selected will be used, with the corresponding speed and power.
 The appropriate LED will illuminate permanently.
In mode E (maximum torque) and P, the diesel engine works at maximum power. In
mode L and F, the hydraulic power is reduced.
Warm-up phase for diesel engine and hydraulic circuit
Diesel engine
With cold engine coolant (temperature below 20 °C), the speed is automatically set
at level 3.
This procedure lasts until the coolant has reached 20 °C, but for a maximum of
3 minutes.
 Increase the engine strain slowly until the second green LED (from left) illumi-
nates on display unit P2.
Note!
Idling for an extended period of time damages the engine.
 Switch off the diesel engine if the machine is not being used.
Hydraulic oil
The pump power is automatically limited when the hydraulic oil is cold (temperature
below 8 °C).
As soon the hydraulic oil temperature rises above 8 °C, the machine can attain full
power.
Notes after starting the engine
Danger!
Danger of suffocation.
 When operating in enclosed spaces, only run the engine in areas with sufficient
ventilation.
 Open doors and windows to ensure sufficient supplies of fresh air.
Caution!
 Bring the engine and hydraulic oil up to operating temperature. The controls op-
erate sluggishly at low oil temperatures.
 Move the machine carefully in an open space to test the function of the chassis
and slewing gear brakes.
 Check that the equipment is operating perfectly.
3 - 58 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Switching off the diesel engine
Caution!
The engine could be damaged.
 Do not switch off the engine suddenly from full throttle.
 First use arrow key S229 to set the engine speed to low idle.
 Only the LED on the furthest left is now lit on display P4 (engine speed).
 Allow the diesel engine to run continuously in low idle for another 2-3 minutes.
 Now turn the ignition key to position 0 in order to switch off the engine.
 Remove the ignition key.
3.3.2 Starting aids
Fuel preheating S26 (optional extra)

The fuel filter will be electrically heated using fuel preheating. This will prevent the
fuel filter salting up at low temperatures.
 Fuel preheating should be activated at least 5 minutes before starting in condi-
tions of low outside temperatures.
 Press switch S26 on the right control panel before starting and with the ignition
switched on.
 The fuel filter will be heated electrically.
 This will prevent the fuel filter salting up at low temperatures.
3.3.3 Starting aids
Preheating of the hydraulic excavator

The hydraulic excavator can be preheated with an external electric power supply
(230V AC, 50Hz).
The electric power supply must be connected to the excavator through a connector
situated in the cab elevation. At this time and if the principal switch on the electric box
E1037 / 3 is activated, all preheating units are starting.
A light H1 on the electric box E1037 / 3 alert the operator that the preheating is acti-
vated.
When the preheating is activated the excavator can be started but no movement is
possible.
Preheating control
The E1037 / 3 box is supplied in 230V for the preheating phase.
The engine starting is available during the preheating but the movements from
the excavator are forbidden.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 59

MJFCIFSS
Index
Oil engine 1 resistor from 450W / 240V
Fuel pre-heating 1 resistor from 600W
3 - 60 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Components location
Fig. 3-62 Electric box E1037/3
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 61

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-63 Control light on E1037/3 and socket 230V X464
Fig. 3-64 E65 and R24
3 - 62 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Operating Manual
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

Case Weather conditions and machine stop Measures to be taken after engine stop Preheating
operation or prior to engine start
Index
1 – The machine is turned off but the ambi- Usual standard procedure to park the ex-
ent air temperature will not be lower cavator
than -10°C during the downtime
OR No need to connect the Gen-Set / to use
– The machine is turned off less than one the preheating kit
User’s procedure
hour AND the ambient air temperature

Excavator is stopped
is lower than -10°C (daily maintenance

for example)
2 The machine is turned off more than one • Lay down the attachment on the ground so that a – In case of an excavator with a diesel engine, automatic
maximal quantity of oil is in the hydraulic tank : stick preheating / warm-keeping (own thermostat) of coolant
hour AND the ambient air temperature is
MJFCIFSS
and bucket cylinders completely raised in, bucket on and oil of diesel engine
below -10°C the ground.
• Connect the Gen-Set (in case of an excavator with an
electric engine, no need to connect the Gen-Set as
the high voltage supply is available
• Turn on the principal switch piloting the preheating
functions in the electric box and verify that the white
led "230 V" lights up
• Check that the switch on the two preheaters are
turned on and that the preheaters operate (green led
on)
• Shut down shutters for hydraulic oil coolers and en-
gine coolers
3 - 63
Control and operation
Case Weather conditions and machine stop Measures to be taken after engine stop
operation or prior to engine start
3 The machine must start and has been Standard procedure to run the excavator
turned off as described in case Nr. 1
4 The machine has been previously turned – 1.Turn off the main switch piloting the preheating in the
electric box and verify that the white led "230 V" is off
off as described in case Nr. 2 – 2.Disconnect Gen-Set (in the case of an excavator with
diesel engine)
– 3.Lift up shutters
– 4.Standard procedure to start the excavator
– 5.Proceed to all attachment’s movements at reduced
speed :
• Lift up the boom very slowly and bring it down very
slowly, repeat these operations 5 times
• Do the same operation for each attachment’s cylin-
ders, repeat these operations 5 times
– 6. If the excavator is equipped with by-pass valves on
the attachment and if the temperature is below -30° , use
the valves on the attachment to by-pass the cylinders
and also to heat up the oil in the pipes and the hoses on
the attachment during the operation Nr. 5 as the by-pass
valves are open, there is no movement of the attach-
ment.
– After these operations, close all the by-pass valves.
3.3.4 Jump start procedure
Danger!
When connecting to exterior batteries, old batteries can be subject to increased gas
formation.
 Wear protective goggles and gloves whenever jump starting, avoid naked flame
and creating any sparks in the vicinity of the flat vehicle battery. RISK OF EX-
PLOSION!
 Only use jump starting cables with a sufficient cross section. Always follow the
established jump starting procedure.
Connecting the batteries

 First connect the cable to the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery and then to
the positive terminal (+) of the exterior battery.
 Connect the second cable to the negative terminal (-) of the flat battery and then
to the negative terminal (-) of the exterior battery.
 Start the engine as described above.
Caution!
 Before removing the jump start cable, be sure to place the diesel engine of the
jump started machine into low idle.
 For safety reasons, switch on large consumers such as work headlights, upper
carriage lighting etc. to avoid overvoltage. The electronics could otherwise be
damaged.
Disconnecting the batteries

 First remove the cable from the negative terminal (-) of the exterior battery and
then from the negative terminal (-) of the flat battery.
3 - 64 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Remove the second cable from the positive terminal (+) of the exterior battery and
then from the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery.
 Check the electrical function of the machine.
For battery care and maintenance, see the chapter “Battery care”.
3.3.5 Anti-theft device with code key (option)

The machine can be equipped with an electronic anti-theft device.
Fig. 3-65 Electronic anti-theft device
 Insert the code key 1 in the code lock S74 and then remove.
 The LED goes out.
 A signal tone sounds.
 The anti-theft device is activated.
 You have 9 seconds to start the electrical system with the ignition key.
If the ignition is not switched on within 9 seconds, the code key will have to be rein-
serted in the code lock.
When the ignition is switched off, the anti-theft device activates itself automatically
after 30 seconds.
 To reorder the code key, give the code number entered on the accompanying
code card (credit card format).
3.3.6 Immobilizer with electronic ignition key (option)

System description
The system consists of a mechanical locking system and an independently function-
ing, electronically coded, immobilizer.
When activated, the electronically coded immobilizer disconnects the starting and
main control circuits of the machine.
The control of the immobilizer is microcomputer based. The electronic key of the im-
mobilizer is a transponder, which is securely integrated into the key handle.

Activation of the immobilizer
 Turn the key in "0" position.
 the immobilizer will be automatically activated after 5 seconds.
 Pull the key away from the ignition switch.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 65

MJFCIFSS
Index
Note!
The immobilizer is activated and will stay activated, as long as the key stays in po-
sition '0', no matter if the key remains inserted or is pulled out of the switch.
Deactivation of the immobilizer

 Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the contact position "1".
 the immobilizer is deactivated.
Note!
Reading of the transponder will only take place when the mechanical key in the
starting switch has made alive the control circuit of the machine (24V on clamp 15 ).
This makes it necessary to first open the mechanical locking system before the
electronic key is checked.
Thus, the immobilizer cannot be manipulated as long as the ignition is turned off.
Master key and operation keys
Fig. 3-66 Ignition switch with immobilizer via electronic operation keys
5 Master key (red coloured) 6 Operation keys (blue coloured)
The master key 5 is marked by a red key knob.

The master key must be carefully stored as there is only one master key available for
each immobilizer.
This master key is only to be used for imprinting new operation keys 6 (blue keys).
The master key can not be used for deactivating the immobilizer. This prevents the
usage of the master key for operating the machine.
At delivery there are only two operation keys joined to the immobilizer. Other operat-
ing keys can be ordered separately.
Imprinting procedure of an operation key
To imprint an operation key, proceed as follows.
 Insert the master key into the ignition switch and turn it to the contact position "1" .
 After a maximum of 5 seconds turn the master key back to "0" position and take
it off the ignition switch.
 the electronic system of the immobilizer now expects the operational key to be
imprinted within the next 15 seconds.
 During this lapse of time, insert the operation key to be imprinted into the ignition
switch and turn it to the contact position "1" .
 the key is registered as a new valid key.
3 - 66 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Note!
If no key to be imprinted is recognized within 15 seconds, the imprinting procedure
automatically terminates itself.
To imprint several operation keys, the keys may be inserted into the ignition switch
in succession. The individual keys must stay in position "1" for at least 1 second.
Up to 10 operation keys may be imprinted per master key.

It is by the fact possible to enable one operation key to several immobilizers, e.g. to
create a general operation key valid for several machines or for a machine pool.
Deleting imprinted operating keys
 Deleting imprinted operating keys may be necessary after the loss of an imprinted
key.
During the deletion procedure, all imprinted keys will be deleted. After all keys have
been deleted, they must be re-imprinted to recover validity.
 Insert the master key into the ignition switch, turn it to the contact position "1"and
keep it for at least 20 seconds in this position.
 all imprinted operation keys for this master key are deleted.
 all existing operation keys may be reimprinted .
Note!
The code of the master key will not be deleted during the deletion procedure.
Operation security
Should more than 5 invalid keys be used in the ignition switch within 1 minute, so the
immobilizer will be activated for 15 minutes and will not accept any valid keys during
this period.
This procedure will prevent the 'trying out' of multiple keys and accidentally finding
the correct key.
If several invalid keys are recognized without the ignition switch having been brought
into the position '0', the immobilizer stays activated for 15 minutes and will not accept
any valid keys during this period.
Only after those 15 minutes have expired, and after the ignition switch has recog-
nized the position '0', will valid keys be accepted again. This will prevent keys from
being tested without using the mechanical ignition switch, e.g. when the ignition
switch is forcefully brought into position '1'..
Function security
An interruption of the supply line or other control lines will not deactivate the immo-
bilizer or delete data (e.g. data codes).. All relevant data are stored in a non-volatile
memory. Magnetic fields will not deactivate the immobilizer.
3.3.7 Emergency operations
Emergency control speed adjustment

In normal operation, the desired speed is entered using arrow keys S228 and S229
or using mode switch S86 and the engine speed is controlled correspondingly using
the excavator electronics.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 67

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-67 Emergency control speed adjustment
This automatic system can be switched off in problem cases.

 Move toggle switch S71 to the MANU position.
 The control light next to the switch goes on illuminates.
 The symbol MANU appears on the display.
 Control the speed manually.
The speed will be controlled using potentiometer R6 :
– turning R6 clockwise increases the RPM,
– turning R6 counterclockwise reduces the RPM.
Emergency operation
If the function of the servo control and of the parking and slewing gear brakes can no
longer be activated due to a defect in the electronics, it is possible to bypass the elec-
tronics.
Fig. 3-68 Emergency operation (Fig. left) and emergency switching screen display
(Fig. right)
 Push the safety lever down.

 Move the toggle switch S73 into the emergency position.
 The symbols appear on screen.
 The servo control will be activated when the swing gear motor is running.
 When the hydraulics are ready to operate, the swing gear motor runs and the
parking and swing gear brakes are released.
3 - 68 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Danger!
In this toggle switch position, S73, the servo control and the parking and swing gear
brakes can no longer be activated using the switches for this purpose on the key-
pad.
All three functions can only be activated or deactivated using the safety lever.
 Inform all personnel who are involved in the operation or maintenance of the ma-
chine about the emergency switching and of the changed operation.
 Rectify the damage to the machine which caused the emergency functions to be
used as quickly as possible.
Safety operation of the central lubrication
Switch S84-2 for safety operation of the central lubrication

When the control unit U15 of the central lubrication is out of order,
 tilt the switch S84-2 briefly to the left or to the right,
 the lubrication system will start a complete lubrication cycle.
If the control unit of the lubrication is on and operative, the actuation of the switch
S84-2 will solely start an additional lubrication cycle.
Emergency operation of operating pumps

When a fault occurs in the electrical power or regulating circuits, pump efficiency is
reduced to a minimum.
In this case, however, it is still possible to continue to work with reduced pump effi-
ciency.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 69

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-69 Preparing emergency operation of operating pumps
 Toggle the lever 3 on the control oil unit on the back of the hydraulic tank and:
 pull out the plug connector 1 (Y50).
 pull out the cotter pin 2.
 toggle the lever 3 to a horizontal position (emergency position).
 Emergency operation is prepared.
3.3.8 Travel functions
Straight travel
Fig. 3-70 Travelling straight ahead
1 Idler wheel 5a / 5b Pedal for travel left

2 Sprocket wheel 6a / 6b Pedal for travel right
As a basic rule, when travelling, the upper carriage must be rotated to the under car-
riage in such a way that when travelling forwards, the idler wheel 1 is in front and the
sprocket wheel 2 is at the rear.
Danger
If the uppercarriage us turned by 180°, note that all travelling directions (right
and left, forward and backward) are reversed when you push the pedals!
Travel forwards:
 Push both pedals forward at the same time (5a and 6a).
3 - 70 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Travel backwards:
Caution!
Before travelling in reverse, ensure that the area behind you is clear and nobody is
in your way.
 Push both pedals down at the same time (5b and 6b).
Counter rotation with both tracks
Fig. 3-71 Counter rotation with both tracks
Counter rotating left (A):

 Push the left pedal down (5b).
 Push the right pedal forwards at the same time (6a).
Counter rotating right (B):

 Push the right pedal down (6b).
 Push the left pedal forwards at the same time (5a).
Turning over one track
Fig. 3-72 Turning with a crawler
Turning ahead to the left (A):

Push the right pedal forwards (6a).
Turning ahead to the right (B):

Push the left pedal forwards (5a).
Note!
If possible, avoid turning over one track, and especially turning over one track back-
wards in order to preserve the track components from unnecessary strains.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 71

MJFCIFSS
Index
Manual control of the travelling movements
Fig. 3-73 Hand levers for manual travel control
 When particularly careful and progressive travel movements are required:

 Insert the hand levers (1 and 2) delivered in the tool box of the machine into the
both pedals for travel movements.
 The travel movements can now be controlled manually.
Note!
When travelling the machine onto or off a low loader, the travel movements must
be controlled manually for safety reasons.
Travel speed increase

The travel motors can be operated in two different positions depending on the state
of the push button S21:
– Normal travel speed (position 1) :
Maximum track forces at moderate travel speed.
– Increased travel speed (position 2) :
Reduced track forces at maximum travel speed.
 Press the push button S21.
 the LED 1 in the push button illuminates.
 Automatic commutation between normal travel speed and increased travel
speed is turned on.
During travel, the travel motors will automatically shift from normal travel speed to in-
creased travel speed as the ground conditions permit. If the ground conditions be-
come more difficult again, the motors will automatically shift back from increased
travel speed to normal speed.
 Press again the push button S21.
 the LED 1 in the push button goes out.
 the automatic commutation between normal travel speed and increased travel
speed is deactivated and the travel motors remain continually in position 1.
3 - 72 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
The travel brakes
Hydraulic braking
The hydrostatic travel drive of the machine also functions as a service brake.
 When the travel pedals are released,
 the pedals will return automatically to the neutral position.
 a maximum hydraulic braking of the machine is achieved.
 the travel movement is stopped.
 When the machine is travelling down a slope ,
 automatically acting hydraulic braking valves prevent the machine from
running away and the maximum travel speed cannot be exceeded.
Mechanical braking
A negatively acting, hydraulic multi disc brake is integrated in each travel gear.
These brakes serve as parking brake.
 As soon as a travel pedal is actuated,
 the brake at the corresponding travel gear is released.
 As soon as a travel pedal is returned to neutral position,
 the mechanical brake at the corresponding travel gear is applied.
Caution!
Disengaging the pedals quickly causes the machine to halt abruptly.
 Before starting the machine, always fasten the safety belt.
3.3.9 Drive warning device (optional extra)
Fig. 3-74 Drive warning device

 Press drive pedal 5 or 6.

 The drive warning device switches on automatically.
 An acoustic signal (warning tone) will be emitted.
Deactivating the drive warning device:

 Press and hold press button S55 on leftt-hand joystick 4.
 The drive warning device will switch off.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 73

MJFCIFSS
Index
Note!
The drive warning device can only be switched off 10 seconds after starting to drive.
If the accelerator pedal is engaged once more, the drive warning device will reacti-
vate.
Note!
Depending on the special equipments on the machine, the rocker switch S55 on the
left joystick handle may have different functions.
Towing the machine safely

– Always follow the correct procedure: see chapter “Towing the machine” in these
operating instructions.
– The machine may only be towed in exceptional circumstances, e.g. in order to
move the machine away from an area where it is at risk.
– Before towing, check all attachments and towing devices for safety and stability.
– Towing devices such as bars, cables or ropes must have adequate tensile
strength and should be secured around the undercarriage tower or the towing
hook provided on the undercarriage.
Any damage or accidents which occur while towing the machine are not covered
by the manufacturer’s guarantee.
– Ensure that there is no one in the vicinity of the towing devices when towing.
– Stretch safely and hold the towing devices. Avoid kinks on cables or ropes.
– When towing, maintain the correct transport position, permitted speed and route,
and avoid lurching.
– After towing, return the machine to correct operational status.
– When restarting the machine, be sure only to proceed in accordance with the op-
3.3.10 Pre-requisite
 Earth-moving machine can only be towed when their brakes and steering are
functional.
 The machine may only be towed in exceptional circumstances, eg. in order to
move the machine away from a dangerous place for repair.
Notes !
Respect the respective local traffic instructions and safety rules of labour inspection
and by necessary adapt previously the machine, its transport means, loading and
lashing material into the local permited condition.
Towing the machine is problematic and is always carried out at the owner's risk
Damage or accidents which occur during towing of the machine cannot be covered
by the manufacturer's guarantee under any circumstances.
Under any circumstance, the equipment / bucket can not be used to recover or tow
the machine.
3 - 74 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.3.11 Process preconisations.

 Secure the towing / recovering area according to the local traffic recommanda-
tions and safety rules of labour inspection.
 Towing earth-moving machine should be done only with help of tow-bars, cables
or ropes sufficiently sized and brought to the appropriate fixation equipments for
tow-bars or ropes onto the machine.
Danger !
Danger of injury due to a torn rope. Staying near the rope is vorbiden
Never use towing equipment damaged, kinked or torned. Risks of injuries !
Caution !
Tow-bars or ropes are sufficiently sized when their loads value of resistance to the
rupture calculated corresponds to at least threefold traction force of the tractor ve-
hicle or machine.
The equipments to fix tow-bars or ropes are, for example, towing coupling, clevis,
rings or hooks.
 Check for brake functions properly.
Caution !
While towing the machine, the multi-plate brake in the drive transmissions must be
released.
This means that the engine will have to be started so that the pressure in the hy-
draulic lines can be removed.
If the engine cannot be restarted or if there is a defect in the hydraulic system, the
drive transmissions can also be manually depressurized. For more information on
this, consult LIEBHERR customer service.
 Check the equipment position properly, means boom, stick and bucket cylinders
out in order to position the bucket about 20 - 30 cm over earth level.
 If present, lift up the dozer blade.
Caution !
To position the equipment / dozer blade properly, the engine must be started so that
the pressure in the hydraulics lines is effective.
If the engine cannot be restarted or if there is a defect in the hydraulic system, the
drive transmissions can also be manually depressurized. For more information on
this, consult LIEBHERR customer service.
 Mount the towing equipment around the crown base. Place a protection between
crown and towing equipment, to avoid any damages on both.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 75

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-75 Towing equipment around the crown base.
 Staying near the tow-bars, cables or ropes is vorbiden.
Danger !
Risks of injuries due to rope wrench. Staying near the tow-bar rope is vorbiden.
 Start slowly. Tight the rope / bar carefully and hold it.
 Tow the machine without shocks out of the dangerous area, .
 To the wokshop, load and carry the machine according to chapter "Transport".
3.3.12 Other preconisations.

 If towing using previous recommandations would not be possible, let tow or re-
cover the machine by any recognised towing or service company.
Note !
In any case, consult LIEBHERR customer service.
3.3.13 With clevis type eylet available.

The clevis type eyelet on the chassis can only be used to tow small charges, like
compressor; electric générator, welding equipment,....
Danger !
Never use towing equipment damaged, kinked or torned. Risks of injuries !
3 - 76 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Working with the machine
Note !
The traction, towing or recovering of other machines is problematic and is always
carried out at the owner's risk.
Damage or accidents which occur during towing of the machine cannot be covered
by the manufacturer's guarantee under any circumstances.
In any case, consult LIEBHERR customer service.
Caution !
Never use this clevis type eylet on the chassis to tow or recover other mechanical
shovel, earth-moving or building machines, trucks and others.
Fig. 3-76 Towing the machine
 The tow-bar for towing the machine must have sufficient tensile strength.
 Fasten the tow-bar or rope to the clevis type eyelet on the chassis.
 Tight the rope / bar carefully and hold it. Avoid kinks
 Tow the machine without shocks. Risks of breaches.
Danger !
Risks of injuries due to rope wrench. Staying near the tow-bar rope is vorbiden.
3.4 Working with the machine
Working safely with the machine

– Before you start working, acquaint yourself with the special features of the job site
and any special precautions and warning signals. Examples of particular work en-
vironments would be on-site or traffic obstructions, the load-carrying capacity of
the ground and any requirements to make the job site safe from public use.
– Always maintain a safe distance from overhangs, edges, slopes and unsafe
ground.
– Be particularly careful in conditions of reduced visibility and changeable ground
conditions.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 77

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Familiarize yourself with the location of power lines on the job site and take par-
ticular care when working near them. If necessary, inform the responsible author-
ities.
– Maintain a safe distance from electrical aerial lines. Do not allow the equipment
to come near cables when working near electrical aerial lines. Risk of fatality! In-
form yourself about required safety distances.
– The following actions must be carried out in the event of any transfer of electricity:
• do not move the machine or its equipment,
• do not leave the driver’s cab,
• warn any personnel in the vicinity not to come close to the excavator and
not to touch it,
• instruct or initiate that someone turns off the voltage.
• move the machine, if possible, from the danger zone to a sufficient distance,
• Do not leave the machine until you are absolutely sure that voltage in the line,
which had been touched or damaged, has been turned off !
– Before moving the machine, always ensure that any attachments are safely se-
cured.
– When driving onto public roads, paths and squares, observe current traffic regu-
lations and if necessary, ensure that the machine has been made safe as per reg-
ulations beforehand.
– Always turn on the lights in conditions of poor visibility or darkness.
– Do not permit any passengers in the machine.
– Only work when seated properly and with the safety belt securely fastened (if
available).
– Report all function faults and ensure that all necessary repairs are carried out im-
mediately.
– Assure yourself that no one is endangered when you start the machine moving.
– Before you start working, test the brake system in accordance with the regulations
given in the operating instructions.
– Never leave the driver’s seat while the machine is moving.
– Never leave the machine unattended while the engine is running.
– The machine must be positioned, moved and operated in such a way that it is sta-
ble and that there is no danger of overturning. Only known loads may be moved
with the equipment; this applies particularly when using the grab.
– Position the upper structure in the longitudinal direction when moving and hold
the load as close to the ground as possible.
EXCEPTION: "Safe use when loading and unloading (particularly when loading
and unloading wood)" on page 80.
– Adjust your driving speed to suit local conditions.
– Avoid any working movements which may tip the machine. Should the machine
start to tip or slide sideways, however, turn the upper structure to face downhill
and lower the equipment at the same time.
– As far as possible, work downhill or uphill and not side on to the slope.
– Drive safely on stony, sleepery or inclined ground
– Only drive downhill at the permitted speed or you could lose control of the ma-
chine.
– Always shift down to a lower running step before a slope. When doing this, the
engine must run at maximal speed and the speed may only be reduced using the
accelerator pedals.
– Load an occupied truck only if all safety requirements are fulfilled, notably in order
to protect the truck operator.
– For demolition work, digging and crane operations etc., always use protective de-
vices specifically designed for the purpose.
3 - 78 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– For terrain which is difficult to gain an overview of and whenever necessary, ask
for the assistance of a spotter. Only permit one person to give you signals.
– Only permit experienced personnel to attach loads and give signals to the ma-
chine operator. The spotter must be positioned within the visual range of the op-
erator or be in voice contact with him.
work tool and the cab, the cab protection or the boom cylinders. The greatest de-
gree of care must be taken to avoid damage when the hoe teeth come within this
area.
lift ring of the attachment and the cab or the cab protection. Before operating, en-
sure that there is no risk of collision, especially on excavator with cab elevation.
If necessary remove the lift ring.
– In case of a thunderstorm :
• lower the attachment to the ground and if possible anchor the digging tool into
the soil.
• leave the cab and move away from the machine before the storm breaks out.
Otherwise, you must stop the excavator, turn off the radio and keep inside the
closed cab until the end of the storm.
– Auxiliary control units can have various functions. Always check their functions
– Stop the swinging motion of the uppercarriage when lowering the attachment into
a ditch without striking the attachment on the ditch walls.
– Inspect the machine for damage if the attachment has been swung into a wall or
any other obstacles.
– Applications in which the attachment is to be used to strike the material being ex-
tracted are not permitted, even when working in a longitudinal direction.
– Repeated strikes against an object leads to damage to the steel structures and
machine components.
– Please refer to your LIEBHERR dealer if special teeth for heavy-duty or special
applications are required.
– Do not attach too large bucket or bucket with side cutters or that are during oper-
ations with rocky material. This would prolong the work cycles and may lead to
damage to the bucket as well as further machine components.
– With the 2x45° offset articulation, the offset position may only be employed if the
working tool or the attachment does not touch the material.
– Operation of the offset articulation to drill into the material is not permitted.
– Do not lift the machine during operation. Should this happen, lower the machine
slowly back to the ground.
– Do not let the machine fall heavily on the ground and do not hold it back with the
hydraulics. This would damage the machine.
– During operation with the attachment it is forbidden to raise the machine with the
dozing blade (e.g. carving at the ceiling when tunnelling).
Safe use with a hydraulic hammer

– The hydraulic hammer must be selected with particular care. When using a hy-
draulic hammer not permitted by LIEBHERR, steel structures or the other ma-
chine components can become damaged.
– Before beginning breaking tasks, position the machine on firm and level ground.
– Use a hydraulic hammer designed exclusively for breaking stone, concrete and
other breakable materials.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 79

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Only operate the hydraulic hammer in the longitudinal direction of the machine
and with the windshield closed or with a front protective grid.
– Ensure during hammer operation that no cylinder is entirely extended or retracted
and that the stick is not in the vertical position.
– In order to avoid damages to the machine, try not to break stone or concrete while
performing retraction and extension motions of the hydraulic hammer.
– Do not apply the hydraulic hammer uninterrupted for more than 15 secs. at a time
to the same place. Change the breaking point. Too long uninterrupted operation
of the hydraulic hammer leads to an unnecessary overheating of the hydraulic oil.
– Do not use the drop force of the hydraulic hammer to break stone or other mate-
rials. Do not move obstacles with the hydraulic hammer. Misuse of this nature
would damage both the hammer and the machine.
– Do not use the hydraulic hammer to lift objects
Safe use when loading and unloading (particularly when

loading and unloading wood)
– According to use, it can be necessary when working with a grab to move with the
equipment raised and the load lifted up; this applies, for example, when loading
and unloading wood.
– Here, the centre of gravity of the machine will be displaced upwards in the vertical
direction. The driving characteristics of the machine will thus be influenced per-
sistently, e.g. through reduction of the dynamic stability.
• Adjust vehicle handling to suit the altered machine characteristics and environ-
mental conditions.
noeuvres.
rection.
• Only rotate the upper structure when the undercarriage is stationary.
• Only rotate the upper structure after you have picked up the load.
• Only move the machine when you have picked up and lifted the load and rotat-
ed the upper structure to the driving position.
• There is a danger of possible swinging movement and dropping of the load
when the equipment is raised.
• A protective grid (FOPS) in accordance with ISO 10262 must be attached to the
cab.
• A protective roof (FOPS) in accordance with ISO 10262 must be attached if
there is a risk of objects falling from above.
• Only the maximum permissible load may be taken up using the grab.
– NOTE: The weight of absorbent materials, such as logs, is dependent on length,
diameter and specific weight. The influencing variables present in a natural prod-
uct, such as moisture, must be noted.
– Working procedures when using machines with grabs require the machine oper-
ator to receive special instruction and training.
– Use as part of the work process is only permitted when the machine operator has
sufficient training and practical experience.
Safe use of machines with tower elevation

– Due to the tower elevation, the centre of gravity of the machine will be displaced
upwards in the vertical direction. The driving and work characteristics of the ma-
chine will thus be influenced persistently, e.g. through reduction of the dynamic
stability.
3 - 80 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Due to the heightened centre of gravity, the machine must be aligned horizontally
before use. In horizontal alignment, the centre of gravity of the upper structure is
over the centre of the undercarriage, which reduces the risk of tilting.
– The machine can still sway and tilt despite being aligned!
When moving the machine:
• Rotate the upper structure parallel to the undercarriage undercarriage (trans-
port position).
• Draw the equipment as close as possible to the machine.
• Only at this point may the support feet be retracted and the machine moved.
• Moving with loads is not permitted.
• Check the terrain to be covered to ensure that the ground is solid and even. Pot-
holes and uneven surfaces jeopardize the stability of the machine.
• Adjust vehicle handling to suit the altered machine characteristics (high centre
of gravity) and environmental conditions.
noeuvres.
rection.
• Ascending gradients and obstacles may only be approached in the longitudinal
direction in order to prevent unacceptable banking of the machine.
• Special care should be taken when driving through narrow passages - drive
slowly!
When loading and unloading:
• The machine must be supported and aligned horizontally before moving (slew-
ing) the upper structure out of the transport position.
• It is imperative that you check the contact surface of the support (load carrying
capacity of the substrate). A support subsiding would have disastrous conse-
quences!
• Carry out all movements with increased care.
• To slew the load, move the equipment as close as possible to the machine
(Caution! swinging grab)and hold the load close to the undercarriage and
above the substrate.
• Avoid braking or accelerating the equipment or upper structure abruptly.
• Do not lift any loads which are heavier than those given in the load chart.
Protection from vibration

– Vibrational loads on mobile building machinery are mainly the result of the type
and method of use. The following parameters in particular are decisive influences:
• Terrain conditions: Uneven areas and potholes;
• Operational techniques: Speed, steering, brakes, controlling the machine’s
control elements when driving and working.
– To a large extent, the machine operator determines the vibrational loads since he
selects the speed, gearbox ratio, working method and route himself.
This means that there is a wide range of different vibrational loads for the same
machine type.
Whole-body vibrational load for the machine operator can be reduced if the following
recommendations are observed:
– Select suitable machines, equipment parts and auxiliary devices for each part of
the job.
– Use a machine that has a suitable seat (i.e. for earth-moving machinery such as
hydraulic excavators, this should be a seat which corresponds with EN ISO
7096).
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 81

MJFCIFSS
Index

structions.
– Check the maintenance status of the machine, particularly with respect to: tyre
pressure, brakes, steering, mechanical connections etc.
– Do not steer, brake, accelerate, shift gears, move or load the machine’s equip-
ment jerkily.
– To reduce vibrational load, adjust the machine speed to suit the route as follows:
• Reduce speed when driving on difficult terrain;
• Drive around obstacles and avoid driving on very difficult terrain.
– Keep the terrain on which the machine is working and driving in good condition:
• Remove large stones and obstacles;
• Fill in ruts and holes;
• Have machines ready to prepare and maintain suitable ground conditions and
calculate in sufficient time to carry out any work required.
– Drive longer distances (e.g. on public roads) at an appropriate (medium) speed.
– Use special auxiliary systems (if available) which reduce vibration for machines
that are driven frequently.
If such auxiliary systems are not available, regulate speed to avoid "oscillating"
the machine.
Low idle automatic

This device automatically reduces the engine speed to idle after several seconds if
no hydraulic functions are activated by the joystick or the pedals. This saves fuel and
reduces the amount of noise. Touching the joystick or operating the pedals takes the
engine speed back to its original level.
Automatic idling is started by pressing switch S20.
 Press switch.
 Low idle automatic is activated.
 Low idle automatic is deactivated.
To set the time within which the engine is set back to idle after the joystick has
been released:
 Press and hold switch.
 LED in the switch flashes.
 Desired time span is reached.
 Release the switch.

 Low idle automatic is activated.
In each case, when a hydraulic function is activated, the speed which was previously
set using the electrical speed adjustment function will be reset automatically.
Caution!
Low idle automatic must be switched off when starting the diesel engine and when
driving on gradients. The LED in the switch must not illuminate.
3 - 82 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.4.1 The uppercarriage swing movements

The swing movements of the uppercarriage are controlled by the left joystick 4.
Fig. 3-77 Rotating the uppercarriage
Caution!
The joystick functions described below refer to the normal control, fitting out the
machine at delivery.and according to ISO-standards,
On machines equiped in addition with a special control system, and if this special
control system is activated by the operator, the joystick functions correspond to the
information on the label which is sticked on the side window of the cab and is spe-
cific to the installed special control system.
 Push the left joystick 4 to the left c:

 the uppercarriage rotates to the left.
 Push the joystick to the right d:
 the uppercarriage rotates to the right.
Braking the uppercarriage

The machine is equipped as well with an hydraulic as with a mechanical swing brake.
The hydraulic swing brake
 Let the left joystick 4 move back to neutral position.
 The hydraulically swing braking of the uppercarriage takes place. In normal
working conditions, the braking efficiency is sufficient to bring the uppercar-
riage to a standstill rapidly.
 Move the left joystick 4 in the opposite direction.
 The maximum hydraulic braking action of the uppercarriage is achieved.
The mechanical swing brake
The mechanical brake is a negatively acting multidisc brake which is integrated in the
swing gear. It allows to stop the uppercarriage in any desired position (for parking,
when working on a slope, ...).
 Press the touch S17.
 the red LED beside the touch is lighting.
 the swing brake is applied.
 Press the touch S17 again.
 the red LED beside the touch goes out.
 The swing gear brake is in mode semi-automatic and can now be controlled
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 83

MJFCIFSS
Index
as follows by the rocker switch S57:
Tilt down the rocker switch S57 on the joystick handle,

the brake is applied when the uppercarriage is at standstill, respectively
it applies as soon as the uppercarriage speed gets lower than a limit
value.
Tilt up the rocker switch S57,
the brake remains released permanently.
Note!
The red LED beside the touch S17 is lighting in any case when the brake is applied.
If this light does not go out when the rocker switch S57 is tilted up, the button S17
must first be pushed to pre-select the semi-automatic mode.
Caution!
The brake only applies when the uppercarriage is near standstill and if no swing mo-
tion is actuated via the joystick!
In order to stop the uppercarriage when working on a slope, tilt the switch S57 down
and reduce the uppercarriage speed by braking with joystick 4.
Move the joystick 4 back to «0» position only after the brake has applied.
Ermergency stop of the uppercarriage swing motion

The swing brake can be applied independently of the uppercarriage RPM by switch-
ing the button S17 from position «semi-automatic» into position «applied».
Caution
Perform this braking via button S17 only exceptionaly, i. e. in emergency cases,
since it causes fast abrasion of the brake discs.
To check the mechanical swing gear brake:

 When the uppercarriage is stationary.
 Press the touch S17 to apply the mechanical swing brake.
 Push the left joystick 4 to the right and then to the left as far as the stop.
 If the swing brake function is OK, the uppercarriage does not start swinging. LEC/en/Edition: 06 / 2011
3 - 84 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
The positioning swing brake (option)

The positioning swing brake is used for progressive and sensitive braking of the up-
per carriage.
Fig. 3-78 Positioning swing brake pedal
Note!
Increased wear.
Do not use the positioning swing brake purely as a service brake, but only as a stop
and parking brake.
Using this brake to stop the uppercarriage running at the full swing RPM is not per-
missible since this would result in a quick abrasion of the brake discs.
 In any case, first use the hydraulic braking to greatly reduce the speed of the up-
percarriage
 Depress the pedal 10 when the uppercarriage is near standstill
 The uppercarriage can be stopped precisely and progressively in the desired
position.
3.4.2 Working position

Fig. 3-79 Working position – machine
 Work with the machine is generally to be carried out over the leading wheel.
Note
 Drive backwards when you are working lengthwise with the hoe type bucket.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 85

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.4.3 Joystick functions when setting up the machine
Caution!
The machine is dispatched as standard with normal control.
On request, the machine can be equipped with a control system that deviates from
the norm (eg. with LIEBHERR control). The additional operating instructions for this
control system apply in this case.
The joystick functions described here refer exclusively to normal control.
Operating the stanchion cylinder

The stanchion cylinder is operated using the left joystick 4.
Fig. 3-80 Operating the stanchion cylinder
 Push the joystick back a.

 Stanchion will be drawn in.
 Push the joystick forwards b.
 Stanchion will be extended.
Operating the boom cylinder

The boom cylinder is operated using the right joystick 3.
Fig. 3-81 Operating the boom cylinder
 Push the joystick back g.

 Equipment will be raised.
 Push the joystick forwards h.
 Equipment will be lowered.
3 - 86 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Operating the shovel cylinder

The shovel cylinder is operated using the right joystick 3.
Fig. 3-82 Operating the shovel cylinder
 Push the joystick to the left e.

 Shovel will be tilted inwards.
 Push the joystick to the right f.
 Shovel will be tilted outwards.
Operating the grab cylinder

The grab cylinder is operated using the right joystick 3.
Fig. 3-83 Operating the grab cylinder
Danger!
The grab must never be guided by hand by auxiliary staff!
 Push the joystick to the left e.

 Grab will close.
 Push the joystick to the right f.

 Grab will open.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 87

MJFCIFSS
Index
Operating the bottom dump shovel bucket
Fig. 3-84 Operating the bottom dump shovel bucket
The bottom dump shovel bucket is moved via two pedals, 7a and 7b.
 Push pedal 7a.
 Shovel bucket will be opened.
 Push pedal 7b.
 Shovel bucket will be closed.
Float position of boom cylinder for bucket operation (option-

al equipment)
Fig. 3-85 Float position
To turn on the float position for the lift cylinders,

 Move the right joystick 3 forward (g),
 Push the button S6 on top of the handle on top of handle at the same time.
Now the bucket can be used for grabing work while moving the joystick 4 forward to
extend the crowd cylinders.
The attachment can then move freely up or down depending on grade and the bucket
will automatically follow the ground contour.
3 - 88 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Control of a special equipment (telescopic stick, pulling de-

vice, ...)
Fig. 3-86 Telescopic stick (A) and pulling device (B)
For the control of special equipments such as telescopic stick (A), pulling device (B),
hydraulic adjustable boom, ... :
 Use the two pedals 7c and 7d.
For special equipment with two hydraulic cylinders :
 the second cylinder is controlled via the pedals 7a and 7b of the right pilot control.
If in case of an additional equipment having several hydraulic users, the right pedals
7a and 7b are used to control two different movements, the commutation from one
movement into the other is obtained while tilling the rocker switch S55 in the left joy-
stick handle.
Caution!
Auxiliary control units can have various functions. Always check their functions
Depending on the function and on the type of the special tool, it may be necessary,
before attempting to control the special equipment, to confirm the corresponding
choice of pump parameters, using the menu "Set Option" of the display.
Combined movements
Moving a joystick diagonally results in the work functions concerned being combined.
This allows different equipment movements to be activated at the same time.
The operator can do the following movements without any additional manipulations.
When the swing movement is actuated, all working functions / movements are pos-
sible without affecting the swing movement.
During travel, every attachment movement is possible, but the swing movement has
priority. In this case, the travel movement is reduced.
3.4.4 Lowering the work equipment when the engine is not run-
ning
In an emergency, the equipment can be lowered when the diesel engine is not run-
ning.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 89

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-87 Lowering the equipment when engine is not running
 Turn the ignition key to contact position 1.

 Operate the joystick or the foot pedals until the equipment has lowered.
Note
The equipment can be lowered because of the control oil unit’s pressure reserve.
This reserve is limited and is only sufficient for small movements of the pilot control
devices.
 Only operate the joystick in the directions for lowering the equipment.
3.4.5 Turning, rotating, bolting and unbolting the add-on unit

Switch S19 is used to activate an additional function:
– rotating grab (A)
– slewing ditcher bucket (B)
– locking pin of a hydraulic quick change adapter (C)
Fig. 3-88 Add-on units example
To operate, press the pushbutton. The pushbutton is located on the right and/or left
joystick (depending on the machine’s equipment):
Fig. 3-89 Pushbutton on the joystick
3 - 90 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
E Operation with left joystick F Operation with left and right joystick
(standard) (optional extras)
G Operation with right joystick
(optional extras - magnetic system
LIEBHERR America (LAM))
Danger!
The grab must never be guided by hand by auxiliary staff!

 Additional function (eg. rotating grab) is activated.
 LED in switch illuminates.
 Press and hold left pushbutton L.
 Grab will rotate left (anticlockwise).
- or -
 Slewing bucket will slew left (anticlockwise), i e. it moves down to the left.
- or -
 Locking pins will be drawn out.
 Press and hold right pushbutton R.
 Grab will rotate right (clockwise).
- or -
 Slewing bucket will slew right (clockwise), i e. it moves down to the right.
- or -
 Locking pins will be inserted.
3.4.6 Magnetic system (optional extra)

Special equipment such as magnets for transferring scrap are operated using a
magnetic system. The magnetic system is switched on by pressing switch S46 on the
right-hand control panel and is operated electronically using a pushbutton in the
right-hand joystick.
Fig. 3-90 Activating the magnetic system

 The magnetic system starts to function.
 The engine speed P4 increases to level 8.
 Automatic idling S20 no longer functions.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 91

MJFCIFSS
Index
Danger!
The magnet can lose its load in the event of a loss of current.
 Always ensure that noone is standing beneath the load.
 Do not press pushbutton S6L unintentionally.
 Press left-hand pushbutton S6L.

 The magnet is activated.
 Press left-hand pushbutton S6Lagain.
 The magnet is no longer activated.
Caution!
If a magnetic system LIEBHERR AMERICA (LAM) is mounted, the magnetic sys-
tem device is controlled by the button S55 on left-hand joystick 4 instead of the but-
ton S6L.
3.4.7 Cut off by end switches of attachment movements (Option)
Function
On some specific attachments, or on attachment showing particular cinematic ca-
pacities (for example on industrial attachments) certain movement(s) may be
stopped automatically by electrical end switches..
The installation of a cylinder cut off can fulfill different purposes :
– It can serve to avoid the repeated stopping over the mechanical buffers, which
would cause damage to hydraulic cylinders or to main structures.
– Frequently, the cylinder disconnection serves to restrict the possible working area
and in particular:
• the working height (as an ex. when working under a warehouse roof, under
electrical overhead lines, ... ).
• the maximal reach (as an ex. to avoid the possible development of high reaction
forces in the completely stretched position of the attachment).
• the minimal reach (as an ex. so that, when retracting an industrial stick, the load
taken up in the grapple cannot come into the range of the operator's cab and
damage it).
Danger!
The disconnection of a cylinder movement does not constitute a safety de-
vice! It must only be considered as an assistance to the driver during actua-
tion of a movement near a zone to be avoided !
Caution!
Avoid fast movements of an attachment part, if you move it in the vicinity of a cut off
point.
With fast movements, the sudden disconnection can cause a rocking motion of the
machine or a strong pendular movement of the attached grapple.
3 - 92 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Danger!
In some cases, the equipment can enter the zone normally prohibited by the prox-
imity switches (and for example arrive too close to the cab), due to:
– the oscillations of the working tool (for ex. a grapple) and because of the varia-
tion of its dimensions between the open position the closed position.
– Because of the inertia of the attachment at the disconnection. The stopping dis-
tance can increase by 0,5 m according to the temperature of oil or the type of
equipment and 1,0 m additional following the speed and/or the load in the work-
ing tool.
You must keep a safety margin from at least 1.5 m to the dangerous position.
The precision of the setting lies in the responsibility of the machine operator!
Note!
A movement is interrupted only in the direction which corresponds to the crossing
of the cut off point to enter the prohibited zone.
The movement in opposite direction which allows to leave the danger area remains
always possible.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 93

MJFCIFSS
Index
Adjustment of the cut off point
Prerequesite:
 Bring the attachment part whose movement has to be restricted into the position
where the cut off of movement must occur.
Fig. 3-91 Cut off position of an industrial stick
Stick cylinder control stop with one limit stop sheet
Setting
 Loosen the screws 12.
 Shift the slide 10 so that its end just enters the induction zone of the proximity sen-
sor 3. LEC/en/Edition: 06 / 2011
3 - 94 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-92 Setting of the proximity switch
 Retighten the screws 12.

 Check the position for which the cut off of the cylinder movement occurs.
 If necessary repeat the adjustment procedure and check the cut off position
again.
.
Note !
Should in the cut off position, the slide and the limit switch be in a difficult to reach
raised position, then the adjustment can also be done with the equipment in a
stretched and close to the ground position, first in an approximate way and after-
wards while correcting by successive approaches this adjustment until the point of
cut off matches exactly.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 95

MJFCIFSS
Index
Stick cylinder control stop with several limit stop sheets
Setting
Fig. 3-93 Setting of the proximity switch
 According the wanted area add or remove pieces 3 (the whole working area must
be covered with these pieces).
Unlocking of movements cut off
Fig. 3-94 Switch for the unlocking of attachment movements cut off
An attachment movement cut off can be unlocked while turning the key switch S54
in the rear right control desk. Thus it remains possible to move a disconnected at-
tachment part beyond the cut off point.
 Unlocking of a movement is possible only if the movement has already been cut
off by the end switch.
Danger!
The displacement of attachment parts within a range normally prohibited by

a cylinder cut off can bring to a situation presenting a danger for injury of
persons and/or damage of material.
The operator is in all the cases responsible for the accidents which can occur
when the attachment is working inside the zone of danger while keeping un-
locked a cylinder movement cut off.
 Turn the key switch S54 turned to the right (position I).
 Tilt up or down the rocker switch S55 mounted to the left joystick handle.
3 - 96 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
 the movement cut off is unlocked, it remains possible to move the attachmrent
inside the prohibited zone as long as the switch S55 is kept depressed.
Note!
On machines destined to the north-American market and also fitted with a lifting
magnet controlled via the rocker switch S55, the left push buttons S5L at top of the
left joystick handle must be used to unlock the limitation.
Should a special attachment comprise two different automatic stops of movement,

so the key switch S54 must be turned to the left (position II) to be able to release
from the second automatic limitation.
No unlocking via the rocker switch S55 is possible with the switch S54 in neutral
(position 0).
3.4.8 Overload warning device (Option)
General
The overload warning device shows the machine operator when the permissible load
carrying capacity has been reached both optically, via the warning symbol and
acoustically, via a buzzer.
The overload warning device is designed to prevent the permissible load torque be-
ing exceeded unintentionally. In this event, the working radius will have to be reduced
or the load set down without enlarging the working radius.
The overload warning device does not relieve the operator of the responsibility of lift-
ing loads which are either known or are permitted on the basis of the load carrying
capacity of the machine.
The permissible load carrying capacity is dependent on the condition of the machine
(chassis, equipment) and should be taken from the load chart in the cab.
The load carrying capacity values attain a maximum of 75% of the tipping capacity
or 87 % of the hydraulic lifting power in accordance with ISO 10567.
Note!
The load values are subject to change if equipment parts and work tools are at-
tached or dismounted.
Always refer to the load chart, and make sure which are the attachment parts whose
weights are considered or not in the indications of the rated lift capacity chart.
As an example, if the weight of the bucket is considered in the lift capacity chart and
the bucket is dismounted for the lifting works, then the lifting capacities can be in-
creased by the weight of the bucket.
In the same way, if the bucket tilt cylinder, the shifting lever and the connecting rod
are dismounted even thought their weights are considered in the lift capacity chart,
then the indicated lifting capacities can be increased by the weights of these parts.
With the specified load, the machine can be rotated from 360° on even and horizontal
ground.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 97

MJFCIFSS
Index
Using the overload warning device
Danger!
When carrying out load hoisting work with the machine, the relevant accident pre-
vention precautions are to be observed.
The overload warning device does not shut down the machine if the permissible
load torque is exceeded. The operator of the machine will only be informed of the
situation.
Mode of operation
The overload warning device comprises a constant pressure switch which is con-
nected to the piston of the boom hydraulic cylinders.
If the load pressure in the boom hydraulic cylinders reaches the level of the shift pres-
sure, the pressure switch emits a signal, the warning symbol appears on screen and
the buzzer sounds.
The shift pressure in the pressure switch is selected in such a way that the stability
factors can be maintained even if in an unsupported state (small stationary torque).
Starting the overload warning device
Danger!
No load hoisting work may be carried out if the overload warning device is defective.
 Have the overload warning device repaired by a professional.

 Overload warning device is activated.
The operator must check the function of the overload warning device before
each work shift.
 To check the overload warning device, extend the boom hydraulic cylinders to the
stop.
 Push the joystick further in the direction Raise boom.
 The warning symbol must illuminate.
 The buzzer must sound.
Caution!
This is only a functional test of the warning system (qualitative test), but it does not
mean that the adjustment is correct.
For this reason, the overload device must in addition be checked by a professional
in accordance with the testing and setting information provided in the service man-
ual (quantitative test):
• before the first use of the overload warning device,
• each time it is required by the locally applying regulation for lifting operation.
Deactivation of the overload warning device
Note!
For work using a bucket, deactivate the overload warning device, since the in-
creased effort of the machine will cause the overload warning device to be perma-
nently active.
 Press switch S18 again.
3 - 98 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Attaching and dismounting equipment parts
 Overload warning device is deactivated.

3.5 Attaching and dismounting equipment parts
Attaching and removing equipment parts safely

– Equipment or attachments made by other manufacturers or those which do not
have general approval from LIEBHERR for installation or attachment may not be
installed or attached to the machine without LIEBHERR’s prior written consent.
LIEBHERR must be provided with the appropriate technical documentation nec-
essary for this purpose.
– Before carrying out any major repair work on the equipment, position the machine
on level, firm ground.
supported with wooden blocks.
– Before loosening lines or unscrewing bolts, you must store the equipment, switch
off the engine and press the start key to the contact position and both joysticks
and the pushbuttons to “Turn grab” in order to reduce the pressure in the hydraulic
system.
and which have sufficient load carrying capacity.
– Do not use cable which is damaged or does not have sufficient load carrying ca-
pacity. Wear work gloves when working with wire cables.
– When working on the equipment: switch off the engine and keep the safety lever
tilted up. Never use your fingers to locate bores; use the correct punch for the pro-
cedure.
– During repair work: ensure that the hydraulic lines are secured correctly and that
all bolts and connections are tight.
– When you have removed and chocked an equipment part, close open areas of
the hydraulic circuit to stop dirt entering. Only allow authorized persons in the vi-
cinity of the machine or the lifting device used.
Removing and installing equipment bolts safely

– If possible, always use a hydraulic bolt press to press out the equipment’s bolts.
– If you have to remove a bolt using a sledge-hammer, a driving punch and a bore
hole conductor held by another person must be used.
– To drive in a bolt, screw the drive screws provided in the toolbox into the bolt's
threaded hole and only hammer these screws.
– When installing bolts locked by means of castle nuts and cotter pins, first drive the
bolt to the stop, then screw the castle nut by hand until contact and then only pull
it far enough to push in the cotter pin.
3.5.1 Mechanical quick-change adapter (option)
Safety information
– Ensure that nobody is located in the working area of the equipment when attach-
ing and dismounting work tools. Move the work equipment as slowly as possible
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 99

MJFCIFSS
Index
when attaching and dismounting a work tool.

Get to know the mode of operation of the quick-change adapter before attaching
or dismounting work tools.
– Always keep the work tool as close to the ground as possible when locking and
unlocking to avoid creating conditions which may lead to danger.
– If necessary, use a platform to reach the locking pins and connections. Never
stand on the work tool.
– Each time a work tool is changed, the machine’s operator must ensure that the
locking pin for the quick-change adapter inserts in the bore holes on the work tool
which are designed for the purpose and that the work tool raises correctly. A direct
visual check must be made to ensure that the work tool is correctly positioned.
– A working cycle should also be carried out with the work tool, where the work tool
is only raised to the point where the correct position of, for example, the pin in the
pin eye can be tested by tilting in and out.
– The correct positioning of the locking screw must be checked daily.
– The load carrying capacity of the quick-change adapter or the integrated lifting
hook can exceed or fall short of the load carrying capacity of the carrier device.
When operating, it should be ensured that the values provided in the load chart
and the technical data for the carrier device are adhered to.
Overview
Fig. 3-95 Mechanical quick-change adapter
1 Locking pin (removed) 3 Crank 5 Lifting hook

2 Locking screw 4 Sealing plug 6 Take-up hook for work
tool
Attaching the work tool
To move the equipment into position:

Fig. 3-96 Positioning the equipment
 The equipment must be standing stable or lay loose on the ground.
3 - 100 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Move the stanchion and work tool into position.

 Insert the shovel tilting cylinder fully.
To unlock the quick-change adapter:
Danger!
Risk of injury.
 Ensure that the work equipment cannot be moved by others when this action is
being carried out.
 Approach the quick-change adapter from the side and unscrew the locking screw
2 using the crank 3 from the locking pin 1 (see Fig. 3-95).
 Insert the crank 3 in the locking pin 1 and turn to the left (anti-clockwise), until both
locking pins 1 are inserted as far at the stop.
Taking up the work tool:
Fig. 3-97 Taking up the work tool
 Move the quick-change adapter into a position that allows the work tool to be
picked up using the take-up hook.
 Raise the work tool from the ground and extend the shovel tilting cylinder fully until
the bearing panel for the work tool is laying on the quick-change adapter stop.
 The bore holes of the work tool and the locking pins of the quick-change adapt-
er must form a row.
To lock the quick-change adapter:

Fig. 3-98 Locking the quick-change adapter
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 101

MJFCIFSS
Index
Danger!
Before locking, there is no fixed connection between the work tool and the quick-
change adapter. The work tool could under certain circumstances fall out and injure
people.
 Approach the quick-change adapter with the utmost care.
 Push the safety lever up to secure the work equipment against unintentional
movement.
 No work movements can be carried out when pilot control devices, eg. the
joystick or foot pedals, are operated.
 Insert the crank 3 in the locking pin 1 and turn to the right (clockwise), until both
locking pins 1 are extended as far as the stop.
 The work tool is bolted on when taking up normally.
 Screw the locking screw 2 into the locking pin.
Danger!
An incorrectly locked quick-change adapter could open when operating!
 Ensure that the locking pins are always locked by the sealing plug 4 on the one
side and by the locking screw 2 on the other side.
 Check daily to ensure that the locking screw 2 is correctly positioned.
Caution!
Hydraulic lines are pressurized!
 Remove the pressure using the joystick before connecting the hydraulic lines
(switch off the engine, turn the ignition key into the contact position, operate the
joystick).
 Connect hydraulic lines or electrical lines, if necessary (eg. when attaching a

grab).
Detaching a work tool
Caution!
 Remove the pressure using the joystick before removing the hydraulic lines
joystick).
 Disconnect hydraulic lines or electrical lines, if necessary (eg. when dismounting

a grab).
 Extend the shovel tilting cylinder fully.
3 - 102 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-99 Unlocking the quick-change adapter
Danger!
Risk of injury.
Once unlocked, there is no fixed connection between the adapter and the work tool.
The work tool could work itself out independently.
 Ensure that the work equipment cannot be moved by others when this action is
being carried out.
 Always keep the work tool as close to the ground as possible when unlocking to
avoid creating conditions which may lead to danger.
 Approach the quick-change adapter from the side and unscrew the locking screw
2 using the crank 3 from the locking pin 1.
 Insert the crank 3 in the locking pin 1 and turn to the left (anti-clockwise), until both
locking pins 1 are inserted as far at the stop.
To put down the work tool:
Fig. 3-100 Putting down the work tool
 Slowly insert the shovel tilting cylinder and lay the work tool on the ground.
 The new work tool can be taken up.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 103

MJFCIFSS
Index
Using the quick-change adapter for hoisting work
Fig. 3-101 Mechanical quick-change adapter
The quick-change adapter has two integrated lifting hooks. The machine may only
be used for hoisting work if the safety devices required for the purpose are present
and functioning correctly (see chapter "Hoisting work” or “Overload warning device”).
The maximum load carrying capacity of each individual lifting hook is given on the
quick-change adapter. The load carrying capacity of the quick-change adapter or the
integrated lifting hook can exceed or fall short of the load carrying capacity of the car-
rier device.
When operating, it should be ensured that the values for the carrier device / quick-
change adapter given in the load chart and the technical data are adhered to.
Load hoisting work can be carried out with attached or dismounted work tools. With
dismounted work tools, it is sensible to fully insert the locking pins when carrying out
hoisting work. This prevents the load take-up device being turned round too strongly
by the locking pins and damaged.
Danger!
 Never use the take-up hook 6 to fasten a load because there is no secure hold
for the load take-up device, eg. rope or chains, in the take-up hook.
 Fasten the load on the lifting hook as described in the chapter “Hoisting work”.
3.5.2 Hydraulic quick-change adapter (option)
Safety information
– Ensure that nobody is standing in the working area of the equipment when
attaching or dismounting work tools. Move the work equipment as slowly as
possible when attaching and dismounting a work tool.
Familiarize yourself with the mode of operation of the quick-change adapter
without attached work tools if possible.

– The proper functioning of the quick-change adapter is monitored by a visual and
acoustic warning device (buzzer and telltale light). The function of the warning
device should be checked daily by operating the quick-change adapter.
– If the buzzer and telltale light are activated without a deliberate locking or
unlocking procedure being carried out, stop all work at once. If the buzzer and
telltale light are not activated while a deliberate locking or unlocking procedure is
being carried out, stop all work at once.
This could be caused by an unmonitored position change of the locking pins or by
3 - 104 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
mechanical or hydraulic damage. A defect may also be present in the electrical

system (eg. proximity switch or buzzer).
Only resume working once defective parts have been repaired or replaced.
– The quick-change adapter unlocks as soon as the switch / button designed for the
purpose is pressed.
Always keep the work tool as close to the ground as possible when unlocking to
avoid creating conditions which may lead to danger. Only activate the quick-
change adapter to carry out a deliberate locking or unlocking procedure.
– Each time a work tool is changed, the machine’s operator must ensure that the
locking pins for the quick-change adapter insert in the bore holes on the work tool
which are designed for the purpose and that the work tool raises correctly. A direct
visual check must be made to ensure that the work tool is correctly positioned.
– A working cycle should also be carried out with the work tool ,where the work tool
is only raised to the point where the correct position of, for example, the pin in the
pin eye can be tested by tilting in and out.
– The load carrying capacity of the quick-change adapter or the integrated lifting
hook can exceed or fall short of the load carrying capacity of the carrier device.
When operating, it should be ensured that the values provided in the load chart
and the technical data for the carrier device are adhered to.
Overview
Fig. 3-102 Hydraulic quick-change adapter
1 Locking pin 5 Lifting hook 6 Take-up hook for work

(extended) tool
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 105

MJFCIFSS
Index
Operating elements
Fig. 3-103 Operating elements for the hydraulic quick-change adapter
Switch S19
Use switch S19 to activate the auxiliary hydraulic device for the grab torsional
mechanism and quick-change adapter.
 Press switch.
 Auxiliary device is activated.
 Press switch again
 Auxiliary device is deactivated.
Key switch S47:
Pressing the button activates the quick-change adapter – it is possible to operate the
locking pins.
Pushbuttons L and R
Pushbutton L = extend locking pin (lock)
Pushbutton R = retract locking pin (unlock)
The pushbuttons are located on the left and/or right joystick (depending on the
machine’s equipment):
Fig. 3-104 Pushbutton on the joystick
E Operation with left joystick (standard) F Operation with left and right joystick (optional extras)
3 - 106 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Symbol "Quick change adapter"

The symbol appears:
– during the locking process or
– when the locking pins are retracted.
Two-hand operation
The quick-change adapter is activated using two-hand operation. The locking pins
can only be moved at first if button S47 and one of the pushbuttons L or R are
pressed.
The control has a hold function which allows both joysticks to be operated
simultaneously when attaching and dismounting work tools. If one of the
pushbuttons, L or R is continued to be pressed, button S47 can be released and the
direction of movement of the locking pins is retained.
If the direction of movement is to be changed, button S47 and the relevant
pushbutton L or R must be pressed.
Caution !
The extension of the locking pins (locking of the coupler) is possible even without
depressing S47.
However this must be absolutely avoided since it causes a quick wear of the sealing
rings in the LIKUFIX hydraulic coupling system.
Attaching the work tool
Fig. 3-105 Positioning the equipment
 The equipment must be standing stable or lay loose on the ground.

 Move the stanchion and work tool into position.
 Insert the shovel tilting cylinder fully.

 Quick-change adapter is activated.

 Press and hold button S47.
 Press and hold pushbutton R until the locking pins are fully inserted.
 The buzzer sounds.
 The symbol “Quick changer” appears on screen.
 The quick-change adapter is unlocked.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 107

MJFCIFSS
Index
Taking up the work tool:
Fig. 3-106 Taking up the work tool, first step
 Move the quick-change adapter into a position that allows the work tool to be
picked up using the take-up hook.
Fig. 3-107 Taking up the work tool, secondary step
 Raise the work tool from the ground and extend the shovel tilting cylinder fully until
the bearing panel for the work tool is laying on the quick-change adapter stop.
 The bore holes of the work tool and the locking pins of the quick-change
adapter must align.
To lock the quick-change adapter:

 Press and hold pushbutton L until the locking pins are fully removed.
 The buzzer goes off.
 The symbol “Quick changer” disappears from the screen.
 The quick-change adapter is locked.
 The work tool is bolted on when taking up correctly.
 Release button S47.
 Quick-change adapter is deactivated.

Caution!
 Remove the pressure using the joystick before connecting the hydraulic lines
joystick).
3 - 108 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Connect hydraulic lines or electrical lines, if necessary. (eg. when attaching a

grab).
 A direct visual check must be made to ensure that the work tool is correctly
positioned.
A “working cycle” should also be performed with the work tool.
This means that the work tool should be raised before use to the point at which the
correct positioning of, for example, the pin in the pin eye, can be checked by tilting in
and out.
Danger!
The electronic monitoring system for the quick-change adapter displays defective
functions. These could be caused by an unmonitored position change of the locking
pins or by mechanical or hydraulic damage. A defect may also be present in the
electrical system (eg. proximity switch or buzzer).
 If the buzzer and telltale light are activated without a deliberate locking or
unlocking procedure being carried out, stop all work at once.
 If the buzzer and telltale light are not activated while a deliberate locking or
unlocking procedure is being carried out, stop all work at once.
 Only resume working once defective parts have been repaired or replaced.
 Performing the working cycle

 Before starting to use the work tool (eg. grab, ditcher bucket), the special
installation information in the chapter “Attaching and dismounting equipment
parts” is also to be noted.
Detaching a work tool
Caution!
 Remove the pressure using the joystick before removing the hydraulic lines
joystick).
 Disconnect hydraulic lines or electrical lines, if necessary (eg. when dismounting

a grab).
 Extend the shovel tilting cylinder fully.

Fig. 3-108 To unlock the quick-change adapter
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 109

MJFCIFSS
Index
Danger!
Risk of injury!
Once unlocked, there is no fixed connection between the adapter and the work tool.
The work tool could work itself out independently.
 Always keep the work tool as close to the ground as possible when unlocking to
avoid creating conditions which may lead to danger.

 Press and hold pushbutton R until the locking pins are fully inserted.
 The buzzer sounds.
 The symbol “Quick changer” appears on screen.
 The quick-change adapter is unlocked.
To put down the work tool:
Fig. 3-109 Putting down the work tool
 Slowly insert the shovel tilting cylinder and lay the work tool on the ground.
 The new work tool can be taken up.
Using the quick-change adapter for lifting work

Fig. 3-110 Hydraulic quick-change adapter
The quick-change adapter has two integrated lifting hooks. The machine may only
be used for hoisting work if the safety devices required for the purpose are present
and functioning correctly (see chapter “Hoisting work” or “Overload warning device”).
The maximum load carrying capacity of each individual lifting hook is given on the
quick-change adapter. The load carrying capacity of the quick-change adapter or the
3 - 110 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
integrated lifting hook can exceed or fall short of the load carrying capacity of the
carrier device.
When operating, it should be ensured that the values for the carrier device / quick-
change adapter given in the load chart and the technical data are adhered to.
Load hoisting work can be carried out with attached or dismounted work tools. With
dismounted work tools, it is sensible to fully insert the locking pins when carrying out
hoisting work. This prevents the load take-up device being turned round too strongly
by the locking pins and damaged.
Danger!
 Never use the take-up hook 6 to fasten a load because there is no secure hold
for the load take-up device, eg. rope or chains, in the take-up hook.
 Before using for hoisting work, deactivate the quick-change adapter.
 LED in switch S19 has gone out.
 Release button S47.
To cancel the buzzer (warning tone)

The symbol “Quick changer” on screen and the buzzer (warning tone) indicate that
the quick-change adapter is not locked or is incorrectly locked.
After putting down the work tool, the buzzer (warning tone) continues to sound if the
locking pins are not removed.
When the overload warning device is switched on, the warning tone for the quick-
change adapter can be cancelled.
If no new work tool is to be taken up, it is sensible to switch off the warning tone so
avoid constant noise disturbance. Also, another buzzer (overload warning device)
can be heard more easily.
 The buzzer will switch off.
 The symbol “Quick changer” on screen will continue to be displayed.
 The acoustic warning device will only activate automatically once the locking
pins have been removed again.
 To reactivate the warning tone for the quick-change adapter, remove the locking
pins fully once until the “Quick changer” symbol goes out on screen.
 The buzzer (warning tone) for monitoring the quick-change adapter is
reactivated.
General working methods
3.5.3 Minimum impact working methods for your machine

To increase the service life of the machine and avoid unnecessary damage and the
resulting repairs, please note the following points:
– Do not stop the rotary motion of the upper carriage when slewing into a ditch by
stopping the equipment on the walls of the ditch.
– Using the machine for applications where the equipment is knocked against the
material to be removed, in the longitudinal direction too, is not permitted. Repeat-
edly hitting the work equipment against rock or other hard material will damage
steel parts and machine components.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 111

MJFCIFSS
Index
– With specific combinations of boom, stanchion and work tool, the work tool could
hit or break through into the cab. This could damage the cab and injure the ma-
chine’s operator.
– Do not attach buckets which are too big or side cutters when using the machine
in rocky material. This will extend the work cycles and could result in damage to
the bucket and other machine components.
– Please contact your LIEBHERR contractual partner if special teeth are required
for heavy or special applications.
– Operating the drag bearing to bore into material is not permitted.
– Do not raise the machine when working. If this should occur, slowly lower the ma-
chine to the ground. Do not permit the machine to lower quickly and do not inter-
cept the falling movement using the hydraulics, since this could result in damage
to the machine.
3.5.4 Preparatory activities
Danger!
Risk of fatal injury and damage to the machine when working.
 Observe the safety information “Notes for safe working” at the start of these op-
Fig. 3-111 Working position – machine
 Position the machine so that the load or grab material can be taken up above the
rigid axle or the leading wheel.
 For mobile devices, lower the support when possible and lock the full floating axle.
Danger!
Insufficient support and machine damage.
Do not use a skimming shield to support the machine.
3 - 112 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-112 Safe working
Danger!
Risk of fatal injury due to rotating the machine.
 Ensure that nobody stands within the danger area r of the machine.
Caution!
Risk of injury when working.
 Always wear safety shoes and, particularly when leaving the cab when demoli-
tion work is going on, a protective helmet and goggles.
 Always wear the seat belt.
 Use the horn to give a short warning signal before starting work.
3.5.5 Working with the hoe type bucket
Danger!
Risk of fatal injury and damage to the machine when moving the hoe type bucket.
 Ensure that the hoe type bucket is not slewed too close to the cab.
 The hoe type bucket could damage the cab and injure the machine’s opera-
tor.
 Ensure that nobody is standing within the danger area of the hoe type bucket.
 The machine must be in the working position.

Fig. 3-113 Aligning the shovel arm and hoe type bucket
 Align the shovel arm in such a way that its underside is at an angle of approx. 45°
to the ground.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 113

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Align the hoe type bucket in such a way that its ground side can enter the ground
at an angle of approx. 90°.
Fig. 3-114 Taking up grab material
 To lift out the grab material, slowly and evenly slew in the shovel arm and slowly
and evenly slew in the hoe type bucket simultaneously.
 As soon as the shovel arm is perpendicular to the ground, raise the boom slowly
and evenly in addition to slewing in the shovel arm and the hoe type bucket. Stop-
ping suddenly will result in impact loads and vibrations.
Fig. 3-115 Raising grab material
 When the hoe type bucket is full or the shovel arm can no longer be slewed in,
raise the boom and hoe type bucket until the filled surface is parallel to the
ground.
3.5.6 Loading the transport vehicle
Danger!
Risk of fatal injury due to falling grab material.
 Do not load the transport vehicle so high that the grab material could drop out
over the walls of the vehicle.

 Ensure that nobody is standing in the danger area or in the transport vehicle
when loading.
 Do not slew the equipment over the driver’s cab.
3 - 114 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-116 Emptying grab material
 If possible, the machine should stand higher than the transport vehicle to avoid
having to lift the grab material unnecessarily.
 Stop the transport vehicle in a position that allows it to be loaded from the rear or
the side.
 Slew the machine's equipment above the loading area of the transport vehicle.
 Distribute the grab material evenly over the loading area of the transport vehicle
by slewing the hoe type bucket and shovel arm out, slewing the upper carriage
and possibly also moving the boom.
 If the hoe type bucket is not sufficiently emptied or there is still grab material in
the hoe type bucket, slew the hoe type bucket in and out several times to loosen
the grab material.
3.5.7 Working with the Shovel bucket
Digging
To maximise machine power and breakout, maintain grade and fill the bucket, correct
digging angles and technique should be used.
Fig. 3-117 Digging
 Most digging should be started with the bucket almost fully crowded back (50mm
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 115

MJFCIFSS
Index
off stops or end of cylinders).

 When cleaning up or digging at floor level, angle the teeth aggressively to break
out any toe that may be encountered.
 Keeping the heel of the bucket off the ground therefore creating a void under the
rear of the bucket.
 Operate with the teeth and bucket lip doing all the work.
Note!
Avoid digging at right angles to the tracks.
Caution!
 Each time the stick is crowded back to commence a cut, extreme caution must
be taken not to hit the tracks.
 The clam must always be closed when digging, although don’t slam it shut.
Avoid working on the cylinder limits and bucket stops during the digging cycle.
Continual use of these practises will lead to premature failure of seals and O-
rings and can cause stress fractures to the clam, stick and bucket and damage
to the boom and superstructure.
 Crowd the bucket in (down) while closing the clam. This practise makes use of
gravity to help minimise shock loading on the bucket cylinders.
 Never dig, or attempt to bring down any material overhang, with the bucket while
the clam is open or partly open.
 Do not attempt to dig or clean the floor or face with the clam open. These prac-
tises can cause considerable damage to the clam cylinders.
Unload the bucket
Fig. 3-118 Unloading of the bucket
When dumping the load, tip the bucket forward slightly as the clam opens. This helps
direct the material to fall centrally into the tray ans avoids spillage.
The position of the bucket backboard when the clam opens, directly affects the posi-
tion of the load in the tray.
3 - 116 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Bucket in ideal position resulting in material falling straight down. Loading centre of
the haul truck.
3.5.8 Working with the clamshell bucket (construction equipment)
Danger!
Risk of fatal injury and damage to the machine due to a swinging shell type bucket.
 Ensure that the shell type bucket does not swing too close to the cab.
 The shell type bucket could damage the cab when swinging and injure the
machine’s operator.
 Ensure that the shell type bucket does not swing towards anyone in the working
area.
 The shell type bucket could injure people standing in the vicinity when swing-
ing.
 Move the joystick slowly and evenly to prevent the shell type bucket swinging.
 Hold the stanchion in such a way that the shell type bucket cannot swing to-
wards the machine when driving or braking.
 Do not lift a load with the boom and stanchion extended too far and do not slew
a heavy load too far to the left or right.
 The stability of the machine could be affected.
Fig. 3-119 Straightening the stanchion
 Open the grab shells fully.

 Lower the stanchion perpendicular to the excavation area.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 117

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-120 Closing the grab shells
 Close the grab shells.

 Raise the stanchion slightly when doing this in order to reduce ground pressure.
Danger!
The device could lift out when closing the shell type bucket.
Fig. 3-121 Raising grab material
 Close the grab shells fully.

 Raise the boom.
 Move the machine to the unloading area (eg. transport vehicle).
3 - 118 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-122 Emptying grab material
 Slew the stanchion out as far as possible to prevent any risk due to the swinging
grab.
 Open the grab shells, empty the grab material.
3.5.9 Hoisting work

Hoisting work is understood as being lifting, transporting and unloading loads using
a securing method (rope, chain etc.) and where personnel are required to assist in
securing and unloading the load. This includes, for example, the lifting and unloading
of pipes, shaft-top supporting rings or containers.
Danger!
The machine may only be operated for hoisting work if the prescribed safety devic-
es are present and functioning correctly.
Machines used for hoisting work must be equipped with the following safety devices,
in accordance with European standard EN 474-5:
– Load take-up device for safe securing of a load (optional extra)
Safe take-up devices include for example lifting hooks which are mounted in
place of the bucket. Lifting hooks can also be replaced with safety hooks welded
to the bucket.
– Overload warning device (optional extra)
The overload warning device must alert the machine operator visually or acousti-
cally if the permitted load value according to the load chart has been reached or
exceeded.
– Line break fuse on the hydraulic jacks (optional extra)
The line break fuse must correspond with the requirements of ISO 8643.
– Load chart inside the cab.
If the points referred to above are not or are only partially fulfilled, the machine
may not be used for hoisting work.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 119

MJFCIFSS
Index
3.5.10 Working with the hydraulic hammer

Please also refer to the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
hydraulic hammer.
sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssss
Danger!
The hydraulic hammer must be selected very carefully. Operating requires in-
creased care and attention.
 Only use hydraulic hammers approved by LIEBHERR.
 The use of a hydraulic hammer not approved by LIEBHERR could damage
steel parts or other machine components.
 Only use the hydraulic hammer to break up rocks, concrete and other breakable
objects.
 To avoid damaging the machine, do not try to break up rocks or concrete by
moving the lever on the work equipment or by the hydraulic hammer.
 Do not use the drop power of the hydraulic hammer to break up rocks or other
objects. Do not move objects with the hydraulic hammer. Do not lift the machine
when using the hydraulic hammer.
 This could damage both the hydraulic hammer and the machine.
 Do not use the hydraulic hammer to lift objects.
 Only use the hydraulic hammer in the machine’s longitudinal direction.
 Do not operate the hydraulic hammer in the direction of the machine, since ex-
ploding rocks or concrete could damage the machine and / or injure the driver.
 Close all windows in the cab before working.
Fig. 3-123 Hydraulic hammer
 The machine must be positioned in the working position on level, solid ground.
 The stanchion may not stand vertically.
 No cylinder may be fully taken in or extended.

 Do not operate the hydraulic hammer on the same spot continually or for longer
than 15 seconds.
 Overly continual operation of the hydraulic hammer leads to the hydraulic oil
overheating unnecessarily.
 Change the position of the machine and resume hammering work.
3 - 120 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-124 Permissible A and not permissible B work areas of the machine with hy-
draulic hammer
Danger!
The stability of the machine could be affected.
When using a hydraulic hammer, only work with the machine in area A.
3.5.11 Working with the grapple (industrial equipment)

Fig. 3-125 Taking up the load
 Take the load up above the supported corners of the machine to attain maximum
stability.
 The maximum lifting capacity is attained when the load is taken up as close to the
chassis as possible.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 121

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 3-126 Transporting a load
 Transport the load close to the chassis, but with sufficient safety distance to the
cab (swinging grab!) and as close to the ground as possible.
Caution!
Particularly when loading wood, it can be necessary when working with a grab to
move with the working equipment raised and the load taken up. This will shift the
centre of gravity of the machine upwards. The way the machine drives will be neg-
atively affected because of this.
 Please note the safety information “Use for loading work” at the beginning of
3.5.12 Skimming
Skimming work can either be carried out using the bucket or with a skimming shield
(optional extra).
Fig. 3-127 Skimming

 The support should be raised.
3 - 122 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
Danger!
Serious risk of injury when moving the machine.
 Ensure that nobody is standing within the working area of the machine.
Caution!
The machine could be damaged.
 Never move the machine while the work equipment is touching the ground.
 To skim with a hoe type bucket, lay this on the ground (see Fig. 3-127) and move
the stanchion slowly forwards and backwards. Move the boom steadily up and
down while the stanchion is moving.
 If a skimming shield is present (optional extra), lower it to the ground and move
slowly forwards and backwards with the machine.
3.6 Transport
Transporting the machine safely

– Due to transport restrictions, use only suitable means of transport and lifting de-
vices with sufficient load-carrying capacity.
– Park the machine on a flat surface and wedge the crawler or wheels securely.
– If required, detach a part of the machine’s working equipment during transporta-
tion.
– The ramp used to drive the machine up onto the flatbed trailer should not exceed
an inclination of the angle value indicated in the "Technical data" section of this
manual (machine must be able to walk up unaided) and should have a wooden
cover to prevent sliding back.
– The undercarriage undercarriage should be swept clean, i.e. before driving up the
ramp, clean any snow, ice and mud from the crawler / wheels of the machine.
– Align the machine precisely with the loading ramp.
– Attach the hand lever for fine-tune driving (crawler excavator) onto the accelerator
pedals.
– Ensure that a spotter gives the machine operator the required signal.
– Prepare the placing block to ensure against rolling back when the machine is driv-
ing up onto the flatbed.
– Tilt the equipment up and drive up the loading ramp. While doing this, always hold
the equipment securely over the loading area, drive very carefully up the ramp
and onto the transportation vehicle.
– Rotate the upper structure carefully to the rear and lower the equipment. Due to
restrictions during transport on hoe equipment, tilt the arm in and dismantle the
bucket during transportation.
– After loading the machine onto the flatbed trailer, the upper structure must be se-
cured facing the undercarriage using the stop bolts (only A devices).
– Secure the undercarriage and the remaining individual parts using chains and
blocks to prevent slipping.
– Before you leave the machine, reduce pressure on all pressure lines, remove the
ignition key and tilt up the safety lever.
– Lock all cab and panel doors.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 123

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
– Before transportation, find out all details about the route to be travelled, particu-
larly as they relate to width, height and weight restrictions.
– Pay particular attention when driving under electrical lines and bridges and
through tunnels.
– When unloading the machine, take the same amount of care as was taken when
it was loaded. Remove all chains and blocks. Start the engine as per the operating
instructions. Drive carefully off the trailer’s loading area and down the ramp. Hold
the working equipment as securely as possible over the ground while doing this.
Have a spotter guide you.
3.6.1 Transporting the machine on a low loader

Hin
Note
Respect the respective local legal circulation rules and safety instructions of profes-
sion corporations and in case adapt the machine, its transportation means, loading
and fasten materials befor into the local legal permitted state.
Preparatory activities
Before driving onto the low loader, the following arrangements must be made :
Fig. 3-128 Loading ramp
 The ramp inclination must be flatter than the machine’s given hill climbing ability.
Ramp inclination angle W < = 30°.
 Have the chocks ready.
 Lay down and secure wooden planks carefully on the steel surface of the ramp.
 Clean any ice, snow or mud off the crawlers before starting to drive up the ramp.
Loading the machine onto the low loader
To drive the machine up onto the low loader :

Fig. 3-129 Driving up onto the low loader
1 Leading wheel 2 Tumbler wheel
 The machine must be driven up on to the low loader with the leading wheel 1 lead-
ing. For this, the upper carriage must be rotated 180°.
3 - 124 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
Danger!
If the upper carriage is rotated 180° to the chassis, the driving and steering direc-
tions are reversed.
 Drive and steer with increased caution.
 For sensitive driving, insert the lever which is found in the tool kit into the pedals
for the drive units.
 Align the machine precisely to the loading ramp.
 Drive the machine onto the low loader.
Note
Note
Have a signaller provide the necessary signs.
 Rotate the upper carriage carefully 180° (direction of travel over leading wheel)
and lower the equipment (see Fig. 3-130).
Fig. 3-130 Transport position - machine

 Turn the ignition key to the contact position and relieve pressure lines by moving
the joystick carefully several times.
 Remove the ignition key and push the safety lever up.
 Close and lock all doors, covers and panels on the machine.
Note
Note
If necessary, remove the attachments from the excavator for the duration of the
transport.
To secure the machine :

The machine must be secured against slipping before starting the journey.
Fig. 3-131 To secure the machine
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 125

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
Danger!
Serious accidents can happen if the machine is allowed to slip on the loading ramp.
 Secure the machine against slipping.
 To do this, use chocks and a tension cable or tension chains.
 Secure the machine at the points provided for the purpose using tension cables
or tension chains (see Fig. 3-131). The loading points are identified on plate 45
on the chassis.
 Secure tension cables and tension chains on the low loader according to type.
Transport route
Danger
Danger!
Driving beneath obstacles which are too low can cause serious accidents.
 Drive under obstacles, particularly electrical lines, with increased caution.
 Find out about the route to be travelled before starting the journey.
3.6.2 Loading the machine with a crane

If the machine is to be loaded using a crane (eg. onto ships or rail freight cars), the
type of suspension should be selected according to the equipment.
Danger!
The load could slip or fall if incorrectly loaded.
 Only permit experienced personnel to secure loads and signal the crane driver.
 The signaller must position himself within the view of the operator or be in voice
contact with him.
 Ensure that the length of the suspension gear is sufficient.
Loading a machine with a gooseneck boom :
Fig. 3-132 Suspending the machine with gooseneck boom
 Only use cargo handling gear which is sufficiently dimensioned or which has been
specially developed by LIEBHERR for this purpose.
3 - 126 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
 Lower the equipment, draw in the stanchion and tip the bucket as far as the stop.
 Turn the ignition key to the contact position and relieve pressure lines by moving
the joystick carefully several times.
 Remove the ignition key and push the safety lever up.
 Close and lock all doors, covers and panels on the machine.
 Attach the cargo handling gear to the points provided for the purpose.
Danger!
Standing under the raised machine is not permitted!
 Raise the machine carefully with the crane and load.

 When restarting the machine, proceed only in accordance with the operating and
maintenance instructions.
3.6.3 Travelling procedures for mining machine

The life expectancy of undercarriage components is based on standard working con-
ditions with a maximum travel ratio of 5% per service meter unit. Working and / or
travelling on uneven ground and / or abrassive material will influence the lifetime of
the components and attract additional cost for the undercarriage components.
In general travel action has to be kept to the lowest level that is possible. Minimize
travelling with turning through a narrow turning circle and long distance travel.
To minimize the travel ratio, professional mine planning with longfront winning sec-
tions is preferred. If digging operations at various spots are necessary, a proper short
term and long term plan of winning operations has to be employed to guarantee long
term use of the excavator at one place before moving to another location.
However, if frequent machine movement is necessary, the following set of proce-
dures defined by LIEBHERR to minimize possible machine damage, downtime and
wear have to be taken into consideration.
General
In order to move the machine forwards : with the excavator in standard forward po-
sition, depress travel pedals all the way forward with the toes. Direction of travel is in
the direction of idlers.
In order to move the machine backwards : with the excavator in standard forward po-
sition, depress travel pedals all the way down with the heels. Direction of travel is in
direction of the drive sprockets.
Moving the machine during loading operations

Moving the machine during loading operations means adjustment of excavator dig-
ging and / or truck loading position of some meters.
Important procedures
– Before moving the machine, empty the bucket and close up the attachment to a
position as close as possible to the excavator undercarriage.
– The practice of placing the attachment on the ground and lifting the machine, then
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 127

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
counter turning the undercarriage, is not allowed, because it could cause prema-
ture structural damage to the machine.
– If there is a build up of material around the tracks where the machine will not turn,
you must move the machine several meters forwards and / or backwards and at-
tempt to turn again.
– If mine safety regulations allow, the operator can use the swing function to assist
in turning the tracks, i.e. if turning to the right, swing upper deck to the left and vice
versa.
Walking the machine over distance
Fig. 3-133 Hazard area r
Walking the machine distances means any movement of the machine of more than
100 m or for a time period longer than 3 minutes, whatever comes first.
In addition to above mentioned guidelines, when moving the machine during loading
operations, the following procedures apply :
– It is required to have somebody standby with a heat gun, to monitor the temper-
ature of the drive components, including the track and carrier rollers.
Danger!
The person which is checking the temperature of the different rollers must always
be out of the hazard area r of the machine during its movement.
For the checking of the temperature, the excavator should stop moving. And only
when the excavator is stopped, the person could go in the hazard area r to check
the temperature of the different rollers.
The machine could only start moving again when the driver has seen the operator
out of the hazard area r.
– If temperature of any moving part is growing up about 20°C above ambiant tem-
perature, interrupt travel and only commence again after parts have sufficiently
cooled.
– To prevent overheating during travelling or to speed up cooling procedure it is ad-
visable to have a water truck standby, to hose the heating components during
travelling or cooling break.

– Move with idler and attachment forwards. Whenever possible, and not to contra-
vene with mine safety regulations, swing whilst travelling to equally load track roll-
ers. However, always ensure that clear forward vision is maintained.
Travelling the machine down grades or upgrades

In addition to above mentioned guidelines, when moving the machine during loading
operations or when walking the machine distances, the following procedures apply :
3 - 128 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
– When travelling down grades greater than ten percent, it would be better to walk
the machine down with the track motor first, i.e. the machine is moved backwards.
– When travelling up an incline, the final drives must be at the rear of the excavator.
– When walking down from a bench, firstly prepare a ramp. Respect the angle value
indicated in the "Technical data" section of this manual (machine must be able to
walk up unaided). When moving down the ramp never allow the machine to fall
down on the attachment. When walking up the ramp never use attachment to as-
sist the movement by pushing with the hydraulic power of the bucket, stick or
boom.
Travelling the machine first time

The slide bearing (friction bearing) of the track rollers needs some time for running-
in. If the bearing becomes hot at an early stage of machine life, this may cause lubri-
cation problems during further life. Therefore when travelling the machine the first
time aside from all above mentioned guidelines it is strongly recommended to move
carefully and at reduced speed.
Note!
Warranty may become void if failure to recognize and comply with the recommend-
ed travel operating procedures, as outlined in this document, is noted.
3.6.4 Excavator lifting and lashing operations
Danger!
For safety reasons, always consider the precautions given in this section.
Lifting precautions
Lift element:
– always checking and respecting the lifting configuration indicated on the corre-
sponding transport drawing,
– only with the provided lifting appliances,
– with adequate and approved lifting devices of other kind (cables, chains, slings)
if necessary,
– only after mounting the lifting appliances in accordance with the regulations,
– only at the declared threads or lugs shown on the assembly drawing,
– with the best possible equal load distribution,
– only being sure that the lifted element has been already dismounted,
– only after having drained tanks (hydraulic, fuel…),
– if no specific value is indicated on the corresponding transport drawing, always
respecting the angles given on the figure bellow:

•  < 60°
•  < 30°
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 129

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
Fig. 3-134 Lifting angles
Lashing precautions
Fig. 3-135 Lashing angles
A Diagonally lashing
B Cross-diagonally lashing
1 Load 4 Transversal axis
2 Lashing chain 5 Longitudinal axis
3 Vertical axis 6 Loading plane
Lash element:
– always checking and respecting the lashing configuration indicated on the corre-
sponding transport drawing,
– if no specific value is indicated on the corresponding transport drawing, always
respecting the angles given on the figure above:
• 0°    50°
• 25°  x  50°
– always ensuring a sufficient coefficient of friction (0,2 or higher) between load and
3 - 130 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
supporting surface so as to avoid element to slip (i.e. using wooden parts, non-
slip mats...).
Transport drawings
The following drawings indicate the different lashing and lifting points on the ele-
ments of the excavator. Weight (with and without transport tooling and packaging),
overall dimensions as well as gravity center are also given.
The aim of these drawings is to ensure safe operation during transport, handling and
storage.
Note!
The lashing and lifting points are indicated on the concerned elements of the exca-
vator by specifics labels (see § "Signs on the machine"). To be easily recognized,
lifting points are painted in yellow (in red if excavator is yellow) as well.
Danger!
The lifting points given on a transport drawing for an element are designed to lift this
element only and nothing else.
 Never lift an assembly of several elements by the lifting points of only one of
these elements.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 3 - 131

MJFCIFSS
Index
Transport
3 - 132 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Operating Manual Malfunctions
4 Malfunctions
Warning messages and fault messages:

– Various faults are displayed on screen in the form of indicator lights or symbols
(see chapter “Control and operating elements”).
– Warning functions can also be supported acoustically (buzzer).
Identifying and rectifying faults and errors:
– Faults can very often be traced back to incorrect operating or maintenance of the
machine.
For each fault, therefore, read the relevant chapter in the operating instruc-
tions carefully once more.
– Analyse the cause of the fault and rectify it immediately.
– Describe the fault and all accompanying circumstances as precisely as possible
if you contact LIEBHERR customer service.
Precise information makes it possible to find and rectify the cause of the fault
quickly. Additionally, therefore, precise information on the type and serial number
of the machine is also required.
– Do not carry out any work which you have not been trained to do.
Fig. 4-1 LIEBHERR service
If the cause of the fault cannot be recognised or rectified using the error codes
and fault charts, please consult LIEBHERR customer service.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 4-1

MJFCIFSS
Index
Malfunctions Operating Manual
Error code charts
4.1 Error code charts
Danger!
When switching over to emergency operation, the speed can no longer be changed
using the arrow keys on the monitoring screen. The servo control, parking brake
and swing gear brake can no longer be activated.
 Please also note the subheading “Emergency operations” in the chapter “Oper-
ating the machine” in this regard.
Error code Effect Cause Measure / remedy

E 004 Engine coolant level Short circuit to earth Check engine coolant level.
E 005 Short circuit + 24 V
E 006 Cable break
E 010 Hydraulic oil level not being Short circuit to earth Check hydraulic oil level.
E 011 monitored. Short circuit + 24 V
E 012 Cable break
E 013 Hydraulic oil temperature not Short circuit to earth Check that the radiator is not dirty.
E 014 being monitored. Short circuit + 24 V
E 015 Cable break
E 016 Gear oil temperature Short circuit to earth Check gear oil temperature.
E 018 Cable break
E 022 Diesel engine RPM Short circuit to earth
E 024 Cable break
E 027 Solenoid valve for power con- Cable break
trol (LR)
E 033 Solenoid valve for cooler fan Cable break
regulation (EV5)
E 036 Solenoid valve for flow con- Cable break
trol (hydraulic pump 1) EV1
E 039 Solenoid valve for flow con- Cable break
trol (hydraulic pump 1) EV2
E 042 Solenoid valve - Reserve Cable break
(EV3)
E 045 Solenoid valve - Pressure op- Cable break
erate (EV6)
E 068 Fan RPM Fan RPM defective

E 302 Keyboard No coding plug
E 303 Keyboard No CAN bus connection to
BST
E 305 Keyboard No CAN bus connection to
ESP01 board
E 308 Display No connection between
keyboard and display
4-2 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Faults and remedies
Error code Effect Cause Measure / remedy

E 309 Display No Software compatibility
between keyboard and
display
E 319 BST No compatibility between
hardware coding and soft-
ware coding
E 321 BST No reception of recog-
nised machine typ by BBT
E 322 BST Unknown Hardware cod-
ing
E 442 Joystick left Short circuit + 24 V
E 443 Short circuit to earth or
Cable break
E 445 Joystick right Short circuit + 24 V
Cable break
E 450 The pressure for pressure- Cable break
less boom down movement
not being monitored.
E 454 Rotation gear speed Short circuit + 24 V
Cable break
E 456 Fuel tank sensor Short circuit + 24 V
Cable break
4.2 Faults and remedies
4.2.1 Diesel engine and fuel system
Fault / error Cause Solution

Diesel engine does not start Fuel tank almost or completely emp- Fill tank and vent fuel system
ty
Low pressure in tank Remove fuel filler cap
Fuel filter dirty Clean or change filter and vent fuel

system, drain fuel / clean tank
Outside temperature below 0°C For operation under specific climatic
conditions, see operating instruc-
tions
Starter motor not drawing through Check line connections, overhaul
starter motor
Batteries have no power Charge / replace
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 4-3

MJFCIFSS
Index
Faults and remedies

Engine starts but stops immediately Fuel tank empty (low pressure in Fill tank and vent fuel system
after or runs irregularly tank)
Fuel filter dirty Clean or change filter and vent fuel
system (tank)
Particularly in winter: too viscous Use engine oil suitable for the out-
engine oil used side temperature
Dry-air filter dirty Clean or change main filter element
Air in fuel system Vent fuel system
Ventilation in fuel tank obstructed Clean
Fuel line bent Check line and repair if required
Diesel engine emitting grey or black Dry-air filter dirty Clean or change filter
smoke
Diesel engine continually emitting Water in combustion chamber Consult customer service
while smoke (steam)
Diesel engine does not reach full Speed adjustment not set to maxi- Set speed adjustment to maximum
speed mum value value
Injection system is set incorrectly Consult customer service
Dry-air filter dirty Clean or replace filter
Bad fuel supply Clean or change fuel filter, check
lines, drain water from tank
Diesel engine becomes too hot Too little coolant Fill coolant, check for leaks
Water pump defective Repair
Thermostats do not work Change thermostats
Coolant contaminated Clean coolant
Diesel engine has insufficient oil Oil level too low Correct oil level
pressure Oil pressure display faulty Change oil pressure switch
Note!
Switch off diesel engine immediate-
ly
Diesel engine consumes too much External leak on diesel engine Retighten screws, replace seals if
oil required
Oil in coolant or coolant in oil Consult customer service
Unusual noise / sounddevelopment Exhaust system leaking Check exhaust system / repair
on exhaust side
4.2.2 Hydraulic system


Unusual noise / sounddevelopment Shutoff valve on hydraulic tank Open stop cock
at hydraulic pumps closed
Note! Hydraulic pumps taking in air Check oil level in hydraulic tank,
Switch off diesel engine immediate- check intake lines for leaks
ly
Modes E and P showing lack of No power adjustment via propor- Unplug cable of Y50 connection, re-
power tional solenoid valve Y50 move safety cotter pin, move lever
to emergency setting
4-4 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Faults and remedies

Hydraulic oil temperature too high Radiator cores dirty Clean radiator cores
Fan or fan control defective Rectify error / consult customer
service
Hydraulic oil level too low Oil loss Repair leaks, exchange hoses, refill
oil via return-line filter
Cannot drive Push the safety lever up Push the safety lever down
No direction of travel preselected Use drive selection switch in right
joystick to determine direction of
travel
Parking brake pressure switch de- Consult customer service
fective
Parking brake not released Release parking brake using switch
Parking brake will not release de- Servo pressure present:
spite switch being operated Operate emergency function Y6
Servo pressure not present:
Consult customer service
Service brake engaged Release service brake
Slewing gear not functioning No servo control Push the safety lever down
Switch on servo control
Slewing gear brake activated Push the safety lever down
Release slewing gear brake
No working movement No servo control Push the safety lever down
Switch on servo control
No servo pressure present Consult customer service
No pump high pressure present Consult customer service
4.2.3 Transmission

Oil flowing out on track rollers, sup- Seal defective Replace seal
port rollers or leading wheel
Insufficient crawler tracking on lead- Leading wheel tracking on track roll- Adjust the leading wheel tracking
ing wheel er mounting has too much play play
Crawler jumps off or over Crawler tension too low / crawler Adjust crawler tension
wheel worn
Correctly tensioned crawler losing Crawler tensioning cylinder defec- Check crawler tensioning cylinder,
tension quickly during use tive change if required or seal (only au-
thorized specialist personnel)

Track roller or support roller sticking Running gear extremely dirty Clean running gear
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 4-5

MJFCIFSS
Index
Faults and remedies
4.2.4 Electrical system

Battery charge telltale light does not Drive belt for alternator loose or torn Tension or replace drive belt
goes out Alternator defective Replace alternator
Batteries do not charge or charge Batteries defective Replace batteries
poorly Battery connections dirty / oxidised Clean battery connections
Cable loose or damaged Connect or replace cable
Telltale light or display instrument Bulb burnt out, display instrument Replace defective part
not functioning or functioning incor- defective
rectly
Some or all functions on instrument Plug connector separated or dam- Mount plug connector correctly or
panel drop out aged, earth lead interrupted, short change, rectify short circuit, replace
circuit fuse defective fuse or activate overload cut-outs
Diesel speed adjustment via operat- Automatic idling switch S20 is acti- Touch the joystick or deactivate au-
ing keypad (mode and arrow keys) vated tomatic idling switch S20.
not functioning Excavator speed adjustment elec- Switch the emergency function over
tronics do not function from “AUTO” to “MANU” using
No signal emits from speed sensor switch S71 in the right control panel.
B12 Set speed using switch S72. Emer-
gency function display appears on
monitoring screen. Consult custom-
er service.
Automatic idling not functioning, Permanent sensor signal Consult customer service
speed does not reduce Switch S20 is deactivated Activate switch S20
Servo control cannot be activated Excavator electrics faulty Switch on emergency function using
using switch switch S73 in the right control panel
Parking brake cannot be released Caution: Servo circuit and brake cir-
using switch cuit can only be switched off using
the safety lever. Keypad not func-
Slewing gear brake cannot be re- tioning. Consult customer service.
leased using switch
4.2.5 Work equipment

Cylinder stretches when loaded Piston seal in cylinder defective Overhaul cylinder
Bearing clearance too high on Bearing points worn out Replace bearing parts
equipment
Grab / bucket does not move Valve block on tilting cylinder incor- Switch over valve block
rectly switched
Add-on unit cannot be turned / rotat- Auxiliary function has not been re- Release auxiliary function using
ed / operated leased switch S19
Lines are not connected Connect lines
4-6 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Faults and remedies
4.2.6 Heating/air-conditioning system

Heating not giving out warm air Shutoff valves for coolant line on Open shutoff valve
diesel engine closed
Engine not at operating temperature Bring engine to operating tempera-
ture
Heating fan does not operate No power supply Check fuse and wiring / repair
Fan motor defective Change fan motor
Only low air flow in cab Outside air filter / recirculated air fil- Clean air intake opening, replace
ter dirty outside air filter
Air vent closed Open air vent
In addition, the troubleshooting in the heater and airconditioning circuit is facilitated

by the upcoming of error codes in the display area of the heater/airco operation unit.
These error codes inform upon the possible troubles on given components in the op-
eration and control circuits of the heater airco/plant. They are listed below:
Error code “F0“ faulty room temperature gauge:
The control unit has recognised a faulty room temperature gauge, the regulation is
no longer ready for operation.
Cause of gauge error: short-circuit or interruption of gauge power supply line, de-
fecive plug connection on gauge or on control unit, or temperature gauge faulty.
The heater / airco regulator is then only ready for operation again when the fault of
the gauge has been remedied, the gauge error will then no longer be displayed!
Should a gauge error occur, the regulator continues to operate to the setting which
was valid before the fault was recognised
Error code “F1“ faulty blow-out temperature gauge:

The control unit has recognised a faulty blow-out temperature gauge, the regulation
is no longer ready for operation.
fective plug connection on gauge or on control unit, or temperature gauge faulty.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 4-7

MJFCIFSS
Index
Faults and remedies
Error code “F2“ faulty reserve temperature gauge:
The control unit has recognised a faulty reserve temperature gauge, the regulation
is no longer ready for operation.
fective plug connection on gauge or on control unit, or temperature gauge faulty.
Error code “F3“ faulty vent flap foot room area and front window:
The control unit has recognised a faulty vent flap in the air duct to the front window
and foot area, the regulation is once again ready for operation.
Cause of flap fault: short-circuit or interruption of the power supply line, defective
plug connection on flap motor or on control unit, or flap motor faulty.
After remedying of the fault, the fault is no longer displayed.
Should a flap error occur, the regulator carries on working as usual, only the middle
position of the vent flap can no longer be started
Error code “F4“ pressure fault and faulty magnetic coupling:

The control unit has recognised a faulty vent flap room area and front window, the
regulation is once again ready for operation.
Cause of flap fault: short-circuit or interruption of the power supply line, plug con-
nection on fan flap motor or control unit, flap motor faulty.
After remedying of the fault, the fault is no longer displayed!
Should a pressure fault or faulty magnetic coupling occur, the regulator carries on
4-8 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Faults and remedies
working as usual, only the magnetic coupling output is interrupted
Error code “F5“ faulty data transmission operating feature / control unit:
Data transmission from the operating feature to the control unit is faulty.
Cause of the fault: short-circuit or interruption of the data line to control unit, plug
connection on operating feature or control unit.
The operating feature continues to try to establish data connection to the control unit,
if the connection is once again OK, “F5“ – fault will no longer be displayed.
If the data transmission from the operating feature can not be established again, the
ignition must be switched off, and RESET will be carried out following the restart.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 4-9

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuses and relays
4.3 Fuses and relays
4.3.1 Fuse box E50
Fig. 4-2 Fuse box E50
Fuse box E50 is located next to the motor.
F19 70 A Circuit breaker / glow plug and preglow

F20 50 A Main circuit breaker
4 - 10 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuses and relays
F22 7,5 A Reserve

F31 7,5 A Fuse for heater and air conditionner Kl15
F32 15 A Fuse for heater and air conditionner Kl30
F33 15 A Reserve
F34 15 A Reserve
F35 15 A Reserve
F36 15 A Reserve
F37 15 A Reserve
F109 50 A Circuit breaker / starter circuit
K16 Relay / starter

K43 Relay / engine stop (Quantum)
K66 Relay / unlocking of the end position cut-off
K93 Relay / startpilot
K103 Relay / engine on (12V for hourmeter)
K141 Relay / E5
K280 Relay / E150
K288 Main relay terminal 15
K308 Relay / floodlights
4.3.2 A1010 Plate

All other fuses are situated in the left control panel of the operator’s standing position.
Danger
Incorrect or bypassed fuses do not offer the machine's operator or the electrical
system the required degree of protection.
 Only use original fuses.
 Never bypass electrical fuses.
If required, order replacement fuses from LIEBHERR.

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 4 - 11

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuses and relays
Fig. 4-3 Fuses and relays, A1010 plate
4 - 12 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuses and relays
F1 15 A Reserve
F2 15 A Reserve
F3 15 A Reserve
F4 15 A Windscreen washing system, windscreen wiper system,
preheating system control circuit, rotating beacon*,
slewing grab*
F5 7,5 A Windscreen wiper motor
F6 7,5 A Speed adjustment in “MANU” control
F7 7,5 A Control unit and display
F8 15 A Safety lever, solenoid valve for servo control, swing gear
brake, fast drive, pressure cut in stage boom
F9 15 A Engine throttle control, BST power supply

F10 25 A Working headlight, Rotating deck headlights, additional
headlights*
F11 15 A Reserve
F12 15 A Reserve
F13 7,5 A Contact key, starting circuit, voltage transformer, Radio*,
loudspeaker*, engine stop* (for engine oil low pressure or
low coolant level)
F14 15 A Interior lighting, cigarette lighter, signal horn
F15 15 A Reserve
K5 Relay emergency control servo function, engine stop*
(for engine oil low pressure or low coolant level)
K6 Horn relay
K7 Relay for additional headlights on cab roof
K8 Floating position relay
* en option
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 4 - 13

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuses and relays
4 - 14 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Operating Manual Maintenance
5 Maintenance
5.1 Servicing the machine safely

– Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by specially trained person-
nel.
– Observe statutory timetables or intervals given in the operating instructions for re-
peat tests / inspections. It is imperative that a suitably equipped workshop is
available in order to carry out maintenance work.
– The inspection and maintenance schedule given at the end of these operating
instructions defines precisely who is required / permitted to carry out what work.
Jobs listed as daily / weekly work may be carried out by the machine's driver or
maintenance personnel when they have received appropriate instruction.
The remaining work may only be carried out by specialist personnel with appro-
priate training.
– Replacement parts must correspond to the technical requirements determined by
the manufacturer. Original replacement parts are always guaranteed to meet the-
se criteria.
– Always wear safe work clothes when carrying out maintenance work. Avoid the
wearing of rings, wrist watches, ties, scarves, open jackets, baggy clothing etc...
There is a risk of injury from, for example, getting caught up or being drawn in.
Protective goggles, safety helmets, safety shoes and gloves, reflective vests and
ear protection etc. are required for specific jobs.
– Do not remain in direct proximity of the diesel engine while the diesel engine is
running.
Persons with pacemakers should not approach within 20 cm of the running diesel
engine.
Do not touch voltage-carrying parts on the electrical connection of the individual
solenoid injection pumps (Unit Pumps UP) while the diesel engine is running.
– Do not permit unauthorised persons to approach the machine during maintenan-
ce work.
– Cordon off a wide maintenance area if required.
– Inform operational personnel before starting to carry out any special work and re-
pair work. Designate persons in charge of supervision.
– In the absence of any other information in the operating instructions, carry out all
maintenance work on the machine on level, firm ground with the working equip-
ment set aside and the engine switched off.
– For some machines, the only one position which enables a secured access to
every maintenance locations on the uppercarriage, is when the uppercarriage is
aligned with the undercarriage so that the sprockets locate at the back-end.
The ladder situated on the undercarriage only corresponds with the uppercar-
riage’s access when the excavator is in this configuration.
– Pull out the ignition key and shut off the main battery switch.
– Always tighten any loose screw connections during maintenance and repair work.
– The mounting bolts of the main components, of the hydraulic hoses and of the
counterweight must be replaced after every removal.
– If safety devices have to be dismantled during set-up, maintenance and repair
work, they must be immediately reinstalled and checked at the end of the work.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5-1

MJFCIFSS
Index
Maintenance Operating Manual
– When carrying out repair work, particularly when working under the machine,
hang a “Do not start” warning sign in a clearly visible position on the control panel.
Pull out the start key and shut off the main battery switch.
– Operate combustion motors and fuel operated heaters only in well ventilated
areas. Before operating these units, check ventilation.
– In addition, always follow applicable local regulations.
Cleaning
– Clean oil, fuel or care products off the machine before starting maintenance or re-
pair work and pay particular attention to connections and screw fittings.
Do not use aggressive cleaning products and use lint-free cleaning cloths.
– Do not use aggressive cleaning products or steam jet devices to clean the ma-
chine for the first two months after initial set-up of the machine (or after repaint-
ing).
– Do not use combustible liquids to clean the machine.
– Before cleaning the machine with water or steam jets (high pressure cleaner) or
other cleaning materials:
• lubricate all bearing points, bolt connections and the rim bearing to prevent wa-
ter or steam entering the bearing points.
• cover or glue shut all openings into which for safety or functional reasons water
or steam may not be permitted to enter.
Electric motors, electrical components, control boxes, plug connections and air
filters are particularly at risk.
– Ensure that the fire warning systems and fire extinguishers of the engine compart-
ment’s temperature sensor do not come into contact with hot cleaning products
during cleaning work.
The fire extinguisher could start.
– If you use a high pressure cleaner with steam or hot water to clean the machine,
observe following recommendations :
• the distance between the nozzle and the surface to be cleaned must be no low-
er than 20 inches
• the water temperature should not exceed 60°c (140°F)
• limit the water pressure to 80 bar maximum (11500 PSI)
• if you employ cleaning fluid, only use neutral cleaning agents such as custom-
ary car shampoos diluted to 2 or 3 percent maximum
– After cleaning:
• remove all covers completely.
• check all fuel, engine oil and hydraulic lines for leakage, loosened connections,
chafing and damage.
• rectify any defects found immediately.
• lubricate all bearing points, bolt connections and the rim bearing to displace any
water or cleaning products that may have entered.
Field of view
– Mirrors and cameras, which were possibly removed for the transport, must be in-
evitably reinstalled and correctly adjusted before the initial set-up of the machine.
– Regularly check that the interior and exterior mirrors as well as the cameras are
correctly adjusted.
– Control the surroundings, and particularly the nearness area of the machine, dur-
ing operation or when travelling.
– Mirrors are installed on the machine:
• on the left to check the left side of the machine.
5-2 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
• on the front to check the front side of the machine.

• on the right to check the right side of the machine.
• above the counterweight to check the rear side of the machine.
– On some machines, some mirrors may be replaced with cameras.
– At each extension, construction or change on the machine, the sight conditions
must be maintained. These conditions must otherwise be checked according to
ISO 5006.
– Mirrors must be cleaned at least at daily intervals.
– Damaged mirrors and cameras must be immediately replaced.
– The site has to be organised so that the dangers due to a restricted field of view
are minimized, particularly for machines with an operating weight which is supe-
rior to 40 tons.
Crack testing
– Even when the machine is operated carefully, there is a possibility of individual
cases of overloading occurring, which could lead to cracks or loose connections.
The machine should therefore be checked regularly for cracks, loose connections
or other visible damage to maintain operational safety.
– In order to be able to check for cracks, it is essential that the machine is kept clean
and cleaned regularly.
– The tests should be carried out in accordance with the monitoring and mainte-
nance plan:
• every 250 operating hours by the machine owner’s maintenance personnel.
• every 500 operating hours by authorised specialist personnel.
– It is advisable to carry out these tests: supported, on firm, horizontal substrate,
with the equipment in longitudinal and cross direction for variable loads. Current
accident prevention regulations must be adhered to.
– Especially check the supporting components, in particular :
• framed construction undercarriage with axle and gearbox storage, support out-
riger, lower slewing ring support with tower and slewing ring.
• framed construction uppercarriage with bearing for boom and hoist cylinder, up-
per slewing ring support, cab suspension, mounting for slewing gear and coun-
ter weight.
• framed construction components of attachments, e.g. boom, stick, quick
change adapter, digging tool and grapple.
• hydraulic cylinders, axles, steering, pins and pin connections, ascents, ladders
and mounting elements.
– The crack test should be carried out visually. If a crack is suspected, the dye pen-
etration test should be carried out as a crack test on areas which do not have
good visibility, such as the ring bearing support, in order to increase testing safety.
– Any damage found must be rectified immediately. Welding work on load-bearing
parts of the earth-moving machinery, loading devices and transport devices may
only be carried out by trained specialist personnel and only in accordance with the
accepted rules of welding engineering. In case of doubt, contact the LIEBHERR
customer support service to discuss suitable remedies.
Welding, drilling, firing and grinding work

– Any welding on structural parts (as undercarriage, uppercarriage, equipment
parts,…) may only be done the manufacturer, or authorized official dealer. If this
rule is neglected, the warranty is voided.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5-3

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Only carry out welding, drilling, firing and grinding work on the machine with ex-
press authorization. Clean dust and combustible materials off the machine and its
surrounding areas before welding, drilling, firing or grinding.
Ensure adequate ventilation. Risk of fire or explosion.
– Before welding repairs on other parts, always disconnect the battery. Always re-
move the negative terminal first and reconnect it last.
– Nevertheless if welding repair should be done on components which may contain
inflammable gases (welded counterweight, hydraulic tank, fuel tank, …), these
components must be previously and sufficiently ventilated with pressurized air to
avoid all fire or explosion hazard
– Before welding, connect the ground cable as close as possible to the welding
point, so the welding current will not run through the swing ring, joints, gears,
bushings, rubber parts and seals
Process materials
– When working with oils, greases and other chemical substances, observe the ap-
propriate current safety regulations for the product.
– Ensure that process materials and replacement parts are disposed of in a safe
and environmentally acceptable manner.
– Take care when handling hot process materials
(Risk of burning and scalding).
Repair work
and which have sufficient load capacity. When replacing single parts and larger
subassemblies, carefully secure them on lifting devices them so that they do not
present a risk. Only use suitable and correctly functioning lifting devices and load
take-up devices with adequate load capacity.
Do not stand or work under swinging loads.
– Do not use lifting devices which are damaged or do not have sufficient load car-
rying capacity.
Wear work gloves when working with wire cables.
crane operator. This people must be in the operator’s sight or in radio contact with
him.
– When working above body height, use safe climbing devices and working plat-
forms which are appropriate for the job.
Do not use machine parts as climbing devices if they are not designed for this pur-
pose.
When working at height, wear a harness to prevent falling.
Ensure that all grips, steps, rails, platforms and ladders are free of dirt, snow and
ice.
– Pneumatic cylinders do not have to be used as handles. Open doors and covers
carefully, so that pneumatic cylinders do not hit their stops, because this could
cause mechanical damages.
– Make sure the equipment on which you will operate is securely supported before
working (e.g. replacing teeth). Prevent metal touching metal when doing this.
– For safety reasons, never open and remove a track chain unless having previous-
ly totally released the pretension of the chain tensioning unit.
securely supported with appropriate supports.
5-4 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Always jack the machine up in such a way that any weight displacement does not
jeopardize stability and prevent metal touching metal while doing this.
– Work on the suspension, brake and steering systems may only be carried out by
trained specialist personnel.
– If the machine has to be repaired on a slope, secure the crawler with chocks and
connect the upper structure to the chassis using stop bolts.
– Only personnel with special training and experience may work on hydraulic equip-
ment.
– When searching for leakage, wear protective gloves. A fine jet of liquid under
pressure can penetrate the skin.
– Do not unscrew any lines or connections before you have set aside the equip-
ment, switched off the engine and depressurized the hydraulic system. After
switching off the engine, with the start key in contact position and with the safety
lever down into its lowest position, you must operate all pilot control devices (joy-
stick and pedals) in all directions in order to reduce the actuating and dynamic
pressures in the work circuits. You must then reduce the internal tank pressure
as described in these operating instructions.
Electrical system
Have all faults, such as loose connections, blown fuses and lamps and clogged
or abraded cables rectified by personnel.
– Only use original fuses with approved current strength.
– For machines with electrical neutral and high tension leads:
• switch the machine off immediately in the event of malfunctions in the power
supply.
– Work on the machine’s electrical equipment may only be carried out by skilled
electrical personnel or by trained personnel under the supervision of an electri-
cian in accordance with electrical regulations.
– When working on live parts, ensure that a second person is available to operate
the emergency-off or the main switch and overvoltage release. Cordon off the
working area with a red and white safety chain and a warning sign. Only use in-
sulated tools.
– When working on neutral and high tension subassemblies, after releasing the
voltage, briefly disconnect the supply cable at earth and electronic devices such
as capacitors using an earthing rod.
– First test the released parts to make sure that they are off circuit, earth them and
then disconnect them briefly. Insulate adjacent live parts.
– Disconnect the battery before working on the electrical system or carrying out any
electric arc welding on the machine.
First disconnect the negative, then the positive pole. When reconnecting, proceed
in the reverse order.
Hydraulic accumulator
– All work on the hydraulic accumulators must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel.
– Inexpert assembly and handling of hydraulic accumulators can cause serious ac-
cidents.
– Do not operate damaged hydraulic accumulators.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5-5

MJFCIFSS
Index
– Before working on a hydraulic accumulator, you must reduce the pressure in the
hydraulic system (hydraulic system including hydraulic tank), as described in
– Do not carry out welding or soldering or do any mechanical work on the hydraulic
accumulator.
The hydraulic accumulator can be damaged by heat penetration and can be
made to rupture by mechanical working. RISK OF EXPLOSION!
– Only charge the hydraulic accumulator with nitrogen. There is a RISK OF EXPLO-
SION if oxygen or air is used.
– The accumulator body can become hot during operation; there is a risk of burning.
– New hydraulic accumulators must be charged with the pressure required for the
purpose of use before installation.
– The operating data (minimum and maximum pressure) are marked permanently
on hydraulic accumulators. Ensure that this marking remains visible.
Hydraulic lines and hoses.

– It is forbidden to carry out repair work on hydraulic lines and hoses!
– All lines, hoses and bolt connections must be checked regularly for externally vis-
ible damage and any possible damage must be immediately checked for leakage.
– Never check for leaks with your bare hands, use a sheet of paper or something
else.
– Any damaged parts must be removed immediately! Spurting oil can lead to injury
and burns.
– Even with correct storage and permitted load, lines and hoses are subject to the
natural aging process. This restricts their duration of use.
• Incorrect storage, mechanical damage and unauthorized load are the most
common causes of failure.
• In relation to duration of use, current norms, regulations and guidelines pertain-
ing to lines and hoses at place of use must be adhered to.
• Use at the limit range of permissible load can shorten duration of use (e.g. high
temperatures, frequent movement cycles, extremely high pulse frequencies,
multiple shift usage).
– Lines and hoses should be replaced if the following are found during inspection:
• Damage to the outer sheath as far as the liner (e.g. chafing, cuts and cracks);
• Brittleness of the outer sheath (fracture formation in hose material);
• Deformations which do not correspond to the natural form of the line or hose,
whether in a unpressurized or pressurized state or on bends e.g. sheath sepa-
ration, blistering;
• Unsealed areas;
• Non-adherence to requirements during installation;
• Damage or deformations to the hose fittings which reduce the tightness of the
fittings or the hose / fitting connection;
• Hoses working themselves out of the fittings;
• Corrosion of the fittings which reduces function and tightness;
– When replacing lines and hoses, use only original replacement parts.
– Install and mount lines and hoses correctly. Do not mix up the connections.
5-6 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
– The following is to be noted when replacing lines and hoses:

• Always ensure that the lines and hoses are installed free of torsion. For high-
pressure hoses, the screws from the half-clamps or full flange must always be
attached to both hose ends and should only be tightened afterwards.
• When tightening the flange on high-pressure lines and hoses with bent fittings,
the side with the bent fitting must always be tightened first and then the side with
the straight fitting tightened afterwards.
• Any mounting clamps which are located in the centre of the hose may only be
attached and tightened subsequently.
• Check daily to ensure that all clamps, covers and protective devices are prop-
erly fastened. Doing this will prevent vibration and damage during operation.
• Install the lines and hoses in such a way that they cannot chafe on other lines,
hoses or parts.
• A minimum distance from other parts of approx. half the exterior diameter of the
hose is recommended. The distance should not, however, be less than 10 to
15 mm.
• When replacing the lines or hoses on moving parts (e.g. from the boom to the
stay), check before initial start-up that there are no chafing areas in the entire
area of movement.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5-7

MJFCIFSS
Index
Maintenance access doors
5.2 Maintenance access doors
5.2.1 Overview of access doors
Fig. 5-1 Access doors on the machine
10 Engine cover 130 Side door, left

20 Engine cover 140 Side door, right
60 Radiator cover 150 Side door, right
120 Side door, left 160 Side door, right
The machine has 8 access doors for maintenance. The locks integrated in the han-
5-8 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Maintenance access doors
dles must be unlocked before starting to drive.
Caution!
Access doors can close accidentally and trap the operator or maintenance person-
nel.
 When you have opened the access doors, latch them using the retainer.
Access door Lock Access to:
Engine cover Gas pressure spring, – Diesel engine

auxiliary mechanical re-
tainer
Radiator cover Gas pressure spring – Radiator
Side door, left Mechanical retainer – Hydraulic pumps

– Control oil unit
– Electrics box E50
– Dry air filter
Side door, right Mechanical retainer – Radiator

– Batteries
– Main battery switch
Tab. 5-1 Access doors
5.2.2 Door lock
Fig. 5-2 Door lock
 To stop the access doors from moving unintentionally (eg. due to wind), open
them fully and allow the door lock (see arrow) to latch in.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5-9

MJFCIFSS
Index
Lubricants and operating fluids
5.3 Lubricants and operating fluids
5.3.1 General information on changing lubricants and operating

fluids
Note
The quantities given in the lubrication and operating material chart and on the lubri-
cation chart in the cab are only guide values.
 After each oil change or refill, check the level in the relevant unit.
Note!
Adhering to regulations for lubrication, level checks and operating material changes
guarantees a high degree of reliability and a long service life for the machine.
It is particularly important to adhere to the oil change intervals and use the specified
type of lubricant.
 Observe the following when using and checking lubricants and operating fluids:
– see "Lubricants and operating fluids"
– see "Inspection and maintenance schedule"
Note!
Cleanliness is of the utmost importance when changing oil.
 Clean all filler plugs, filler covers and drain plugs and their surroundings before
opening.
 For preference, drain off oil when it is at operating temperature.
 Ensure that old oils are collected and disposed of in an environmentally accept-
able manner using the removable oil filter cartridges.
Danger!
When checking and changing lubrication and operating materials, ensure that the
following precautions are adhered to:
 Unless otherwise indicated, carry out all work on the machine on level, solid
ground and with the engine switched off.
 Whenever you reach into the engine compartment, always secure the cover and
side doors against accidentally falling back or closing.
 Only refuel the machine when the engine is switched off, do not smoke and
avoid naked flame.
 Turn the main battery switch to position 0 (off) and remove the ignition key.
5 - 10 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
5.3.2 Lubrication chart
Fig. 5-3 Lubrication chart - R 984 C-Litronic

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 11

MJFCIFSS
Index
Symbol Display Quantity*

Diesel engine 58 l
Engine coolant 88 l
Hydraulic system 880 l
Swing gear 31 l
Travel gear 2 x 20 l
Splitterbox 14,5 l
Fuel 1580 l
Grease / Swing ring teeth
Grease
Windshield washer 3,5 l
Check oil level
Oil change
First oil change
Oil analysis
Tab. 5-2 Lubrication chart key
*the given quantities are only guidelines. Check fluid level after each change or refilling.
5 - 12 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
5.3.3 Lubricant chart

Designation Medium Symbol Classification Viscosity Quantity
(litres)**
Diesel engine Engine oil 58 l

See the Operation and Maintenance Manual for
CUMMINS engine
Hydraulic tank Engine oil 880 l

See the part Hydraulic oil specifications for LIE-
BHERR Mining excavators
Swing gear Transmission API-GL-5 SAE 80

oil MIL-L 2105 B, C or D SAE 80W-90
31 l
SAE 90
SAE 85W-140
Travel gear Transmission API-GL-5 SAE 80 2 x 20 l

SAE 90
SAE 85W-140
Splitterbox Transmission API-GL-5 SAE 90 14,5 l

Tracks and cor- Lubricating High pressure grease Consistency 2 -

responding grease KP2k or EP2 NLGI Class
gearing of swing
ring, equipment
mounting
Swing ring teeth Lubricating See lubricant specification Special -

grease grease
Hinges, joints, Engine oil - - - -

locks
Rubber seal on Silicon spray - - - -

doors and trim or talc
panels
Tab. 5-3 Lubricant chart
** = Guide values
5.3.4 Operating material chart
Designation Medium Symbol Quantity

(litres)*
Fuel tank 1580 l

See the Operation and Maintenance Manual for CUM-
MINS engine
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 13

MJFCIFSS
Index
Lubricating and operating material specifications
Designation Medium Symbol Quantity

(litres)*
Coolant 88 l
See the Operation and Maintenance Manual for CUM-
MINS engine
Windscreen washing sys- Commercially available windscreen washing fluid or meth- - 3,5 l
tem ylated alcohol
Air conditioning system re- R 134 a - 1,9 kg

frigerant
Refrigerant oil in A/C com- PLANETELF PAG SP 20 - 0,21 l

pressor
Tab. 5-4 Operating material chart
* = Guide values
5.4 Lubricating and operating material specifica-

tions
5.4.1 Lubrication oil for the diesel engine

See the Operation and Maintenance Manual for CUMMINS Engine
5.4.2 Fuel
5.4.3 Hydraulic oil specifications for LIEBHERR Mining excava-

tors
Hydraulic oils must meet the requirement outlined below.
Non-compliance with these requirements shall void all warranty and liability by LIE-
BHERR.
Maximum water content of hydraulic oil : <0,1%.
LIEBHERR oils
LIEBHERR recommands using the following hydraulic oils in its excavators (depend-
ing on temperature range) :
5 - 14 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 5-4 Hydraulic oil for use as hydraulic oil (ISO classes)*.
A Ambient temperature
B Cold-start range with warm-up instruction
C Operating range
* Temperature-based selection of the ISO class

While running with LIEBHERR hydraulic Plus Artic, the fan speed regulation "EXTRA
COLD" must be active.
While running with LIEBHERR HVI, the fan speed regulation "EXTRA COLD" or
"COLD" must be active.
Engine oils for use in hydraulic system

Engine oils that are to be used as hydraulic oils must conform to the following spec-
ifications :
Single-grade oils (1): API - CD / ACEA - E1

Mercedes-Benz regulations, sheet no. 226.0 and 227.0
Multigrade oils (2): API - CD, CE, CF / ACEA - E2, E3, E4
Mercedes-Benz regulations, sheet no. 227.5, 228.1,
228.3 et 228.5
Tab. 5-5 Engine oils for use as hydraulic oil

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 15

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fig. 5-5 Engine oils for use as hydraulic oil (SAE classes)*
A Ambient temperature 1 Single grade engine oil

B Cold-start range with warm-up instruction 2 Multigrade oils
C Operating range
*temperature-based selection of the SAE class

** for deviating viscosity grade: consult the LIEBHERR customer service department
While running with SAE 10W, the fan speed regulation "EXTRA COLD" or "COLD"
must be active.
Hydraulic oils
Engine oils that are to be used as hydraulic oils must conform to the following spec-
ifications :
Fig. 5-6 Hydraulic oil for use as hydraulic oil (ISO classes)*.
A Ambient temperature
B Cold-start range with warm-up instruction
C Operating range
5 - 16 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic oil specifications

DIN 51524-2 (HLP) / ISO 11158 (HM)
DIN 51524-3 (HVLP) / ISO 11158 (HV)
DIN 51524-2 with detergent-/dispergent additives : HLP-D
DIN 51524-3 with detergent-/dispergent additives : HVLP-D
Shear stability : KRL/C < 15% according to DIN 51350-6, CEC L 45-A-99
Air release properties : LAV < 10 min at 50°C according to DIN ISO 9120
While running with hydraulic oil ISO VG32, the fan speed regulation "EXTRA COLD"
must be active.
While running with hydraulic oil ISO VG46, the fan speed regulation "EXTRA COLD"
or "COLD" must be active.
Warm-up specification
The black bar B indicates that the ambient temperatures are maximum 20 °C below
the operating range C.
In the event of a cold start at an ambient temperature included in range B, the follow-
ing warm-up instruction applies to the hydraulic oil:
 1. Start the diesel engine and run it at approx. 1/2 rated speed. Carefully activate
the working hydraulic circuits. Operate a hydraulic cylinder (Stick for example)
and move them to the stop quickly and many times. After approx. 5 minutes, start
the travel hydraulic circuits.
Warm-up duration: approx 10 minutes
For temperature below the limits A :
 2. Preheat hydraulic oil in the tank before starting the engine.
Biodegradables hydraulic oils
Caution!
Risk of damage to the hydraulic unit!
When mixing ester-based biodegradable hydraulic oils with mineral oils, there is a
risk of aggressive chemical reactions, which can damage the hydraulic equipment.
 Do not mix biodegradable hydraulic oils from different suppliers, and never mix
with mineral oils.
Depending on the temperature range, LIEBHERR recommands its poly-alpaha-ole-

fin (PAO, HEPR) oils that are environmentally-friendly according to CEC-L-33-A-93 :
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus or Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic
If these oils are not available locally, use one of the following oils (before choosing
an oil, contact our customer service departement) :
Fully saturated synthetic ester-based oils, HEES
Depending on the temperature range, the viscosity grade of the HEES oil must con-
form to the above specifications for hydraulic oils.
The using of biodegradable hydraulic oils must be discussed with LIEBHERR France
SAS / Mining Division beforehand. Initial filling is performed ex-works according to
customer choice.
Do not use vegetable oils, as they do not possess the necessary thermal stability.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 17

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic oil selection for cold climate conditions

When a Liebherr-Mining excavator works under cold climates conditions, in any
case, the appropriate artic kit must be installed.
Oil must match the above prescription for engine oils or hydraulic oils.
Oil’s pourpoint temperature must be at least 10 K below the minimal air ambiant tem-
perature.
Oil’s flash point temperature > 160°C (recommended > 200°C).
The operating range of the artic oil depends on the ambiant air temperature and must
be checked as follow :
– If the maximal ambiant air temperature stays below +20°C, the oil viscosity at
+50°C (oil temperature) must be over 16 cst. In this case, the fan regulation "EX-
TRA COLD" must be selected.
+60°C (oil temperature) must be over 16 cst. In this case, the fan regulation "EX-
TRA COLD" or "COLD" must be selected.
70°C (oil temperature) must be over 16 cst. In this case, the fan regulation
"COLD" must be selected.
Hydraulic oil monitoring
Note!
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids should generally be checked at
regular intervals by oil analysis.
Oil analysis is recommended for mineral oils.
 Machines in normal use: at least every 500 operating hours
 Machines in heavy dust use: at least every 250 operating hours
LIEBHERR recommends that oil analyses be carried out by the company WEAR
CHECK and that oil changes are performed on the basis of the lab report (see also
customer service and product information).
Hydraulic oil monitoring
Fig. 5-7 Taking an oil sample in normal use

h Operating hours 2 Second oil sample

1 First oil sample 3 Further oil samples every 500 oper-
ating hours
Oil change according to analysis and lab report.

Change intervals for hydraulic oil return-line filter (20.5 µm): initially after
500 operating hours, further changes every 1000 operating hours.
5 - 18 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Notes on reducing hydraulic oil contamination in heavy dust

use
If the machine is generally operated with the hydraulic hammer, or is used under sim-
ilar circumstances (heavy dust occurrence), there is a risk that the hydraulic oil will
become more than usually contaminated.
To prevent early wear of hydraulic components, the oil change intervals (and inter-
vals between oil samples) should be reduced and the following regulations should
also be noted:
– The filter cartridge(s) must be replaced every 500 operating hours.
– For the return-line filter, 10 µm filter cartridges must be used instead of the usual
20 / 5 µm filter cartridges.
– The vent filter on the hydraulic tank is to be replaced with a 2 µm fine filter (fine-
ness of standard filter is 7 µm).
– The 2 µm vent filter must be replaced each time the hydraulic oil is changed (eve-
ry 500 operating hours).
Note!
Machines fitted with a hydraulic hammer at the works and retrofitted hydraulic ham-
mer kits possess these 10-µm filter cartridges and 2-µm vent filters.
5.4.4 Swing and travel gear oils

Use gear oil meeting specifications API-GL-5 and MIL-L-2105 B, C or D.
Fig. 5-8 Engine oils for use as swing and travel gear oils
5.4.5 Splitterbox oil

Use gear oil with viscosity classification SAE 90 or SAE 80W90 and meeting speci-
fications API-GL-5 and MIL-L-2105 B, C or D.
Fig. 5-9 Engine oils for use as splitterbox oil
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 19

MJFCIFSS
Index
5.4.6 Lubricating grease and other lubricants
Lubricant Description / manufacturer

Lubricating grease for the The grease must correspond with the specifica-
swing ring / general oiling tion KP2k, consistency 2 or NLGI grade in ac-
points cordance with DIN 51818 and DIN 51825 or EP 2
in accordance with NF-T-60 132.
The grease must consist of a lithium complex and
have a four ball tester value of at least 2300 N in
accordance with DIN 51350 and ASTM D 2596.
Between 0°C and -15°C Use a grease with consistency classification 1 NL

(32°F and 5°F) GI or EP1 grease.
Between -15°C and -40°C Only employ synthetic greases. We recommand

(5°F and -40°F) the grease Mobilith SHC 460 or Mobilith SHC
PM.
LIEBHERR part N° : 8500299 for a 25 kg (55 lbs)

container.
Grease for swing ring teeth  Compound spray 2000 E :
with Liebherr spraying sys- –Liebherr order n° : 8612107.
tem (see the part "Greasing
the machine" of this chapter).  Paste RHZ 2* :
–Liebherr order n° : 8612304 / 1 piece (1 Kg).
–8500252 / 1 pack (10 pieces).
–8500199 / drum of 5 kg.
 Molydag 147 / 400* :
–for cold countries (below -20°C, -4°F).
(*) also suitable for automatic lubrication sys-
tems.
Grease for swing ring teeth This grease must comply with following recom-
with Lincoln lubrication sys- mendations :
tem (see the part "Greasing
 be of consistency classification 2 in NL-GI vis-
the machine" of this chapter).
cosity per DIN 51818,
 have a VKA value of a least 5500N per DIN
51350 or ASTM D 2596,
 show a water resistance of 1-90 per DIN
51807.
LIEBHERR recommends the use of :
Grease BP Energol OGL 461 F, Liebherr order
n°: 8503629 for a 50 kg (110 lbs.) barrel.
Contact spray for slip rings Cramolin

Lubricant for pistons, piston Gleitmo 800
nuts and piston bearing in-
stallations on the hydraulic
cylinders
5 - 20 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Lubricant Description / manufacturer

Special anti-corrosive materi- Castrol-Tarp
al for installation areas of
sealingelements on hydraulic
cylinders
Anti-corrosion grease for Liebherr special grease CTK
open piston rods (cylinders
that do not move often or
transportation)
Tab. 5-6 Lubricating grease and other lubricants

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 21

MJFCIFSS
Index
5.4.7 Coolant
5.4.8 Lubricants specifications for -40°C
Engine oil
See Cummins Operation and Maintenance Manual.
First filling : BP Vanellus Ultima 5W30 Ident-Nr. : 11001385 (20 l), Ident-Nr. :
11001386 (208 l) from -40°C to +30° (if the excavator is equipped with a preheating
the temperature range can start at -50°C instead of -40°C).
Hydraulic oil
See the part hydraulic oils
Gear oil
SAE 75W90 API GL5 : Purpoint < -54°C
Like BP gear oil SHXM 75W90 :
– Ident-Nr. 8503299, drum 20 l
– Ident-Nr. 10033025, drum 208 l
From -50°C to +40°C
Like AVIA Gear oil Synthogear FE 75W90 EP from -50°C to +40°C
Grease : general lubepoint

– Low temperature grease : Liebherr universal grease Artic
–Ident-Nr. 10296828 cartridge of 400 grams
–Ident-Nr. 10296827 1 pack of 24 cartridges of 400 grams
–Ident-Nr. 10296825 container 10 kg
–Ident-Nr. 10296822 drum 180 kg
– Grease BP Energrease SY PM drum 165 kg from -30°C to +30°C,
Ident-Nr.8503731
– Grease BP Energrease SY PM drum 45 kg from -30°C to +30°C,
Ident-Nr.10279983
– Grease Liebherr Spezialfett 1026 LS drum 180 kg from -30°C to +60°C,

Ident-Nr.10113698
– Grease Petro-Canada Multiflex Moly EP1 from -50°C to +20°C,
– Fuchs Urethym HGO from -55°C to +0°C,
Grease for swing ring teeth

– Low temperature grease : Liebherr universal grease Artic
–Ident-Nr. 10296828 cartridge of 400 grams
–Ident-Nr. 10296827 1 pack of 24 cartridges of 400 grams
5 - 22 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Diesel engine

–Ident-Nr. 10296822 drum 180 kg
from -50°C to +20°C
Grease Petro-Canada Vulcan Synthetic Arctic from -55°C to -20°C.
5.5 Diesel engine
Refer to the CUMMINS Operation and Maintenance Manual for detailed description
of maintenance work to be performed.
In addition, accurately observe the following items and perform all maintenance work
according to the intervals given in the maintenance schedule.
5.5.1 Check air filter for contamination
Fig. 5-10 Air filter for contamination
Check the dry air filter on side of the Diesel engine to determine the degree of con-
tamination.
When the maximum permissible depression has been reached, a red stripe will ap-
pear in the inspection port of the maintenance indicator 16 and the filter must be serv-
iced.
5.5.2 Checking the oil level in the diesel engine

Danger!
Risk of burning.
The engine oil is hot when it is at operating temperate.
 Avoid contact with hot oil and components containing oil, since it could cause
severe burns.
 The machine must be standing level.

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 23

MJFCIFSS
Index
Diesel engine
 Wait for a few minutes for the oil to collect in the oil pan.
Fig. 5-11 Oil level markings on the dipstick
 Check the oil level in the engine.

 The oil must be between the min and max marks on the dipstick 1.
5.5.3 Changing the diesel engine oil
Note!
 Only carry out the oil change when the engine is warm.
Fig. 5-12 Filler neck 2 for the engine Tier 2 (left figure) and for engine Tier 3 (right
figure)
5 - 24 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Diesel engine
Fig. 5-13 Drain 6
To drain the oil :

 Drain the engine oil sump.
 Bring the engine to operating temperature.
 The oil is drained via the drain valve 6 on the oil pan of the Diesel engine.
 Remove the cap of the drain valve 6, attach the drain hose (supplied in the tool-
box) to the drain valve and drain the oil into a suitable container.
 Remove the hose, reinstall the cap on the drain valve and add oil via the filler neck
2.
To change the oil filter elements :
Fig. 5-14 Oil filter elements
 Unscrew and remove the 2 filter elements, pos. 3.

 Each filter element is a combination oil filter comprising a full flow element and a
by-pass element
Danger!
Risk of burning.
 When removing the engine oil filters, be careful to avoid contact with hot oil, it
could cause severe burns.
 Clean the sealing surfaces on the filter mounts.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 25

MJFCIFSS
Index
Diesel engine
 Lightly lubricate the rubber seal on the new filters with oil.
 Install and tighten the filters with both hands (see also enclosed CUMMINS en-
gine operation and maintenance manual).
 Check after every oil change or after adding oil to ensure that the oil level has
reached the upper mark on dipstick 1.
5.5.4 Refill the engine oil sump
Fig. 5-15 Filler neck 2 for the engine Tier 2 (left figure) and for engine Tier 3 (right
figure)
Fig. 5-16 Dipstick 1
Refill via the filler neck 2,

 Until the max. mark is reached on dipstick 1.
 For oil quantities, oil specifications and oil change intervals, see lubrication and
maintenance charts.
Note!
To extend the oil change interval, it is advised to use the chart method of CUM-
MINS.
5 - 26 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Diesel engine
5.5.5 Engine and splitterbox mounting screws
Fig. 5-17 Engine mounting screws
Check the mounting screws 2 and 4 on the engine brackets and the engine gear
mounts regularly for tightness, retorque if necessary.
Tightening torque for screws 2 : 310 Nm (230 ft. lbs.)
5.5.6 Splitterbox mounting screws
Fig. 5-18 Splitterbox mounting screws
Check the tightness of mounting screws 3 from the splitterbox to the Diesel engine
SAE housing regularly. Retorque if necessary.
For maintenance intervals, see maintenance schedule.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 27

MJFCIFSS
Index
Monitoring system of the Diesel engine (QSK system)
5.5.7 Belt for the alternator of the Diesel engine
Fig. 5-19 Belt
Please refers to the enclosed CUMMINS Operation and Maintenance Manual.
5.6 Monitoring system of the Diesel engine (QSK

system)
5.6.1 Indicator lights H60, H61 and H62
Fig. 5-20 QSK system
All the troubles appearing on the Diesel engine or in its monitoring circuit are centrally
indicated via the 3 indicator lights H60, H61 and H62.
5 - 28 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
These 3 control lights are connected to the ECM (Electronic Control Modul) 2 of the
QSK system, which is mounted to the engine, next to the fuel pump 1.
Appart from its monitoring function, the QSK fuel system has been designed to con-
trol the engine speed and fuel pressure so to optimise the exhaust emissions.
The red indicator light STOP H60 lights up when an important fault which could cause
serious engine damage is detected.
If the stop light comes on while the engine is running, it may be automatically stopped
by the monitoring system on case an important trouble is detected.
For the other faults, the monitoring system protects the engine while reducing its
power or RPM.
Also in this case, the engine has to be brought to low idle and stopped in a safe man-
ner as soon as possible.
Afterwards recognize the detected error(s) using the diagnostic switches S136 and
S82.
Depending on the kind and the severity of the recognized trouble, the system may
cause automatic engine shutdown, power or speed derating.
The yellow indicator light WARNING H61 indicates an engine error which does not
necessitate an immediate engine shutdown.
Recognize the detected error using the diagnostic switches, after stopping the en-
gine.
Get the cause of the problem remedied as soon as is convenient regarding the cause
of the problem.
The detected error can result in a power loss.
The red indicator light PROTECTION H62 shows that any parameter supervised by
the system has come out of its normal operation range.
The engine is automatically stopped by the monitoring system in case one of the fol-
lowing troubles is detected :
– – Low engine oil pressure.
– – High coolant temperature.
– – Low engine coolant pressure.
– – High intake air manifold temperature.
For some other parameters the monitoring system achieves protection by derating
the engine speed or the corresponding torque.
The engine may be kept in operation temporarily (eventually the engine power is re-
duced by the monitoring system), the problem must be diagnosed via the switches
S136 and S82.
Automatic torque derate will happen in case one of the following troubles is detected :
– – High fuel temperature.
– – High blowby pressure (= pressure in crankcase housing).

– – Low coolant pressure (first stage), also causes speed derate.
– – Low oil pressure (first stage).
– – High coolant temperature (first stage).
– – High intake air manifold temperature (first stage).
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 29

MJFCIFSS
Index
5.6.2 Diagnostic switches S82 and S136 for engine monitoring
Fig. 5-21 Diagnostic switches
These switches permit to recognize the faults which are detected by the engine mon-
itoring system (Electronic Control Modul). These faults are connected to the central-
ized warning lights H60, H61 and H62 of the control desk.
There are two types of fault codes :
– the engine electronic system fault code which will light up the indicator lights H60
and H61.
– the engine protection system fault codes which will light up the indicator lights
H62.
All faults codes recorded will either be active (fault code is presently actice on the
engine) or inactive (fault code was active at some time, but is not presently active).
All active fault codes can be diagnosed as described below using both lamps H60
and H61.
Inactive fault codes can only be viewed with the optional equipment "Insite".
Diagnostic of the detected faults using the switches S82 and

S136
If an indicator light H60, H61 and H62 is lighting, proceed as follows to recognize the
detected errors :
– turn the ignition key to "OFF" then to "contact" position,
– depress the switch S136 to position "ON", the indicator lamp H62 inside the switch
lights up.
If no active fault codes are recorded, all three lights will come on and stay on.
If no active fault codes are recorded, all three lights will come on momentarily, and
then ...
– first the yellow lamp H61 will flash one time,

– then the red indicator light H60 will blink, the sequence of blinking corresponds to
the code of the error detected by the system. Between two consecutive blinking
sequences for indication of fault code, the yellow light H61 comes on.
Also see the section "Diagnostic fault codes" and the chart for diagnostic fault codes
in the CUMMINS operation and maintenance manual.
– The sequence is repeated as long as the switch S136 remains on "ON" position,
the yellow indicator light H61 goes briefly on between two consecutive flashing
5 - 30 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Cooling system
sequences.
– Remaining errors which are still detected can be recognized on the same way,
using the rotary switch S82.
Briefly turning the switch S82 to the right "INC" causes the blinking sequence of the
error with the code directly above to be displayed on indicator light H60, turning brief-
ly S82 to the left "DEC" will display the error with the code directly below.
5.7 Cooling system
5.7.1 Checking and cleaning the cooling system
Fig. 5-22 Expansion tank
Optimal cooling can only be achieved when the cooler is kept clean.
 Check the engine, fan and cooler for damage and clean if necessary.
 If the safety valve of the cooling system in the radiator cap 6 of the expansion tank
7 is leaking, replace the cap.
 Regularly check the connector hoses between the radiator and the engine, as
well as the heater hoses for condition and leaks.
 Check the tightness of hose clamps.
5.7.2 Checking the coolant level
Danger!
Risk of burning due to hot coolant.

The engine cooling system is hot and pressurized when at operating temperature.
 Avoid touching coolant or coolant-bearing parts.
 Only check the coolant level when the engine has cooled sufficiently.
 Turn the cover 6 a half turn.

 Relieve any pressure that may be present in this position. After balancing the
pressure, slowly turn fully.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 31

MJFCIFSS
Index
Cooling system
The coolant must always be visible in the filling eye (arrow).

 Add coolant if necessary.
 Close the lid.
 After adding coolant, allow the engine to run for a short time with the heating
switched on and monitor the coolant level once again.
5.7.3 Coolant antifreeze and anti-corrosion fluid

The system must be filled with antifreeze all year round.
Upon dispatch, the coolant contains antifreeze for temperatures up to -35 °C (this is
equal to approx. 50 % antifreeze).
Volume: see lubricant chart
 Keep the concentration of anti-corrosion additive contained in the cooling system
constant, particularly when refilling.
 Check this concentration each time larger amounts of coolant are lost or at regular
intervals. If necessary, add anti-corrosion additives to the coolant.
 If, however, no coolant is lost, only change the coolant filter regularly.
5.7.4 Changing the coolant
Fig. 5-23 The drain plug on the radiator
Danger!
Risk of burning due to hot coolant.
 Only change the coolant when the engine is cold.
The following point should be noted when changing the coolant:

– Change the coolant in the entire coolant circuit at least every two years.
Pos. 1 shows the drain plug on the radiator.
For procedure to drain and to refill the cooling circuit, refer to the attached operation
and maintenance manual for the CUMMINS engine.
5 - 32 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuel system
Important!
When adding coolant, make sure that the expansion tank is filled all the way to the
top of the fitting, add coolant until the level does no longer drop (it is not possible to
overfill the tank if the pressure relief valve 7 is not removed).
5.7.5 Changing the water filter
Fig. 5-24 Water filter
The water filter contains paste-like corrosion inhibitors which ensure the adequate
corrosion protection of the coolant.
The water filter 10 must be replaced every 250 working hours.
 Close the shut-off valves 11 on the inlet and return lines,
 unscrew the used element,
 apply a light even coat of lubricating oil to the seal of the new element,
 install the new element, tighten until the seal touches the filter head.
 Tighten by hand an additional one-half to three-fourths turn (don’t tighten using a
tool as a filter wrench, ...),
 open the 2 shut-off valves 11.
See also the attached operation and maintenance manual for the CUMMINS engine
for further information.
5.8 Fuel system

Danger!
Risk of explosion!
 Avoid naked flame when working on the fuel system and when refuelling.
 Do not smoke.
 Only work on the diesel engine when it is switched off.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 33

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuel system
5.8.1 Refuelling
Fuel cover
Fig. 5-25 Fuel cover
 Unscrew fuel cover 15.

 Add fuel via the filter 20.
5.8.2 Electrical refuelling pump (optional extra)
Fig. 5-26 Electrical refuelling pump
1 Intake hose S25 Button ON

2 Shut off valve S59 Button OFF

3 Operating unit
The electrical refuelling pump is used to put fuel into the machine’s fuel tank.
It is located under the hatch on the front end of the hydraulic oil and fuel tank. The
operating unit 3 is removable.
5 - 34 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuel system
Proceed as follows when refuelling and stowing the hoses :

 Unscrew the fuel filler cap 15.
 Insert the free end of the intake hose 1 in the fuel supply tank.
 Open the shut off valve 2 (position B).
 Use switch S25 (green) to switch on the refuelling pump in order to pump fuel into
the machine’s tank.
 The pump switches off automatically as soon as the maximum fill level is
reached.
 The refuelling pump can be switched off at any time using switch S59 (red).
Caution!
The pump must not be permitted to run dry.
 Ensure that the fuel level does not drop below the intake level of the intake hose.
 Close stop cock 2 (position A).

 Ensure that no fuel remains in the intake hose 1 before stowing.
 Roll up the intake hose 1 and place it in the stowing compartment.
 Close the hatch again.
 Screw the fuel filler cap 15.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 35

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuel system
5.8.3 Draining the fuel tank
Fig. 5-27 Draining the fuel tank
To drain the water of the tank :

 Place a suitable container underneath.
 Unscrew the plug 5 about two turns.
 Then retighten the plug as soon as water free fuel flows out.
 Screw drain valve 28 closed again.
To drain the tank :

The fuel tank is equipped with a drain plug 5.
 To empty the tank remove the cover 4 and the drain plug 5.
5 - 36 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fuel system
Regularly check the tank and filter 6 for contamination. If necessary, replace the fuel
filter 6 and / or flush the fuel tank.
5.8.4 Check fuel system / fuel level
Fig. 5-28 Fuel filter
The condensation in the fuel system and fuel tank must be checked daily.
Turn the plug 3 on the water separator of the filters.
Drain the condensation until the fuel drains off and retighten the plug.
Under ideal operating conditions, this interval may be extended to one week.
Check the fuel gauge P3 on the monitoring display before starting to work.
If the reds diodes P3.1 on the left of the indicator P3 lights up, only a little reserve of
fuel remains in the tank.
Refill the tank, if the fuel level is low.
Notice!
Since a high fuel level in tank reduces condensation inside the tank, the refuelling
should be done preferably at the end of the working day.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 37

MJFCIFSS
Index
Air system
5.8.5 Drain the water separator of the fuel filters
Fig. 5-29 Water separator of the fuel filters
Drain the contaminant from the fuel system daily.

 Open the drain plugs 3 of the filter elements,
 drain the water until fuel emerges,
 then retighten the drain plugs.
For other maintenance works on the fuel system refer to the Cummins Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
5.9 Air system
Fig. 5-30 Air pressure gauge
While working, the white pointer of the air pressure gauge 87 must read between 6,2
and 7,2 bar (90 - 105 PSI).
5 - 38 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Air system
5.9.1 Air pressure regulator and compressor
Fig. 5-31 Air pressure regulator and compressor
Listen to pressure regulator 1, at regular intervals it should unload and switch back
to charging the compressor 2.
To check this :
– run the Diesel engine at low idle,
– slowly lower the air pressure down to less then 6,2 bar (as example by actuating
the air pressure gun).
– the pressure regulator must then switch the compressor on,
– when a pressure of 7,2 bar is reached, it must turn it off.
Check this every 500 operating hours. If necessary, adjust the regulator until both
pressures are correct.
5.9.2 Antifreeze pump

Fig. 5-32 Antifreeze pump
The antifreeze pump 3, allows the compressed air system to work properly during the
cold season.
Fill it with about .5 pt. (1/4 l) denatured alcohol.
Check alcohol level daily.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 39

MJFCIFSS
Index
Air system
The antifreeze pump 3 injects 0,5 cm3 of alcohol in the compressed air system every
time the compressor turns on and off.
5.9.3 Drain the air tank
Fig. 5-33 Drain valve
Water in the air tank is automatically drained via the drain valve when the pressure
in the system drops.
However, it is recommended to manually drain any remaining water from the air tank:
– during the summer, push the pin on the underside of the drain valve once a week,
– and during the winter months, push it once a day.
5.9.4 Air filter and air lubricator for central lubrication
Fig. 5-34 Air filter and lubricator
The condensation and the impurities in the air filter 4 and in the lubricator must be
drained weekly.
With the central lubricating in operation, turn the drain screw at the bottom of the
transparent polycarbonate bowls from several turns.
If the polycarbonate bowls are dirty, stop the central lubrication, remove the bowls
and clean them in a soapy solution.
5 - 40 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Dry air filter
If the element of the filter 4 clogged, replace it or clean it in alcohol.

Check the oil level in the lubricator weekly.
If necessary, remove the filter plug 6 and add oil (viscosity between SAE 10 and SAE
30) until the level is about 1 cm from the top of the transparent bowl.
5.10 Dry air filter
Fig. 5-35 Dry air filter
Maximum engine protection against early wear due to dust is only possible if the air
filter is serviced at regular intervals.
The dry air filter is designed in such a way that it offers maximum protection and long
maintenance intervals.
It is not recommended that filter elements be washed out for safety reasons.
Fig. 5-36 Vacuum gauge
The vacuum gauge 9 stores the maximum intake low pressure reached on the filter
outlet while the diesel engine is operating.
The appearance of the red display strip in alarm window 18 indicates that the maxi-
mum permissible low pressure of 50 mbar has been reached.
 Replace the main element.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 41

MJFCIFSS
Index
Dry air filter
 Press the reset button 19 to clear the stored low pressure reading.
 Push the extractor slot on the dust discharge valve up by hand once a week to
ensure that it does not stick due to humidity and dust.
5.10.1 Checking the air inlet hose
Fig. 5-37 Air inlet hose
The connection (pos. 7), especially the air intake hoses between air cleaner, turbo-
charger, air exchanger (if mounted) and engine intake must be checked for damage
and leaks whenever the filter elements are replaced.
If necessary, retighten the screws of the fixing clamps (pos. 8).
5.10.2 Changing the primary filter element
Fig. 5-38 Changing the primary filter element
Turn the engine off,

 remove the swing nut 2,
 Carefully pull out the primary element 3.
 Clean the inside of the filter housing 9 and the sealing surface with a damp rag.
 Do not direct compressed air into the housing.
5 - 42 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Dry air filter
 Insert the new element,

 make sure it is seated correctly,
 install and tighten the nut 2.
5.10.3 Changing the safety element
Fig. 5-39 Changing the safety element
Note!
Replace the safety element after replacing the main filter cartridge three times or at
least once a year.
Replace the safety element immediately in the event that a visual check has shown
that the safety element is very dirty.
This safety element should only be replaces by a LIEBHERR mechanic!
 Remove the main element as described before.

 Remove wing nut 5 and remove safety element 6.

 Carefully clean the inside of the filter housing with a damp rag.
 Clean the sealing surfaces and check for damage.
 Carefully insert the new safety element and reinstall wing nut 5.
 Install the main filter element 3 as described on previous page and close filter
housing.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 43

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
5.11 Hydraulic system
Maintenance work on the hydraulic system is restricted mainly to the hydraulic tank.
All other units on the system do not require any special maintenance.
The pipe and hose network should be checked at regular intervals for leaks.
Note!
Strict cleanliness is of particular importance for the hydraulic system.
For this reason, the intervals given
– for changing the return-line filter
– for cleaning the oil cooler and
– for changing the oil must be adhered to.
5.11.1 Preparatory activities
Fig. 5-40 Machine position for checking the oil level of the hydraulic system
When checking the oil level or refilling the oil:

– the machine must stand level,
– the work equipment must be laid down on even ground with the stanchion and tilt
cylinder fully extended (bucket and stanchion fully tilted in),
– the support (shield or claw support if mounted) must also be extended.
5.11.2 Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank

Fig. 5-41 Hydraulic tank oil level
When the machine is in the check position, the oil level may not drop below middle
5 - 44 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
level on the sight gauge or oil must be added to the tank.

 If this is not the case, fill oil via the return-line filter until the level reaches the cen-
tral level.
The level MAXI shows the maximum oil level if all cylinders are retracted.
The level MINI shows the minimum oil level if all cylinders are fully extended.
If the oil level drops below the level MINI, the symbol appears on screen when the
lowest quantity is reached.
5.11.3 Depressurizing the hydraulic system
Danger!
A fine stream of liquid can penetrate the skin when under high pressure and cause
serious injury.
 Before working on the hydraulic system, always remove the pressure.
 Do not inspect leaks with bare hands.
Note the following points:

 The machine must be in the position described above.
 Move the pilot control devices (joystick and pedals) in all directions (with the igni-
tion key in the contact position).
Danger!
The hydraulic oil is hot when at operating temperature and could be pressurized.
 Do not allow the hot oil or oil-bearing parts to touch the skin.
Fig. 5-42 Depressurizing the hydraulic system
 Unscrew the breather filter 4 only one turn.

 The hydraulic system will depressurize.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 45

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
5.11.4 Emptying and refilling the hydraulic tank
Fig. 5-43 Draining and refilling the hydraulic oil
1 Filter cover 5 Drain valve

2 Cover 6 Drain valve
4 Breather filter
 If possible, always fill and empty the hydraulic system using a filler unit.
To drain the oil:

 The hydraulic system must be depressurized.
 Unscrew the breather filter 4 by a maximum of one turn.
 Remove the filter covers 1.
 Screw the drain hose to the drain valve 5 and 6 on the collecting pipe and on the
hydraulic tank and let the oil flow out into a suitable container.
To refill the hydraulic oil:

 Unscrew the breather filter 4 by a maximum of one turn.
 Remove the filter covers 1.
 Refill the oil through the filter cartridges until the level reaches precisely the cen-
tral mark on the sight gauge.
 Tighten the breather filter 4.
 Screw on the filter covers 1.
Caution!
 After each hydraulic oil change, vent the hydraulic pumps.
To drain off condensate water (only for mineral oils):

 Drain off the condensate regularly.
 Keep the drain hose on the drain valves 5 and 6 (see Fig. 5-43) until oil without
water flows.
5 - 46 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
Intervals: see maintenance chart
5.11.5 Return-line filter

The return-line filter is located on the top of the hydraulic tank.
Fig. 5-44 Return-line filter
1 Cover 5 Filter element

2 Magnetic rod 6 sealr
3 Hexagonal screw 8 O-ring
4 Breather filter
The magnetic rod 2 of the return-line filter must be cleaned at fixed intervals (see
maintenance chart) and the filter element 5 replaced.
To clean the magnetic plug and replace the filter element:


 Unscrew the screws on the filter cover and lift out cover 1 and magnetic rod 2.
 Carefully clean off any dirt sticking to the magnetic rod.
 Remove the used filter cartridge 5 on the bracket.
 Insert the new filter cartridge on the bracket vertically into the tank and press
down lightly. Then lay the clamp to the side on the tank ring.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 47

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
Caution!
 Ensure that the filter cartridge is standing vertical in the tank and that the O-ring
8 is not damaged.
 Centre the cover unit on the filter unit 5 and position. When doing this, ensure
that the gasket 3 is positioned correctly and is in good condition.
Note!
The filler aperture of the hydraulic tank is fitted with a protective cylinder. This pre-
vents objects getting into the hydraulic tank. The protective cylinder can be re-
moved from the filler aperture if required.
Note!
 Each time you replace the filter unit 5, also replace the pressure filter cartridge
that is integrated in the control oil unit.
To clean the filter:

 Remove the filter housing
 Pull out the filter element
 Clean the filter element and the housing.
To install the new or cleaned filter element

 Coat with hydraulic oil the O-rings, the threads and the sealing faces on the filter
head and on the housing.
 Insert with care the new element onto the centring pin.
 Reattach the filter housing, screw it by hand to the stop and than tighten it with a
wrench using the hexagon head at the bottom of the housing (tightening torque:
40+10 N.m).
5.11.6 Servo filter

The pressure filter 11 integrated in the control oil unit has to be cleaned regularly and
the filter cartridge has to be changed.
5 - 48 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
Fig. 5-45 Control oil unit
1 Control oil unit 12 Filter unit

2 Centering pivot 13 Filter unit sealing ring
10 Pressure accumulator 14 Filter housing
11 Pressure filter 15 O-ring
Note!
It is not permitted to clean the filter unit.
 Change the filter unit each time you open the filter housing.
To replace the filter element:

 Unscrew filter housing 14 from pressure filter 11 and remove filter element 12.
 Clean the filter housing.
 Oil the thread and sealing surfaces on filter housing 14 and on control oil unit 1
as well as sealing rings 13 and 15 with hydraulic oil.
 Push the new filter element 12 carefully onto the centering pivot 2.
 Screw filter housing 14 as far as the stop and turn it back by hand with a 1/4 turn
(approx. 90°).
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 49

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
5.11.7 Replenishing oil filter in swing circuit
Fig. 5-46 Replenishing oil filter in swing circuit
The element in replenishing oil filter 1 has to be changed regularly.

For maintenance intervals, see maintenance chart.
5.11.8 High pressure filters in working circuit
Fig. 5-47 High pressure filters
These filters are mounted to the inlets of the control valve blocks.
The filter elements must be checked and if necessary cleaned :
– regulary every 2000 operating hours.
– each time a working pump is replaced.
To clean a filter element :

 Relieve tank pressure.
 Remove filter housing 2.
 Remove the O-ring 3, the supporting ring 6 and the pressure spring 5.
 Remove filter element 4, clean it in gasoline or replace it.
 Clean the filter housing 2 and filter top 1 and reinstall;
 replace the O-ring 3 by a new one. Make sure that the O-ring 3, the supporting
5 - 50 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
ring 6 and the pressure spring 5 are seated correctly.

 Tighten the breather filter on the hydraulic tank.
Important!
Anytime the element is cleaned or replaced, check for leaks.
Start the engine, work with the machine for a short period and then check for leaks
between the filter housing 2 and the filter top 1.
5.11.9 Control circuit

The sensor devices do not require any special maintenance.
 Inspect the pipe network and connections on all units (pressure accumulator,
pressure limiting valve, pressure filter etc.) regularly for leaks.
Danger!
The pressure accumulator keeps the control circuit under pressure for certain op-
erations which also take place after the diesel engine has been switched off.
Before working on the control circuit, the control pressure must be depressurized
as follows:
 Lay the work equipment on the ground.
 Operate both joysticks (with ignition key in contact position).
5.11.10 Bleeding the hydraulic pumps
Fig. 5-48 Hydraulic pumps and pump for fan drive

Bleeding the hydraulic pumps

After working on the pumps or after changing oil in the hydraulic system, the hydrau-
lic pumps must be bled.
To bleed the swing pump,
 loosen the union at the leak oil hose 2,
 let the air escape.
 As soon as hydraulic oil flows out of the hose, reconnect the leak oil hose.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 51

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
To bleed a working pump,

 loosen the corresponding union 3,
 let air escape and retighten the screw as soon as hydraulic oil flows out.
Fill the pumps with hydraulic oil through the same connection or plug before initial
start up, or after repairs or replacement.
Caution!
Bleed the pump for fan drive after any bleeds on the hydraulic pumps
Bleeb the pump for fan drive

To bleed the pump for fan drive,
 loosen the locking plug 27,
 let the air escape and retighten the locking plug as soon as hydraulic oil flows out.
Removing the suction hose
Fig. 5-49 Shut off valve on the hydraulic tank
If the suction hose have to be removed, the shut off valve at the hydraulic tank has
to be closed.
Turn the valve by 90° to close :
– A open
– B closed
After the tank pressure is relieved,
 remove the drain valve on the suction hose fitting on the side of the pump,
 drain the hydraulic oil from the pump into a suitable container.
After repair, be certain to return the valve to its original position, push it in its notch
and retighten the bleeder filter of the hydraulic tank.
Bleed the hydraulic pumps.
5 - 52 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
Breather filter on the hydraulic tank
Fig. 5-50 Hydraulic tank breather filter
This breather filter 4 must be replaced each hydraulic oil change.
5.11.11 Bypass oil filter for hydraulic circuit (option)
Fig. 5-51 Bypass oil filter for hydraulic circuit
The machine can be equipped with an additional oil filter. This filter can be mounted
in the bypass of the hydraulic circuit between control valve block - return and the hy-
draulic tank. This filter can although be mounted in lubrication circuit of the engine.
This additional oil filter is fixed on the hydraulic tank. During operation a small quan-
tity of oil flows threw this filter in the bypass of the main return filter.
This filter is designed to drain water by absorbing the water contained in the oil. Mon-
ting bypass oil filter is especially recommended when using environmentally accept-
able hydraulic fluids because these fluids have a greater capacity to absorb water
than mineralhydraulic fluids.
Note !
IUsing this filter does not relieve the operator of the responsability of draining the
water condensation from the hydraulic tank.
The filter element must be replaced every time the return filter element is changed. ,
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 53

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
but at least every six months.
Danger!
A fine stream of liquid can penetrate the skin when under high pressure and cause
serious injury.
 Before working on the hydraulic system, always remove the pressure.
Fig. 5-52 Change of the filter element
1 Screw 2 Washer
3 Cover 4 Gasket ring
5 Filter element
 Loosen the screw 1, remove the cover 3 and pull out the old filter element 5.
 Insert a new filter element, clean the cover 3 and put in a new gasket ring 4.
 Put on the cover 3 eand retighten the screw 1.
5.11.12 Servicing the hydraulic cylinder
Checking the condition of the piston rod mount

Fig. 5-53 Piston rod mount
5 - 54 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Hydraulic system
Note
When a leak appears on the piston rod mount of a hydraulic cylinder (see arrow),
the sealing kit must be replaced by a LIEBHERR fitter.
Protecting the piston rods
Fig. 5-54 Machine with piston rods drawn in
When the machine is out of service for more than 4 weeks and particularly for trans-
portation by sea, the following measures must be taken:
 Position or transport the machine in such a way that the piston rods are fully
drawn into the cylinders.
 Cover any loose piston rods with a thick layer of non-corrosive anti-corrosion fluid.
Grease quality: see “Lubricating and operating materials”
 For sea transportation, check the condition of the piston rods once more after
loading.
 Additionally, cover piston rods with anti-corrosion fluid if a cylinder only has a low
stroke for certain work, meaning that the piston rod is not regularly moistened with
hydraulic oil (eg. cylinder on slewing arm when working over ground).
 Check the condition of hydraulic cylinders which are not moved a great deal reg-
ularly.
5.11.13 Replacing hydraulic hoses

Fig. 5-55 High pressure hose with SAE fitting
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 55

MJFCIFSS
Index
Oil changes on components
Danger!
A defective hydraulic hose can cause accidents and injuries.
 Replace defective hydraulic hoses (bubbles, moisture, damaged top edge etc.)
immediately.
 Install new hoses in such a way that torsion loading is avoided.
 Ensure that the hydraulic hose is not twisted when mounting.
Installed high pressure hoses with SAE connections have a nominal diameter of 16,
20, 25, 32 or 40 (5/8", 3/4", 1", 1"1/4, or 1"1/2).
You must tighten the mounting screws of the SAE fittings with the following tightening
torques.:
Size of screw 4 Torque value in Nm - Quality 10.9
Half flanges 5a Flat flange 5b Conical flange 5c

M8 31 / /
M10 62 45 65
M12 108 70 110
M14 172 120 180
M16 264 170 250
M20 350 250 450
Tab. 5-7 Tightening torques for SAE fittings - Quality 10.9
Size of screw 4 Torque value in Nm - Quality 8.8
Half flanges 5a
M8 22
M10 44
M12 76
M14 122
M16 187
Tab. 5-8 Tightening torques for SAE fittings - Quality 8.8
5.12 Oil changes on components

5.12.1 General information

 The machine must be standing level.
 Wait briefly until the oil has collected in the oil sump.
 Drain off the oil (preferably when oil is at operating temperature)
 Add the oil.
5 - 56 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
 Check the oil level.

Oil quality and quantity: see lubricant chart.
Change intervals: see lubrication and maintenance chart.
5.12.2 Swing gear - Oil change
Fig. 5-56 Changing oil in swing gear
1 Oil drain valve 3 Oil filler tube

2 Dipstick 4 Oil filler cover / breather cover
Note!
If possible, drain the oil when the oil is at operating temperature.
To drain the oil:

 Remove the protective plate 6.
 Remove the cover 4 through the opening in the front sheet of the uppercarriage,
 unscrew the cover of the drain valve 1.
 Attach the oil drain hose 5 to the valve 1,
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 57

MJFCIFSS
Index
 drain the oil into an appropriate container.

 Remove the drain hose and reinstall the plug of the drain valve 1.
 Reinstall the protective plate 6.
To add oil :
 Remove the cover 4.
 Add oil via the filler tube 3 until the level reaches the upper mark on the dipstick 2.
 Reinstall the cover 4.
See lubrication charts for quantities and specifications, see maintenance chart for oil
change intervals.
5.12.3 Changing the oil in the splitterbox
Fig. 5-57 Changing oil in splitterbox
Pos. 4 shows the oil filler and bleeder screw of the splitterbox and pos. 5 shows the
dipstick to check the oil level
To check the oil level

Check the oil level a few minutes after turning off the engine.
To drain the oil

Drain the oil when the oil is at operation temperature.
To drain,
 remove the cap on the drain 7,
 install drain hose 6,
 drain the oil into an appropriate container.
To add oil
 Add oil to the oil level mark on the dipstick,
 run the engine for a few minutes,
 stop it and recheck the oil level.
5 - 58 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Travel gear
See lubrication chart for oil quantities and specifications.

See maintenance chart for oil change intervals.
5.12.4 Travelling gear - changing the oil
Fig. 5-58 Travelling gear - adding and draining oil
 Before draining the oil, the drive unit must be operated until one sealing plug is
positioned exactly vertical to the centre axle of the transmission (position 2).
To drain the oil:

 Ensure that you have a suitable oil drainage container to hand.
 Place the container beneath the drive unit.
 Remove sealing plug 1.
 Remove sealing plug 2.
 The oil drains into the container.
To add the oil:

 Screw in sealing plug 2.
 Add the oil until the level reaches the bore hole 1.
 Screw in sealing plug 1.
5.13 Travel gear
The travel gear is maintenance-free until the regeneration of the treads or the cylin-
der or until all travel gear parts are completely worn.
The lifetime design of the support rollers, track rollers and idlers increases the travel
gear’s lifetime and metal seals make it insensitive to dirt.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 59

MJFCIFSS
Index
Travel gear
5.13.1 Checking mounting screws of travel gears, track pads and

sprocket wheels
Fig. 5-59 Travel gear component mountings
 Carry out regular checks for loose mounting screws on the base plates and travel
gears.
 Monitor tightening torques.
– Mounting screws 7 on track pads:
• Torque the track pad bolts M33 x 2 to : 3400 Nm (2509 ft.lbs.)
– Mounting screws 8 of the travel gears onto the side frames : 2100 Nm (1550
ft.lbs.)
– Mounting screws 9 of the sprocket wheels onto the travel gears : 2100 Nm (1550
ft.lbs.)
– Mounting screws 10 of the hydraulic motors onto the travel gears : 960 Nm (710
ft.lbs.)
5.13.2 Monitoring the track tension
Fig. 5-60 Monitoring the track tension
 Relieve the tracks by driving the machine forwards and backwards.

 Place the measuring rod 1 in the area between the carrier rollers
 Measure distance A between the measuring rod lower edge.
 The track should, under operating conditions, sag 25 to 30 mm between the
carrier rollers.
5 - 60 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Travel gear
 Retighten the crawlers if necessary.
5.13.3 Retightening the track
Fig. 5-61 track when insufficiently (A) and correctly (B) tightened.
With normal wear on the travel gear, it is necessary to check the track tension regu-
larly and retighten the track if necessary.
Fig. 5-62 Retightening the track
 Remove the cover 6 on the side frame of the undercarriage.

 Screw high pressure hose 2 onto the manual grease gun 1.
 Through the opening in then side frame, connect the high pressure hose 2 to the
lubricating nipple 3 of the grease tensioner 4.
 Inject grease until the track is sufficiently tensioned.
 Check the track tension as described above.
 Remove the grease gun 1, the pressure hose 2 and reattach the cover 6.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 61

MJFCIFSS
Index
Travel gear
5.13.4 Releasing the track tension
Danger!
Risk of injury due to sudden dropping of the crawler or to a jet of grease under high
pressure.
 Because of the risk of grease jet, always wear protective gloves and glasses
when releasing the chain tension
 When releasing the tension of the chain, keep your head away from the opening
5 in the track side frame. Never touch the grease nipple 3 with your hand but
always use an appropiate tool to unscrew or screw it in.
 To screw the grease nipple 3 in or out, always catch it at its rear part 3.1 (use a
27 mm wrench) and never at its front part (22 mm wrench).
 Before attempting to release the chain tension, loosen and remove every item
which may be stucked in the chain while driving forward and backward or doing
as described in the section "Cleaning the track components" thereafter.
 Carefully unscrew lubricating nipple 3 (see Fig. 5-62) by several thread pitches
until the grease escapes out of the releasing groove of the nipple.
 Tighten lubricating nipple 3 as soon as the desired track tension is obtained.
 After the adjustment procedure, drive the machine forwards and backwards and
check the track tension again as described above.
5.13.5 Cleaning the travel gear

Do not operate the machine if larger stones, pieces of wood or metal, wires or cables
are trapped in the travel gear.
Dried or frozen mud and stones or other foreign bodies in the travel gear parts could
result in considerable damage to the machine if the machine is operated or an at-
tempt is made to free the machine using engine power.
Note!
All the chain pins of the travel gear must be greased with black grease (Ident Nb.
8503279).
 In sub zero temperatures, set the machine on boards to prevent the tracks be-
coming frozen to the subsoil.
Caution!
To avoid causing considerable damage to the frozen machine, never use force to
tear it free.
 A frozen track can be freed by carefully heating the base plates.
5 - 62 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Electrical system
Fig. 5-63 Raising the machine
Caution!
The machine could slide away or back.
 Once you have supported the machine, prop it securely with wooden beams.
 Before setting down the machine, clean any very dirty parts of the travel gear.
 Clean sand and dirt off the sliding surfaces on the tensioning units and grease.
 By using the work equipment to support the machine at the side, one side of the
undercarriage can be raised to clean the travel gear (see Fig. 5-63).
5.14 Electrical system
5.14.1 Notes on the electrical system
Danger!
Risk of injury due to formation of sparks.
 Avoid sparks and naked flame when charging batteries or working on the batter-
ies.
 Always wear protective goggles and gloves.
 Check that the machine’s electrical system is functioning correctly at regular in-
tervals.
 Burnt-out fuses and bulbs should be replaced immediately once the cause of the
defect has been rectified.
 Rectify defects such as loose connections, abraded cables or badly fastened
clamps immediately.
 Disconnect the batteries when working on the electrical system or when carrying
out electric arc welding on the machine.
Danger!
Risk of injury due to formation of sparks.
 Disconnect the negative terminal (-) first and connect it last.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 63

MJFCIFSS
Index
Electrical system
5.14.2 Main battery switch
Caution!
Take particular care with machines with built-in independent heating.
 Only switch off the main battery switch when the independent heating’s run-on
is over.
Fig. 5-64 Main battery switch
 Before starting any work on the electrical system, including welding work on the
machine, switch the main battery switch to position 0.
 When washing the machine, cover the electrical units (particularly the alternator,
generator, cabling, electronic components and measured value sensor) to pre-
vent water penetrating.
 When cleaning the engine with a water / steam jet, do not subject electrical meas-
ured value sensors such as oil pressure switches to any direct jets.
 If this happens, moisture could penetrate and lead to contact corrosion and the
failure of the measuring function.
 Oil pressure switches are not watertight due to the necessary presence of
membrane ventilation.
Note!
Batteries can become flat if the machine is out of service for longer periods.
 Before laying up the machine for longer periods, switch the main battery switch
to position 0 (off).
5.14.3 Battery care

The battery must always be kept clean to ensure that it is able to function perfectly.
 Particular care should be taken to clean the pole ends and cable terminals A reg-
ularly and to then cover them with a thick layer of acidproof grease (see Fig. 5-65).
5 - 64 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Heating/air-conditioning system
Danger!
Bent rubber hoses on the central gas outlet increase the risk of explosion!
The hydrogen contained in the batteries should not be allowed to build up in the ac-
cumulator box and must be able to escape via the rubber hoses. The central gas
outlet hoses must be routed without kinks.
 Check the condition of the hoses B regularly, particularly after installing a battery
(see Fig. 5-65).
The fluid level in the cells should be 10 to 15 mm above the top of the plate. Only
distilled water is to be used for any refilling.
Fig. 5-65 Battery care
 From time to time, measure the acid concentration C using an acid tester.
When the battery is fully charged, the unit weight is 1.28 kg/l (31.5° Bé).
 If the acid tester displays a lower value, the batteries is virtually flat and should be
charged if necessary.
5.15 Heating/air-conditioning system
The machine has a combined heating / air-conditioning system as standard.

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 65

MJFCIFSS
Index
5.15.1 Recirculated and fresh air filters
Fig. 5-66 Recirculated air filter
Fig. 5-67 Fresh air filter
The air flow in the heating / air-conditioning system is reduced when the filters are
dirty and this frequently results in the system icing up or shutting down.
– Remove and clean the recirculated and fresh air filter 1 and 3 every 500 operating
hours.
– Shorten cleaning intervals when working in heavy dust conditions.
– Do not operate the machine, even briefly, without these filters, since the heat ex-
changer 6 will otherwise quickly become blocked (see Fig. 5-68).
To clean and change the recirculated and fresh air filters:

 Push the backrest of the operator’s seat forwards to remove the recirculated air
filter 1.
 Open the quick-release fasteners 2 by a quarter turn.
 Remove the recirculated air filter 1.
 Remove the deflector 4.
 Remove the fresh air filter 3.
Note!
 Never wash the filter elements with hot water or a steam jet.
 If damaged or in a bad condition, replace the filter elements.
 Blow out the filter elements 1 and 3 using compressed air or clean in cold or luke-
warm water.
5 - 66 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
5.15.2 Heating system

Carry out the following maintenance work on the heating system each year before
the start of the heating period:
– Check the entire coolant circuit for leaks.
– Retighten the connection points for the coolant circuit, the hose connections on
the heat exchanger, the seals on the shutoff valves and the hose clamps.
– Only operate the system with DCA 4 anti-corrosion fluid / antifreeze in the cool-
ant.
Fig. 5-68 Heating unit with solenoid valve
To vent the heating system:

 To vent, unscrew the red cap of the vent valve over opening A (see arrow).
 Push in the valve to allow the air to escape.
To clean solenoid valve 5:

 Annually, before the start of the heating period, remove and clean solenoid valve
5 (Y46) for the hot water supply.
 Also clean the solenoid valve if heating performance is not sufficient.
 Rinse out the solenoid valve membrane with water.
 Also ensure that the equalizing hole on the membrane is not blocked with dirt.
To check the heat exchanger:

 Check the heat exchanger plates 6 annually for damage.
 Blow out with compressed air if dirty.
 Align the plates if necessary.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 67

MJFCIFSS
Index
5.15.3 Air-conditioning system
Fig. 5-69 Dryer-accumulator unit
To check the dryer-accumulator unit:

 With the diesel engine running and the air-conditioning system switched on,
check the refrigerant level in the inspection glass 10 of dryer-accumulator unit 9.
Note!
If there is insufficient refrigerant, the white float 11 lays at the bottom of the inspec-
tion glass.
 If the cooling effect is diminishing, have the system refilled by a refrigeration en-
gineer.
 Determine the degree of moisture of the desiccant in dryer-accumulator unit 9.

 To do this, observe the colour of the indicator pearl 12 in the inspection glass.
If the pearl is orange, the degree of moisture in the coolant circuit is OK. If, however,
the pearl is not coloured, the dryer-accumulator unit is saturated with moisture.
 Change dryer-accumulator unit 9 immediately.
 Perform a visual check on the condition of dryer-accumulator unit 9.
 If it is observed that dryer-accumulator unit 9 is rusted or damaged (e g. on the
panel fastening or on the hose connection), replace dryer-accumulator unit 9
(pressure tank).
In the two cases referred to above and at least once a year, have the dryer-accumu-
lator unit 9 replaced by a fitter trained in refrigeration engineering.
The coolant circuit must be emptied, checked for leaks and refilled. Check for abra-
sion, replace and if necessary retighten the hose connections on the hoses.
5 - 68 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Greasing the machine
Fig. 5-70 Fan motor on the heating/air-conditioning device
Additional maintenance work:

The following maintenance work must also be carried out at least once a year by a
fitter trained in refrigeration engineering:
 Check the function of the fan motor 13 (M13).
 Check the function of the ventilation flaps on the heating / air-conditioning system.
 Check the electrical connections for correct positioning (good contact).
 Check the electrical lines for abrasions.
 Check the defrost thermostat 14 (B43) in the evaporator (function, correct posi-
tioning and for damage).
 Check the function of the pressure switch B44 on the dryer-accumulator unit 9
(see Fig. 5-69).
5.16 Greasing the machine
5.16.1 Swing ring lubrication
Lubrication of the swing ring teeth

Fig. 5-71 Lubrication of the swing ring teeth
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 69

MJFCIFSS
Index
Greasing the machine
A housing around the pinion of the swing gear contains all the necessary lubrication
reserves for the swing ring teeth lubrication 7.
During operation lubricate the teeth at regular intervals to replace this reserve.
To lubricate,
 hold the push button S84-1 depressed for approx. one minute.
 During the lubrication procedure, turn the uppercarriage by at least one complete
rotation (360°) to make sure that the complete gear is lubricated.
 Afterward, turn the uppercarriage once more by 360°, without adding more
grease.
This procedure must occur at least once per shift. In heavy applications, lubricate the
gear at least once every four hours.
Check the grease tank
Caution!
Be very careful of your grease tank version, because the grease used in the differ-
ent systems is not the same. And the use of an other grease can cause severe dam-
ages.
See lubrication chart for grease specifications.
Grease tank (Liebherr version)
Fig. 5-72 Grease tank (Liebherr version)
The grease tank level must be checked at least once a week. If necessary, add more
grease.
5 - 70 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Quick-change systems
Grease tank (Lincoln version)
Fig. 5-73 Grease tank (Lincoln version)
The grease tank level must be checked at least once a week. If necessary, add more
grease.
Lubricating of swing ring roller races

The swing ring races are greased by the semi-automatic centralized lubrication sys-
tem, simultaneously with the lubrication points of the working attachment.
5.16.2 Lubrication of attachment bearing points

All the lubrication points of the working attachment, including those in the area of the
grab tool are connected to the semi-automatic lubricating system and are greased
automatically at regular intervals while working.
See the lubricant chart for grease specification.
5.17 Quick-change systems

5.17.1 Greasing the mechanical quick-change adapter (option)

The mechanical quick-change adapter is not lubricated via the central greasing sys-
tem. The bearing points must be greased using the grease gun.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 71

MJFCIFSS
Index
Quick-change systems
Fig. 5-74 Greasing the mechanical quick-change adapter
 Grease the bearing points via the lubricating nipple using a grease gun.
Grease quality: see “Lubricating and operating materials”
Note!
If the mechanical quick-change adapter is greased when the pin is drawn out, the
hollow area between the locking pins fills with grease and the pins can no longer be
reinserted.
 Ensure that the locking pins are inserted when greasing.
5.17.2 Hydraulic quick-change adapter (option)
Greasing the quick-change adapter

The hydraulic quick-change adapter is not lubricated via the central greasing system.
The bearing points must be greased using the grease gun.
Fig. 5-75 Greasing the quick-change adapter

 Grease the locking pins 1 via the lubricating nipple using a grease gun.
Note!
The hydraulic quick-change adapter cannot be sufficiently greased if the locking
pins are drawn out.
 Ensure that the locking pins are inserted when greasing.
5 - 72 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Drive unit brakes and swing gear brakes
Cleaning the sieve filter
Fig. 5-76 Cleaning the sieve filter
The filter disc 12 in the bolt connections between the connecting hoses and the hy-
draulic cylinder must be checked for blockages and, if necessary, cleaned every
2000 operating hours.
 Remove the cover 20 and the screws 21 from the quick-change adapter.
 Remove bolt connections and hydraulic hoses from the hydraulic cylinder 10.
 Screw out the outer mounting assembly 13 using a suitable tool (e g. a scribe).
 Remove the filter disc 12 , check and if necessary clean or replace it.
 Place the filter disc 12 on the inner mounting assembly 11 and mount the outer
mounting assembly 13.
 Connect bolt connections and hydraulic hoses to hydraulic cylinder 10.
 Fasten the cover 20 with the screws 21 on the quick-change adapter.
5.18 Drive unit brakes and swing gear brakes
Both the drive unit brakes and the swing gear brakes are spring-applied, pressure-
released multi-plate brakes. They are ventilated hydraulically and are fully sealed
and integrated in the travel gear or swing gear transmission.
Their usage purely as parking brakes makes them wear-free and therefore mainte-
nance free.
5.19 Check mounting bolts for tightness
The mounting bolts listed below must be regularly be checked and retighten if nec-
essary. See maintenance schedule for checks intervals.
Notice : when installing bolts of size bigger than M40 the thread of the screw must
be slightly coated with a MoS2 based grease. Also grease the bolt head supporting
surface, unless hereafter otherwise specified.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 73

MJFCIFSS
Index
Check mounting bolts for tightness
Caution!
The mounting bolts of the main components (espacially the bolts listed below), of
the hydraulic hoses and of the counterweight must be replaced after every removal.
5.19.1 Mounting bolts of the counterweight
Fig. 5-77 Counterweight bolts
The mounting bolts 1 (M42) must be torqued to 4975 Nm (3682 ft.lbs).
5.19.2 Mounting screws of the swing ring
Fig. 5-78 Swing ring bolts

The mounting screws M30 swing ring to undercarriage (3) and uppercarriage to
swing ring (4) must be torqued to 1900 Nm (1400 ft.lbs.).
5 - 74 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Check mounting bolts for tightness
Danger!
The special tool may only be operated by qualified personnel, especially trained for
the use of this high pressure tensioning device and aware of the operating instruc-
tions as well of the recommendations for accident and damage prevention concern-
ing this tool.
Use appropriate working platforms and lifting devices to install and hold in position
the special tool while tensioning the bolts.
5.19.3 Mounting screws of the hydraulic oil and fuel tank
Fig. 5-79 Hydraulic oil and fuel bolts
The mounting screws 5 (M20) must be torqued to 560 Nm (413 ft.lbs.)
5.19.4 Mounting screws of the swing gear and motor

Fig. 5-80 Swing gear and motor bolts
The mounting bolts 6 (M30) of the swing gear must be torqued to 1900 Nm (1400
ft.lbs)
The mounting bolts 7 (M24) of the swing motor must be torqued to 960 Nm (708
ft.lbs).
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 75

MJFCIFSS
Index
Use environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids in LIEBHERR earthmoving machines
5.19.5 Connection of central piece and side frames

The bolts must be checked every 500 working hours, and if necessary retightened.
The lower bolts M42 must be torqued to 5940 Nm (4380 ft.lbs).
The upper bolts M30 must be torqued to 1900 Nm (1400 ft.lbs).
5.20 Use environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids

in LIEBHERR earthmoving machines
5.20.1 General
If specific applications require that even in the case of accidents or leakage there
may be no damage caused to the environment, hydraulic excavators using environ-
mentally friendly hydraulic fluids can be operated.
These lubricants are free of mineral oils, they are water-soluble in every propostion
and meet the requirements for biodegradability.
Never mix them together or with lubricants based on mineral oils.
The following recommendations state how to proceed when using these biodegrad-
able hydraulic fluids in LIEBHERR earthmoving machines.
5.20.2 Prescriptions for biodegradable hydraulic fluids

When using environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids, we exclusively recommend
synthetic ester oils with a viscosity according to ISO VG46.
Note :
Due to their limited high temperature stability, vegetable oils cannot be used.
Polyglycols decompose various machine paints and should only be used in special
cases. In this instance, the material compatibility in regard to seals, paints, etc..., has
to be observed.
Due to the lack of experience with the various products, a "Warranty Declaration" has
to be inquired from the Oil Supplier if LIEBHERR earthmoving machines are to be
operated with environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids based on synthetic ester upon
"customer’s demand". The declaration applies for hydraulic components in the case
of damage caused by the hydraulic fluid. This "warranty declaration" together with
the completely filled out confirmation has to be sent to LIEBHERR.
Fundamentally, the supplier is responsible to maintain the standard of quality, stand-
ards ans specifications of his product when environmentally friendly products are be-
ing used.
In order to avoid misunderstandings, a distinct reference must be made on the hy-
draulic tank, stating the fluid which the machine is operating with.
Attention :
Mixing various "environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids" together is prohibited.
The name "synthetic ester" for example does not mean, that all products carrying this
name have the same contents. The lack of experience with biodegradable products
does not allow a general statement.
5 - 76 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Use environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids in LIEBHERR earthmoving machines
5.20.3 Oil change intervals

The oils changes in preset intervals are not allowed for environmentally friendly hy-
draulic fluids.
The time for oil change must be determined by oil sample analysis and according to
the laboratory reports.
To take the oil samples, LIEBHERR offers its customers a complete analysis-set for
wear check lubrication-analysis (Id. No. 7018368), which consists of 6 coded sample
containers, 6 sample cover letters, 6 envelopes as well as a 3 mtr. silicon hose. Oil
analysis and laboratory report are already included in the price for the set! Further-
more, only with the first command, a hand pump (Id. No. 8145666) or, as an alterna-
tive, an extraction valve (Id. No. 7019068) and a high pressure hose for pressure
test-point (Id. No. 7002437), will be necessary only once.
Further oil analysis or oil change intervals have to be carried out according to the
sample analysis in the laboratory report from wear check. The evaluation result has
to be sent to LIEBHERR and the customer.
5.20.4 Oil filters change intervals

The filters change intervals as stated by LIEBHERR must be adhered to.
Use only Original LIEBHERR filters. We recommend the use of special "bio oil filters"
to reduce the percentage of zinc in the system (see also chart of return filters).
5.20.5 Water condensation

Water condensation must be drained from the hydraulic tank in regular intervals
(drain plug on the tank). It is recommended to do this after the machine was stopped
for a longer period of time, for example monday morning.
The percentage of condense water is not allowed to exceed 0,1 wgt.%.
5.20.6 Changing to environmentally friendly hydraulic fluid

If machines which used to operate with mineral oils or other hydraulic fluids are mod-
ified to operate with environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids, it is imperative to ob-
serve all LIEBHERR guidelines for modifications. Flushing the system is absolutely
necessary to ensure trouble-free operation.
Never install attachments from other machines without strictly adhering to all guide-
lines for modifications with regards to the interior coating of components (e.g. the hy-
draulic tank), and procedure for flushing with flusher oil (to drain the mineral oil, ...).
The percentage of mineral oil, resulting from changing or mixing with other mineral
oil based fluids, remaining within the system is not allowed to exceed 2 wgt. %.
If the changing guidelines stated by LIEBHERR are not adhered to, warranty will be
refused in case of damage. In case of doubt, first obtain these guidelines from your
LIEBHERR representative.
Having changed to environmentally friendly hydraulic fluid or when initially filling the
system a reference fresh oil sample must be taken after initial warn-up and sent to
the laboratory for analysis. The sample must be taken while the machine is running
using pressure test-point valve (Id. No. 7019068) or right after stopping the engine
via the breather valve using the vacuum pump.
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 77

MJFCIFSS
Index
Fire suppression system
5.20.7 Particular precautions

– When disposing of these fluids make sure that this medium is not treated as a
mineral oil, i.e. there are special regulations for the disposal of these fluids in in-
dividual countries. In case you have any questions please contact your represent-
ative waste oil recycler.
– When handling the medium simply use gloves and, in case there is a risk of spray-
ing, use safety goggles as well. Wash your hands before taking a break and at
the end of your shift. In case the fluids come into contact with skin, rinse with lots
of water; in case of eye contact, rinse with water for 10 to 15 minutes.
– After any fluid is spilled or runs out, wash away any smaller amounts with lots of
water; larger amounts must be properly collected and disposed of.
– In case of fire, the usual fire extinguishers may be used (like water vapor, CO2,
foam, dry ice extinguishers, ...). Never aim a stream of water directly at hot, burn-
ing material (risk of splattering). Thermal decomposition generates CO and or
CO2.
5.21 Fire suppression system
The maintenance of the fire suppression system must only be done by the system
supplier or the system dealer.
The maintenance intervals must be strictly observed.
5.22 Control and maintenance chart
Caution!
Careful maintenance can only be carried out when the machine is clean. In partic-
ular, visual checks such as crack testing are only possible on a clean machine.
 Clean the machine before you start maintenance work (see also the chapter
“Safe maintenance of the machine”, subheading “Cleaning and crack testing”).
Note
The daily maintenance work that the device operator has to carry out comprises a
function check of the brakes (swing brake and travel brake), and the electrical and
hydraulic systems.
Additionally, a visual check must be made for leaks on the engine, hydraulic system
and transmission.
5 - 78 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Control and maintenance chart
Maintenance /
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT
inspection at
R 984 C - Litronic
operating hours
At 1000, 3000 By maintenance personnel By authorized specialist personnel Note

At 2000, 4000
Every 10 -50
At 500, 1500
(machine owner)
Every 8 - 10
At 250, 750
On delivery
 First and only interval

 Repeat interval  First and only interval
 Special interval every 250 hours  Repeat interval
DIESEL ENGINE AND SPLITTERBOX
       Check engine oil level
       Check oil pressure and coolant temperature during operation
       Check for air filter clogging at the maintenance indicator
       Check coolant level
     Empty water separator at fuel filter and drain fuel tank
     Check oil level in splitterbox
   Replace oil in the splitterbox
    Check and clean cooler, hoses, ventilator
    Check condition and tension of V-belts
    Replace lube oil filter cartridge
    Change engine oil 1)

    Replace the water filter, check the concentration of anticorrosion additive
DCA4 in the coolant
    Check crankcase breather tube, clean it if necessary
    Replace fuel filter elements
   Check and if necessary adjust engine speed control
  Check mounting screws of engine consoles, oil pan and splitterbox
  Check intake and exhaust system for condition and tightness
  Replace fuel tank breather filter
Replace main element on air filter (as necessary, at least once a year)
Replace safety element on air filter (as necessary, at least once a year)
Check air hoses between air filter and engine (at filter maintenance)
Replace antifreeze and anticorrosive coolant mixture (every 2 years)
Every 1500 hours or 1 year

perform a complete "1500 hours" Maintenance Work, as stated in Operation
and Maintenance Manual for Cummins Engine
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 79

MJFCIFSS
Index
Maintenance /
inspection at
R 984 C - Litronic
operating hours
By maintenance personnel By authorized specialist personnel Note

At 1000, 3000
At 2000, 4000
Every 10 -50
At 500, 1500
(machine owner)
Every 8 - 10
At 250, 750
On delivery

Every 6000 hours or 2 years

perform a complete "6000 hours" Maintenance Work, as stated in Operation
and Maintenance Manual for Cummins Engine
AIR SYSTEM
      Check alcohol level in the antifreeze pump (during cold season)
      Drain air tank (in winter daily and in summer weekly)
    Check cut in and cut out pressures of air pressure regulator
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
      Check oil level in hydraulic tank
      Clean magnetic rods in return filters (daily during first 300 hrs.)
   Replace oil filter in the servo control circuit
   Replace replenishing oil filter on swing pump
   Check mounting of components
   Drain condensation water at hydraulic tank

(When using environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids keep water percentage
below 0,1%, if necessary install a bypass oil filter)
   If mounted check return filter for hydraulic hammer for cleanliness, replace el-
ement if necessary
   Replace return filter cartridge (first at 500 hours)
   If mounted, replace bypass oil filter element (first 500 hours and at least every
6 months)
  Check cleanliness of hydraulic oil cooler, clean it as necessary
  Check hydraulic system for function and leaks
    Perform a detailled check of all hoses, lines and fittings for any external visible
damage
 Every 4000 hrs (or at least once a year), all hydraulic pumps must be checked
and adjusted by trained qualified Liebherr personnel
  Check and adjust primary and secondary pressure relief valves
  Bleed servo system and hydraulic pumps
 Replace hydraulic oil (or optimise intervals according to oil sample analysis re- 3)
ports)
5 - 80 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Maintenance /
inspection at
R 984 C - Litronic
operating hours

At 1000, 3000
At 2000, 4000
Every 10 -50
At 500, 1500
(machine owner)
Every 8 - 10
At 250, 750
On delivery

 Every 8000 hrs, replace following high pressure (HP) hoses:

– all HP hoses between work pumps and valve banks,
– all HP hoses of the swing circuit:
• all HP hoses between swing pumps and swing motors,
• all pressure equalizing hoses between swing pump / swing motors cir-
cuits,
• all HP pilot hoses of the swing pumps regulation,
– all hoses between upper deck and attachment,
– all hoses of the oil cooler fan drive circuit, including pilot hoses,
– all hoses of the water cooler fan drive circuit, including pilot hoses.
 Replace breather filter on hydraulic tank
 Check filter elements of high pressure filters, if necessary clean or replace

them
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
      Check indicator lights and gauges on control panel when starting
    Check head and floodlights
   Check level and specific gravity of electrolyte in the batteries
   Check and clean battery terminals
   Check system and components for function
SWING GEAR
    Check oil level and for leaks
   Replace gear oil (first at 500 hours)
  Check function and operation of swing brake
  Check mounting of gear and oil motor

SWING RING
     Lube swing ring teeth
     Check grease level in lube pump for swing ring teeth
  Check, if necessary tighten mounting screws
  Check pinion gear mesh
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 81

MJFCIFSS
Index
Maintenance /
inspection at
R 984 C - Litronic
operating hours

At 1000, 3000
At 2000, 4000
Every 10 -50
At 500, 1500
(machine owner)
Every 8 - 10
At 250, 750
On delivery

TRAVEL GEARS
    Check oil level and for leaks
  Check function and operation of travel brakes
   Check mounting screws of gears, sprocket wheels and oil motors
  Replace gear oil (first at 500 hours) SAE 90

or SAE
80W90
TRACKS
      Check track chain tension visually, retighten if necessary
 Clean track chains (after working hours)

    Check and tighten mounting screws of track pads and sprocket wheels
   Clean and lubricate sliding surfaces of chain tensioners
   Check idlers, carrier and track rollers for leaks
CENTRAL LUBRICATION
      Check movement of control pins and hoses for leaks
     Perform a complete weekly maintenance
Yearly perform a lube pump control head maintenance
CAB & HEATER
    Check level in reservoir for winshield washer, refill if necessary
   Check function of heater (before start of cold season)
  Check heater system for leaks

  Check and grease locks and hinges on doors and windows
 Check the warm water solenoid valve for function and chocking, clean it as
necessary
AIR CONDITIONER
    Operate the air conditioner (at least once every second week)
5 - 82 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Maintenance /
inspection at
R 984 C - Litronic
operating hours

At 1000, 3000
At 2000, 4000
Every 10 -50
At 500, 1500
(machine owner)
Every 8 - 10
At 250, 750
On delivery

   Check the condition of condensator, blow it out if necessary
   Clean, if necessary replace both air filters in airco unit.

Reduce maintenance interval in very dusty conditions
   Check the mounting screws and the drive belt of airco compressor
   Check the drier / receiver unit for moisture degree, coolant level and good con-
dition (no rust), replace it if necessary
 Check the condition of evaporator unit, clean as necessary
 Check electrical wires for damage and for loose connections
 Check pressure switch for function
 Check efficiency of air conditioner after opening the circuit, repairs or as nec-
essary
Yearly replace the drier receiver unit, for the occasion check the whole circuit
for leaks and replace refrigerating agent and refrigerator oil
Yearly have the function of the air flaps and of the defrosting thermostat
checked by a refrigeration specialist
UNDERCARRIAGE + UPPERCARRIAGE + ATTACHMENT
     Check bucket teeth visually for wear
      Lubricate all grease and lubrication points
   Check all parts for cracks
   Check mounting screws of counterweight and tanks for tightness
  Check and lubricate cover hinges and locks, check mounting and efficiency of
cover lifting cylinders
   Check the lowering speed of the attachment ~5 sec.
 Explain proper use and maintenance to the operator

 Ask the operator to lubricate the machine using the lube chart, explain defects
and deficiencies.
 The daily maintenance work of the driver include the check of the proper func-
tion of hydraulic, electric and brakes systems before starting operation.
He must alos perform daily a visual check of engine, hydraulic system, gears
and track parts for leaks.
Tab. 5-9 Control and maintenance chart
R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 5 - 83

MJFCIFSS
Index
Centralized lubrication system
1 Depending on temperature, fuel and oil qualities, the intervals for engine lube oil changes may
be reduced.
3 When using environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids, the maintenance interval must be deter-
mined through oil sample analysis reports.
5.23 Centralized lubrication system
5 - 84 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

MJFCIFSS
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Index
Conversion factors
Pressure : 1 bar = 14.5 PSI

1 PSI = 0.0690 bar
Lenght : 1 mm = 0.03937 inch

1 cm = 0.3937 inch
1 m = 39.37 inch
1 inch = 25.40 mm
1 foot = 0.3048 m
Volume : 1 liter = 0.2642 gallon

1 liter = 2.113 pint
1 liter = 1.057 quart
1 gallon = 3.785 liter
1 cm3 = 0.06102 cubic inch
1 m3 = 1.3079 cubic yard
Torque : 1 Kpm = 7.23 ft.lbs

1 Nm = 0.7375 ft.lbs
1 ft.lbs = 0.138 Kpm
1 ft.lbs = 1.358 Nm
Weight : 1 kg = 2.2046 lbs

1 metric ton = 1.102 short ton
1 metric ton = 2204.6 lbs
1 lbs = 0.4536 kg
1 lbs = 0.000454 metric ton
Temperature : Temp (°F) = Temp (°C) x 1.8 + 32

Temp (°C) = [Temp(°F) - 32] / 1.8
0 °C = 32 °F
100 °C = 212 °F
MJFCIFSS
Index

Information

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Information

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Information

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

en

from serial number 13321

Vehicle ident. number:

0-2 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

able for your convenience.

Modifications, conditions, copyright

1 Product description ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1

2 Safety instructions......................................................................................................................................... 2-1

3 Control and operation ................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.3.4 Jump start procedure ............................................................................................................. 3-64

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 0-5

3.4 Working with the machine.................................................................................................................... 3-77

4 Malfunctions ................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

5 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.3.2 Lubrication chart ..................................................................................................................... 5-11

0-6 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

5.4.6 Lubricating grease and other lubricants ................................................................................. 5-20

5.11.13 Replacing hydraulic hoses ..................................................................................................... 5-55

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 0-7

5.13.4 Releasing the track tension .................................................................................................... 5-62

0-8 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

1.1 Assembly - overview

1.1.1 Machine and construction equipment

Fig. 1-1 Machine and construction equipment

100 Uppercarriage 320 Hydraulic cylinder

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 1-1

Fig. 1-2 Upper carriage

5 Installation carrier 800 Swing ring installation

1-2 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

Fig. 1-3 Upper carriage

7600 Control valve installation 8900 Catwalk

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 1-3

Fig. 1-4 Undercarriage

208 Leading wheel 1000 Rotary connection

1.2 Vibration emissions

1-4 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

Weighted effective vibration in m/s²

Machine type Typical working cycles

The measurement uncertainty is defined in standard EN 12096:1997.

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 1-5

1.3 EC Declaration of Conformity

Fig. 1-5 Sample EC Declaration of Conformity (from year of manufacture 2010)

1-6 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

1.4 Technical data

1.4.1 Working technical data

1.4.2 Technical description

R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859 1-7

1-8 R 984 C - Litronic / 10069859

R984C_es_072011.indd 1 29.07.11 13:49

R984C_es_072011.indd 2 29.07.11 13:49

R984C_es_072011.indd 3 29.07.11 13:49

R984C_es_072011.indd 4 29.07.11 13:49

Reach a New Level of Productivity

Efficiency for Less Cost

Highest Digging and Regeneration System

R984C_es_072011.indd 5 29.07.11 13:49

R984C_es_072011.indd 6 29.07.11 13:49

Experience Liebherr Quality

Advanced Design of All Mining Applications

R984C_es_072011.indd 7 29.07.11 13:49

mm/ft in Stick Gooseneck Gooseneck Gooseneck

10 Max. reach at ground level 10.80 m/35’5”

Max. crowd force at ground level (SAE) 550 kN/123,645 lbf

Capacity ISO 7451 m3 4.70 5.50 6.20